JP2019217372A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of handling a prediction result of jackpot lottery suitably.SOLUTION: A voice lamp controller 113 can discriminate whether or not jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in read-ahead of a lottery result of current jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 to be used in actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the read-ahead would match. If the tables match with one another, a prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery can be handled as credible. If the tables do not match, the prediction result can be handled as incredible. If the prediction result is incredible, the execution of a continuous notice performance is canceled even if the continuous notice performance is scheduled to be executed in a current variation performance. This prevents the occurrence of troubles such as excessive execution of the continuous notice performance as well as execution of the continuous notice performance irrelevant to the actual lottery result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a jackpot lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting opening, and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the result of the lottery on a display screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among this kind of pachinko machines, for example, when a game ball is won at the starting port, one that predicts a lottery result of a jackpot lottery accompanying the prize based on the playing state of the pachinko machine at the time of the prize. is there. In addition, as the gaming state, a low probability state in which the probability of a lottery result of a jackpot lottery associated with a prize being low is a low probability state, and a high probability state in which a probability of a large hit is higher than a low probability state is provided. Then, a lottery result of the jackpot lottery is predicted, and when the prediction result becomes a jackpot, an effect of notifying in advance that there is a high possibility of shifting to a jackpot which is a special game state advantageous to the player (notice ) To raise the expectations of the player.

  In such a pachinko machine, when a game ball wins to the starting port, the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is predicted based on the gaming state at the time of winning, but the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is the It is performed later than the prediction and based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, when a game ball wins at the starting port, a random value is acquired along with the winning, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the winning is a low probability state, a lottery table for the low probability time On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a high probability state, the lottery table for the high probability is referred. Then, the lottery result is predicted based on the referred table and the random number value acquired with the winning.

  In addition, when a random value is acquired along with the winning, when a variable effect corresponding to the winning starts, a jackpot lottery based on the random value is performed. In the big hit lottery, unlike the prediction of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the lottery table is referred to based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the lottery is in the low probability state, the low probability probability lottery table is referred to, while if the gaming state at the time of the lottery is the high probability state, the high probability The time lottery table is referred to. Then, the lottery result is determined based on the referenced table and the random number value acquired with the winning. If the lottery result is a big hit, when the big hit ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set according to the big hit type.

  However, even if a random value is obtained along with the prize, if the variable effect is being executed or a big hit is being performed, the random number obtained with the win is accumulated in a predetermined storage area, and the big hit lottery is performed. Execution is suspended. When a similar prize is repeatedly generated, the jackpot lottery is suspended up to a maximum of four times, for example. Then, when the variable effect or the jackpot that is being executed is completed, if the held jackpot lottery remains, one of the held jackpot lotteries is executed. Thereafter, similarly, while the jackpot lottery is being held, the held jackpot lottery is executed one by one each time the variable effect or the jackpot that is being executed ends.

JP-A-11-333089

  Therefore, when a game ball is newly won to the starting port, if the jackpot lottery is suspended, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning is predicted, the held jackpot lottery is executed. Then, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning is performed. Therefore, the pending jackpot lottery is executed, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that the jackpot is determined. The game state may change before and after.

  If the gaming state changes here, in the changed gaming state, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the new prize is performed, so the lottery table referred to in the prediction of the jackpot lottery result of the new prize, The lottery table to be referred to in the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is changed. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result do not match, and when an effect (notification effect) is performed using the prediction result, the actual jackpot is obtained. There is a high possibility that an effect unrelated to the lottery result will be executed. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may not match, the use of the prediction result has been refrained. As a result, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery were wasted.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle a jackpot lottery prediction result.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information obtaining means for obtaining random number information accompanying the establishment, and a random number obtained by the random number information obtaining means Random number information storage means for storing information, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions A lottery determining means for determining from the random number information obtained by the storage information obtaining means, and setting a lottery condition of the lottery determining means when a special game state to be shifted according to a result of the lottery determination of the lottery determining means ends. Main control means having lottery condition setting means and performing main control relating to the game, and first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high; And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means. The main control means includes: a notification means for notifying one of the first suggestion information and another second suggestion information. The first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means. A lottery result determining unit that determines a lottery result when the random number information obtained along with the obtaining of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determining unit; and a determination result indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit. Determination information transmitting means for transmitting determination information including information and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control means; and a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means. A second lottery condition acquiring unit for acquiring a condition, and condition information transmitting unit transmitting condition information indicating a lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit to the sub control unit, wherein the sub control unit Storing the determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information in association with each other Determination information storage means, condition information reception means for receiving condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means, A first comparing unit that compares the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the information storage unit with the lottery condition; A first notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified based on a comparison result by the unit.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the first notification control means determines a result of the comparison by the first comparing means, and determines whether or not the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means is sufficient. When the lottery condition shown and the lottery condition shown by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means do not match, the notifying means is controlled so that the second suggestion information is notified.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the first notification control unit determines whether or not the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit is a result of the comparison by the first comparison unit. When the selected lottery condition and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information changes the lottery result to the special game state. If so, the notifying means is controlled so that the first suggestion information is notified.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the determination information storage means includes: determination result information of determination information received by the determination information receiving means; And storing the information in association with the reception order of the determination information, wherein the first comparing means selects a lottery corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. A determination result information obtaining unit that obtains a result that has not been determined by the lottery determination unit; and a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and a lottery condition indicated by the condition information in comparison by the first comparing unit. And a first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the first comparing means when the judgment result information does not match, and the judgment condition information obtained by the judgment result information obtaining means is And sequentially drawing condition indicated by the determination condition information to old signal sequence is to compare the drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  A gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information obtaining means for obtaining random number information based on the establishment, and a random number storing a plurality of random number information obtained by the random number information obtaining means. Information storage means, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and a lottery result obtained under one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is obtained as the storage information acquisition. Lottery determination means for determining based on random number information obtained by the means, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and a special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means ends And a lottery control unit that controls the subsequent determination by the lottery determination unit to be performed under predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting unit. A main control means for performing main control relating to the game, and a notifying means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state, and a sub-controller controlled by an instruction from the main control means. Control means, wherein the main control means obtains information for judging a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. Lottery condition obtaining means, and a lottery result determined when the random number information obtained along with the acquisition of the information is determined by the lottery determining means in the lottery condition determined by the information obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means. Result determination means for determining the lottery result, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting determination information including the following to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, and the second lottery condition obtaining means Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating a lottery condition to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means receives condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means. Means, determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, associating the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means with the determination condition information. Information stored in the determination information storage means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the lottery condition received by the condition information receiving means. A second comparing unit that compares the lottery condition indicated by the condition information; and setting based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit so that the suggestion information is reported by the reporting unit. Notification setting means, and when the suggestion information is notified by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means based on a comparison result by the second comparison means. And second notification control means for controlling the

  According to a sixth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, the second notification control means displays a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information. When the lottery condition matches, control is performed so that the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means.

  7. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the second notification control means includes a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information, and the condition information. If the lottery condition does not match with the lottery condition, the notification means is controlled so that the suggestion information is not notified.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information accompanying the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. Are compared by the first comparing means. Then, when the notification by the notification means is performed, the first notification control means is controlled by the first notification control means so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the comparison result of the comparison means. You. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first suggestion is made based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the information and the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the result of the comparison by the first comparing means indicates that the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, The notification means is controlled by the first notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Can be reported to the notification means when the user cannot trust the second suggestion information. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification unit regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Therefore, since the use of the unreliable lottery result can be suppressed, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the second aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, as a result of the comparison by the first comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special gaming state, the notification unit is controlled by the first notification control unit so that the first suggestion information is notified. . If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery determined by the lottery result determination unit. When the result can be trusted, if the reliable lottery result indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the first suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, notification by the notification means can be performed by using a reliable lottery result among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means. In other words, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be used, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and stores the determination information in the determination information storage means. Of the stored judgment result information, the judgment result information acquisition means obtains information for which the judgment of the lottery result corresponding to the judgment result information has not been judged by the lottery judgment means. Then, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared by the first comparing means in order of the acquired judgment condition information from the oldest reception order. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the first comparison unit, the comparison by the first comparison unit is stopped by the first comparison stop unit. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match during the comparison, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In the subsequent comparison, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison by the first comparison unit is performed. If the lottery results are consistent or unknown, the comparison can be stopped. Therefore, when the comparison by the first comparing means becomes meaningless, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquiring means based on the establishment, and is stored in the random number information storage means. When one of the random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, the lottery in one preset lottery condition among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and the state shifts to the special game state according to the result of the lottery. In addition, the suggestion information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high is notified by the notification means, and when the special game state ends, the determination by the subsequent lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under predetermined conditions. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the information is obtained by the lottery result determination means. The lottery result is determined in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. When the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information is stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the judgment condition information. Is done. Also, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is determined by the notification determination means, where if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, the condition information receiving means, The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means are compared by the second comparing means. Then, based on the comparison result, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is controlled by the second notification control means.

  When the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may change there. If the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit before the change of the lottery condition and the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit after the change of the lottery condition do not match. And the lottery results may not match. Therefore, when the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit up to that time may not be trusted and may not be used. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means. Can be done. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, it is possible to notify the suggestion information to the notification unit using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit from being wasted, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  According to the gaming machine of the sixth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, as a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. In such a case, control is performed by the second notification control means so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine of claim 6, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and the lottery determined by the lottery result determination unit. If the result can be trusted, the suggestion information can be notified to the notification means using the reliable lottery result. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, reliable ones can be used, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  According to the gaming machine of the seventh aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the fifth or sixth aspect, as a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information Are different from each other, control is performed by the second notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine of claim 7, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Is not trusted, the unreliable lottery result is used to prevent the notification means from notifying the suggestion information. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to suppress the use of unreliable ones, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled. .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the big hit effect. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters and the holding ball storage area. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating data included in a prefetch command. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating data included in a fanfare command. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the back surface B. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the ending effect determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a fanfare command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 5A is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which arises when determining the display mode of an ending effect only based on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which arises when determining the display mode of an ending effect only based on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which arises when determining the display mode of an ending effect only based on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing of a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing of the sound lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process of the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow which changes a continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to incline downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of a "city stage", an "empty stage", and an "island stage" are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in response to the change, so that the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is formed). (Flowing region).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  Although details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a lottery of the first symbol (special symbol) is performed, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit. Judgment (big hit lottery) is performed. In the jackpot lottery, if it is determined that the jackpot is, the type of the jackpot is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-change jackpot, a 2R certain-change jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

  The “15R probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-probability state when the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds ends, and the “2R probable jackpot” When the maximum number of rounds is two rounds, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state. The “15R normal jackpot” means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-probability state when a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds ends and a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes ) Is a jackpot that reduces time.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, the state shifts to the special jackpot that is a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is not being changed and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of the probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It refers to the state of the game that is easy to ball. While the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased during probable change or during working hours, but instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, the opening time of the motorized accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times the motorized accessory is opened in one big hit may be changed.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not the fluctuation is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64, or a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. The first symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is shown in a lighting state, or a ball whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 (reserved ball). ) Is indicated by the lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (in a high probability state, During a low probability state or during a big hit). In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the stop symbol according to the big hit type is displayed on the LED 37a instead of the stop symbol indicating only the big hit or not.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variation display of a third symbol while synchronizing with a variation display on the first symbol display device 37, using a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning) as a trigger. (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and a second symbol constituted by an LED that variably displays the second symbol when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 as a trigger. A display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 described later, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the game status on the first symbol display device 37. Decorative display according to the display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with attached patterns imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even-numbered symbols are added (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) are arranged.

  More specifically, if the lottery result is “15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot”, a variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers “1,3,5,7,9” are added is aligned. If the lottery result is “15R normal big hit”, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols to which “even numbers“ 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 ”are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, a continuous announcement effect may be performed to suggest (notice) that the possibility of the jackpot is high, In this case, when the variable display is performed, a predetermined combination of main symbols (for example, on the activated line L1, the combinations of main symbols are "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1). , A so-called “chance eye” is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and a lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and are fluctuated by scrolling from top to bottom (Y direction indicated by an arrow) periodically in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Display is performed. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol stops on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance port 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character is displayed. The announcement production is performed.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  Subsequently, the big hit effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5B and 5C show display screens displayed in an ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect. It is the figure which illustrated.

  In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), a jackpot lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and thereafter, the first symbol (special symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device. In response to the variable display of 37, the variable display of the third symbol is performed.

  When the variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). , The display is switched to the medium speed variation display of the third symbol, and further to the low speed variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the variable effect ends, and subsequently, the big hit effect starts. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not displayed, a stop display is performed and the variable effect ends, and if there is a start winning prize held, The next jackpot lottery is performed, and the next variable effect is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is an effect for increasing the player's expectation by notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started while blessing the jackpot. In addition, in the ending effect, when the jackpot is ended and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning, the player is notified that the lottery result is a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries (fixed effect display Or simply informing the player that the jackpot has ended (performing a normal display).

  If the `` determination effect display '' is performed in the ending effect, if the jackpot is determined based on the starting winning prize held after the jackpot has ended, the lottery result will be a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries Expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot is completed, the player can be delighted every time the jackpot lottery based on the starting winning prize held is performed until the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  When a jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in synchronization with the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A fanfare command is transmitted to device 113. Although details will be described later (see FIG. 9), this fanfare command includes information indicating a gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. When the fan lamp command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts the fan game effect following the variable effect.

  Next, the main control device 110 transmits a round number command indicating the first round to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. When the number-of-rounds command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round, following the fanfare effect. In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the jackpot state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated a number of times (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to the jackpot type.

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls win), the specific winning opening 65a is closed. At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the audio ramp controller 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening and closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. Thereafter, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new round number is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round effect from the first round to the round (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to the jackpot type is sequentially executed.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are all completed. When the ending command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the ending effect, when the jackpot is ended and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning, the player is notified that the lottery result is a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries. Is performed (fixed effect display is performed) or simply that the jackpot is finished is notified to the player (normal display is performed). Although the details will be described later, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the “determined effect display” or the “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  When “normal display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “Makeover!” Is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. You. This screen means that the jackpot ends. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot has ended, so that the player can prepare for returning to the normal game.

  On the other hand, when “determined effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, “Super chance!” Is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This screen means that if any of the held jackpot lotteries is performed, the lottery result will always be a jackpot.

  When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the lottery result will be a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit is completed, so It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the player can be depressed. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Here, returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by displaying, by a lighting state, whether or not a lottery of the second symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a second symbol corresponding to a lottery result of the second symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passages through the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more (for example, , 8 times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  Therefore, when the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 increases due to the reduced working hours, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly. As a result, even if a game is played, the number of balls possessed is hard to decrease, Alternatively, the number of possessed balls does not decrease. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state, the player can obtain a feeling of a period in which the jackpot can be obtained in a state where the number of possessed balls is hard to decrease or in a state where the number of possessed balls does not decrease. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and when the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned off so that the jackpot stops symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the big hit. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. When this big hit occurs, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a value in the game (game value). Be done.

  The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the big hit, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of the big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  The jackpot is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is formed as a big hit. You may do it.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and display settings on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and display settings of the second symbol display device 83. used.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter used for selecting the jackpot symbol are set. C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used. The second symbol display device 83 uses the second random number counter C4 to set the display, and the second random number counter C4 uses the second initial value random number counter CINI2 to set the initial value. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time an update is performed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described later in detail, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Is stored in any of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number of the jackpot is set by a jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the value of the random number of the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value (hit value), it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (a period during which the probability is not being changed), and a probability of the jackpot being larger than the low probability. There are two types of high probability probability jackpot random number tables 202a2 used in the high probability state (during probabilistic change), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the big hit, the probability of the big hit is changed between the low probability and the high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit value) that becomes a big hit at the time of low probability is three, and the value “7,307,582” is stored in the low probability big hit random number table 202a1. ing. On the other hand, the number of the random numbers (hit value) which is a big hit at the time of high probability is 30, and the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390” , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 833, 866, 892 "are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. .

  In this embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated. Each hit value is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a hit value regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a big hit may increase. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number of the jackpot according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, according to the low-probability state or the high-probability state), the jackpot Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, Each of the counter values of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired, and thereafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the acquired counter values. The lottery result is predicted prior to the jackpot lottery. Have been. Hereinafter, predicting the lottery result prior to the jackpot lottery is described as reading the lottery result in advance. In this pre-reading, the counter value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are used to predict the success or failure of the big hit lottery and its type. The variation pattern type is predicted using the counter value of the variation type counter CS1. Hereinafter, the result of the prediction of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the type thereof will be described as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the result of predicting the variation pattern type will be described as a prediction result of the variation pattern type.

  When the success or failure of the jackpot lottery is predicted in the pre-reading, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (hit value) Is compared with. Specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of winning is a low-probability state, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to. The jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to. Then, when the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value (winning value) stored in the referenced table, it is predicted (determined) that the lottery result is a big hit. .

  Then, after the pre-reading (possibly after a time interval), the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game of the pachinko machine 10 when the variable effect corresponding to the counter value is started. A jackpot lottery is performed based on the state. In the present embodiment, if a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 during the execution of the fluctuation effect or during the big hit, the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 is held. This reservation is performed up to four times.

  Then, when the running effect and the jackpot are finished, if the starting prize is held, one of the oldest jackpot lotteries associated with the held starting prize is executed. Thereafter, in the same manner, while the start winning prize is being held, each time the variable effect or the big hit during the execution ends, the jackpot lottery accompanying the held starting prize is executed one by one in order.

  Therefore, when the ball newly wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), if the starting winning is already suspended, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is read in advance, By the time the jackpot lottery associated with the new starting prize is performed, the jackpot lottery that has already been held is performed. If the jackpot lottery already held is performed and the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. Sometimes. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery associated with a new starting prize is performed in the changed gaming state, so that the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 referred to at the time of pre-reading and at the time of the lottery are set to one. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the prediction result does not match the actual lottery result.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of the big hit in the case of a big hit, and is added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), The information is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number with a big hit, that is, if it is a random number to be lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of departure. In this case, the stop type at the time of departure is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, and the variation pattern at the time of departure is determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. It is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number with a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the stop type at the time of the big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is the first hit type stored in the same holding area. It is determined based on the values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the maximum round number shifts to the low probability state after the 15 round jackpot. There is a “15R normal big hit” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “2R certain variable big hit” where the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of big hits.

  In the big hit type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. In the present embodiment, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value “40-79” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. The value “80-99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change big hit.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability change big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R regular jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start win), the value of the RAM 203 is updated. The ball is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  A plurality of stop type selection tables (not shown) are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, in which the range of the random number from which the stop type is selected differs for each table. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a table in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as 0 to 89 is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, It is easy to select "completely off". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than front and rear out”. In the case of the low probability state, a table in which the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. It is difficult to select "completely out of order". In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as a so-called normal reach, a super reach, a special reach, etc., based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot variation pattern table used at the time of a jackpot and a detachment variation pattern table used at the time of a detachment are prepared as the variation pattern tables. In addition, as a variation pattern table for deviation, a variation pattern for deviation (probability variation) according to whether the game state is a time reduction state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, or a normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state. A table and a variation pattern table for deviation (normal) are prepared.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and a 2R probability variable jackpot that is referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that is a big hit, the hold area is set according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area. Is determined from the jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in.

  There are various types of normal reach, super reach, and special reach in common for 15R jackpots. Correlation with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is as follows: normal reach various 0-10, super reach various 11-99, special reach various 100 to 198. The various types of super-reach are various types of the no-reach types, which are short-reach-reach variations, in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter-stop symbols are aligned). The first symbol (or the third symbol) is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than the normal reach (e.g., a reach developed from a long reach or a normal reach). A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the time reach (for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach or a special reach whose development destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach). Since a table common to the 15R jackpots is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach can be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there is a large number of productions with different rendering contents in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach displayed suddenly, and in addition, a plurality of reaches with different effect contents are included, such as an effect in which a notice effect before the start of change is added and an effect in which a big hit is added by re-change.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for the 2R probability change jackpot, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is such that the 2R fluctuation A is 0 to 99, the 2R fluctuation B is 100 to 149, and the 2R fluctuation C is 150 to 198. The 2R variation A is, for example, an effect in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol with "chicken", and the 2R variation B does not normally appear. The final 1st symbol (or the 3rd symbol) is an effect in which the final symbol is stopped at a specific symbol with the “girl”. The 2R variation C is the final 1st symbol with the lighting of the one-shot notification lamp. This is an effect in which the symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established, the last The number of symbols to shift the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after, etc.) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  Then, for example, the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) is a complete deviation exclusive reference which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and a case where reach other than front and rear deviation and reach other than front and rear deviation are determined. Are divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a value (hit value) that is a big hit, that is, if it is a value that goes out, when the gaming state is in the normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is: It is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern.

  There are two types of exclusive deviations: short deviations in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time and reach is not established, and long deviations in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short deviation but reach is not established. The association is 0-148 for short deviation and 149-198 for long deviation. In addition, the reach is common, but the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short, the normal reach is different, the super reach is longer than the normal reach, the super reach is different, and the super reach is longer than the various super specials. There are various types of reach, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0-148 for various types of normal reach, 149-190 for various types of super reach, and 191-198 for various types of special reach.

  In the same manner as the variation (normal) variation pattern table, the variation pattern table for the variation is referred to when complete departure is determined as the stop type at the time of the departure. It is referred to when the reach only and the reach other than the front and rear and the reach other than the front and rear are determined.Based on the common reach that includes various types of normal reach, various types of super reach and various types of special reach, and the type of stop at the time of release Are divided into groups (groups), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, and if the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, it is stored in the same holding area. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern.

  The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete departure is 0 to 190 for short departure and 191 to 198 for long departure. In addition, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is 0 to 148 for various normal reach, 149 to 190 for various super reach, and 191 to 198 for various special reach.

  The out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of the probable change. Become. Therefore, when the player is in a time-saving state or a high probability state, if a lot of deviations are performed, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving a waiting state to the player and giving the player discomfort. there is a possibility. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is undesirably reduced because the operating rate is reduced. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of a probability change, the short variation is configured to be more easily selected than in the other cases, and the start of the next fluctuation display is performed early, so that the gaming state is improved. The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice or the like). In addition, the selection of the type of miss is configured to be divided into a variation pattern table for the removal (normal) and a variation pattern table for the removal (probable variation), but even if the game state is normal, a plurality of holding balls (for example, In the case of a maximum of four, three or more), the fluctuation display may be terminated early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table. May be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probable variation corresponding to.

  Further, in the above-described variation pattern tables for deviations, short deviations and long deviations are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, by referring to other tables, the short deviations and the long deviations are determined by a predetermined probability. May be selected. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and setting of display on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Here, returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, and I / Os. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a game state flag 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball number counter 203c, a post-big hit game state flag 203d, a big hit flag 203e, a pre-read execution flag 203f, and a big hit winning flag 203g. At least.

  The gaming state flag 203a is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (probable change). When the gaming state flag 203a is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, and when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. Is shown. The gaming state flag 203a refers to the above-described low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or the high probability jackpot random number table 202a1 when a jackpot lottery is performed or the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read. Used by the MPU 201 to determine whether to do so.

  Specifically, if the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to and the jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to and the jackpot lottery is performed. Although details will be described later, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read, not only the state of the game state flag 203a but also the state of the after-big hit game state flag 203d and the state of the big hit middle prize flag 203g are taken into consideration. It is determined whether to refer to the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2, and the determined tables 202a1 and 202a2 are referred to to determine the jackpot lottery result. Read ahead.

  The game state flag 203a is set to off by the initialization process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S714 in FIG. 25). Also, when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, it is set to off (see S316 in FIG. 21). Then, when a jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON (see S916 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, even if a jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a jackpot, if the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot ends (see FIG. 27). S915: No). In addition, even when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is out of order, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot ends. However, the game state flag 203a may be set to be turned off (overwritten) when the big hit is completed (see S915: No in FIG. 27). That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a may be updated (re-set) every time a jackpot lottery is performed.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7). Each of these areas includes a first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, a first collision type counter storage area 203b2 for storing the value of the first collision type counter C2, and a stoppage. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a prize-winning game state flag 203a stored as a prize-winning game state flag. And a winning game state flag storage area 203b5.

  In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4, and the winning game state flag storage Although the area 203b5 is provided in one reserved ball storage area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided, and each of the five areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4, and 203b5 is stored in one of the reserved ball storage areas. May be provided.

  As described above, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained at the timing when the ball wins, and they are held in the holding ball storage area 203b. Stored in the area. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the gaming state flag 203a is acquired at the winning timing, and the gaming state flag 203a stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as the winning gaming state flag. Stored in the hold area. Here, the value stored in the holding area is used when pre-reading the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and when performing the jackpot lottery. The prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be described later.

  In the reserved ball storage area 203b, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, the winning game state flag) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64 is maximum. It is stored up to four times. In the case where data is stored, the data is sequentially stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). It is memorized. In other words, the data corresponding to the earlier start winning prize is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored even if the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 stores the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the prize-winning game) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. State flag) is shifted (moved) to each of the execution areas 203b1 to 203b5. Then, the data shifted to the execution area is referred to in the change start processing (see FIG. 22), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Here, the details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 shifts the random number value in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the execution area. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the first hold area is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the execution area, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the first hold area is disturbed. The numerical value is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the execution area, and the random number value of the change type counter storage area 203b4 of the hold first area is shifted to the change type counter storage area 203b4 of the execution area. Is shifted to the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 in the execution area.

  When the shift of each data to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the data stored (reserved) in other reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) is deleted. Then, a shift process is performed to fill the reserved areas with the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  For example, when the start of the variable effect is determined, it is assumed that data is stored in all the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in the reserved ball storage area 203b (the reserved ball number counter described later). 203c is "4"). In this case, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) respectively. , And shifts to the reserved area with the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  In addition, for example, when data is stored only in the two reserved areas of the reserved first area and the reserved second area when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined (the value of the retained ball number counter 203c described later). Becomes “2”), the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed on the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control load can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the reserved area (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) may be shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area), so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (a variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) up to four times. The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S613 of FIG. 25). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be displayed on the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S204 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the retained ball counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new variable effect is executed (see S306 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  The sound lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of times of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the variable effect is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a winning start is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball count command from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113. Even if the number of balls to be retained deviates from the actual number of balls reserved for the fluctuation effect held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is a flag that indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state or a high-probability state when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and the big hit ends. When the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when the big hit is completed, and when the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on, the big hit is ended. In this case, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state.

  The post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is used by the MPU 201 when a big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10. Although the details will be described later, when a big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10, a fanfare command for notifying the start of the big hit or the like is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In that case, the MPU 201 generates the fanfare command based on the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d. Further, although the details will be described later, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is also used for pre-reading the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the data stored in the reserved area of the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b. Is used by the MPU 201 when the target data is obtained with the start winning prize during the jackpot.

  Then, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is set to an initial value of off by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S714 of FIG. 25). In addition, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is set to ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a probability change big hit (see S410 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the post-big-hit game state flag 203d is set to OFF when the big hit type is determined to be the normal big hit (see S411 in FIG. 22). When it is determined that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of the range, the state of the flag 203d does not change.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is determined to be the probability change jackpot, or when the jackpot type is determined to be the normal jackpot, the state of the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is set. , The state of the flag 203d may be set before the big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10 after the big hit type is determined.

  The big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit. When the big hit flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit, and when the big hit flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit. The big hit flag 203e is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not the winning has occurred during the big hit or other than the big hit when the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning). Used by

  In the present embodiment, when the ball has won the first ball entry opening 64 (starting winning), if the big hit flag 203e is on, it is assumed that the winning has occurred during the big hit, and the ball is first hit. If the big hit flag 203e is turned off when a win is made to the mouth 64 (start winning), it is assumed that the win has occurred other than during the big hit.

  This big hit flag 203e is set to OFF as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S714 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, the big hit flag 203d is set on when the big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10 (see S315 in FIG. 21), and is set off when the big hit ends (see S914 in FIG. 27).

  The pre-reading execution flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the new ball when the ball newly enters the first ball entrance 64. When the prefetch execution flag 203f is on, it indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is to be prefetched for a new entry, and when the prefetch execution flag 203f is off, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the new entry is displayed. Indicates not to read ahead.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of holdings of the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 reaches the maximum value (four times in the present embodiment), the ball enters the first entrance 64. Even if the ball is newly entered into the ball opening 64, further starting winnings are not suspended. That is, even if the ball enters the first entrance hole 64, the counter value (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a) associated with the entering ball are not obtained, and they are It is not held in the held ball storage area 203b.

  The prefetch execution flag 203f is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether to prefetch the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for a new ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. Then, when the ball enters the first entrance port 64, if the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, if it is not the maximum value) except for the newly entered ball, the look-ahead is performed. The execution flag 203f is set to ON (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, if the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203 c is 4 (that is, if it is the maximum value), the prefetch execution is performed. The flag 203f is kept off (see S203: No in FIG. 20). After the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to OFF when the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery ends (see S516 in FIG. 23).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the state of the prefetch execution flag 203f is set. However, the state of the flag 203f indicates that the ball is in the first entry position. What is necessary is just to set so that it may be set after the ball enters the ball opening 64 and before the prefetch execution process (see S107 in FIG. 19) described later is executed.

  The jackpot-winning prize flag 203g is determined by the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the prize-winning game state flag) acquired with the prize (starting prize) to the first entrance 64. It is a flag indicating whether the game has been acquired by a start winning prize, a prize other than during a jackpot, or obtained.

  When the big hit prize flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the data acquired in accordance with the prize (starting prize) to the first entrance 64 is obtained by the starting prize during the big hit. When the middle prize flag 203g is off, it indicates that the data acquired with the prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 is data obtained by a start prize other than the big hit. The jackpot-winning prize flag 203g indicates whether the prefetching is performed by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability or the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. Used by MPU 201 to determine whether to do so.

  When the jackpot-winning prize flag 203g is off, the MPU 201 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching based on the state of the above-mentioned prize-winning game state flag (that is, the prize-winning game state flag 203a). On the other hand, when the big hit prize flag 203g is ON, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching are determined based on the state of the post-big hit game state flag 203d.

  More specifically, when the big hit prize flag 203g is off and the prize-winning game state flag is off, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is referred to, while the big hit prize flag 203g is turned off. In this case, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read.

  In addition, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on and the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to. On the other hand, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on, If the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is on, the pre-read of the jackpot lottery result is performed by referring to the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  When the ball has newly entered the first entrance opening 64, the above described jackpot winning prize flag 203g indicates that the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 except for the newly entered ball (ie, that If it is not the maximum value, and if the big hit flag 203e is on (that is, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit), it is set to on (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when a ball newly enters the first entrance hole 64, the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, it is not the maximum value) except for the newly entered ball. If the big hit flag 203e is off (that is, the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit), it is set to off (see S211 in FIG. 20). When a ball newly enters the first entrance hole 64, if the number of retained balls counter 203c is 4 (that is, if it is the maximum value), except for the newly entered ball, a big hit occurs. The state of the winning flag 203g is not changed (S203: No in FIG. 20).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the state of the big hit prize flag 203g is set, but the state of the flag 203g is that the ball is in the first position. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be set after the ball enters the entrance 64 and before the prefetch execution process (refer to S107 of FIG. 19) mentioned later is performed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main control device 110 and the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning state gaming state flag) ) Are acquired and stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern type are read in advance.

  When the success or failure of the lottery result is predicted, first, one of the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used for prediction is determined. The value of the random number per hit counter C1 is compared with the value of random numbers (hit value) stored in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prediction, and if any of them matches, it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit. Predicted (determined).

  In the present embodiment, if the data acquired along with the start winning is obtained by starting winning other than during the big hit, whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a low probability state or a high probability state It is determined whether or not there is, and if the gaming state at the time of winning is the low probability state, the success or failure is predicted using the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a high probability state, the success or failure is predicted using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2.

  More specifically, if the big hit prize flag 203g is off, and if the prize-winning game state flag in the data acquired with the prize is off, the low-probability big-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 is used. If the winning gaming state flag is ON, the winning / non-winning is predicted using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the data acquired along with the start winning prize is obtained by the start winning prize during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the end of the jackpot. It is determined whether the gaming state is set to the high probability state or not. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at the end of the big hit, the success or failure is predicted using the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1. Is done. On the other hand, if the gaming state becomes the high probability state at the end of the big hit, the success or failure is predicted using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2.

  More specifically, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on and the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low-probability occasions is used to predict whether or not the jackpot is used. If the state flag 203d is on, the success or failure is predicted using the high-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a2. The reason why the method of determining the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is changed depending on whether the data acquired along with the start winning prize is obtained by the start winning prize during the jackpot or by the prize other than during the jackpot. Will be described later.

  Then, the success or failure of the lottery result is predicted, and as a result, if a jackpot is predicted, the type of the jackpot is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the jackpot type table (not shown). Then, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, if it is predicted that the result of the lottery is out of range, the type of stop at the time of out of range is predicted. Also in the case where the stop type at the time of departure is predicted, similarly to the case of the jackpot lottery, the acquired value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the value of the random number stored in the stop type selection table (not shown) Are compared, and the type of stop corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, when the variation pattern type is predicted, the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the variation pattern table, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, and the variation type is determined. The variation pattern type corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, as described above, when the pre-reading is executed in the main control device 110 and the correctness / non-permission and its type and the variation pattern type are predicted, the pre-read command including the prediction result is transmitted from the main control device 110 by voice. The lamp control device 113 is notified. The prefetch command will be described later. When receiving the pre-read command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect for a series of variable effects suspended at that time. Then, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be performed, the mode of the continuous announcement effect is further set.

  Here, the continuous announcement effect will be described. The continuous announcement effect is a kind of announcement effect that suggests (notices) that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the prize (starting prize) to the first entrance 64 is likely to be a jackpot, An effect in which a chance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variable effect over all the variable effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous announcement effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the suspended fluctuation effect, the player is provided with a feeling of expectation to be a big hit after all of the suspended fluctuation effects are completed. You can have it. In the present embodiment, when a continuous announcement effect is performed over all the variable effects that are suspended at the time of winning, a chance is displayed in each of the variable effects, but the same character or the same character is used in each of the variable effects. You may be comprised so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. Also, the display may be such that the number of the same character or the number of characters related to the same character is increased each time the variable effect is performed. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the variable effect different from the normal effect has been performed, and thus can recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot will be obtained after all of the suspended variable effects have been completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the suspended fluctuation effect, when the fluctuation effect ends on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol (for example, FIG. On the activated line L1 shown in FIG. 4, "3", "4", and "1" are displayed in the main symbol combination in order from the left symbol row Z1. Then, among the series of variable effects in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, for the last variable effect, no chance symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  Usually, the player pays attention to the fluctuating effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game. Therefore, by displaying the chance eyes continuously as a stop symbol appearing after the stop of the fluctuating effect. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been performed. Further, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eyes are displayed, so that the player feels the expectation that the jackpot will be obtained after the end of the continuous announcement effect. You can have.

  Next, referring to FIG. 8, a description will be given of a prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110. The look-ahead command is a prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the look-ahead (whether the jackpot lottery is successful, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the stop type at the time of a miss in the case of a miss, the variation pattern type), and the lottery result in the prefetch When a prediction is made, the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, referred to as a “prediction precondition”) which is a precondition for the prediction. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted on the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Specifically, it means that the main control device 110 has used the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to predict the lottery result. On the other hand, when the prediction precondition is the high probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted on the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Specifically, it means that the main control device 110 has predicted the lottery result using the jackpot random number table for high probability time 202a2.

  FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. In FIG. 8, the left direction is the upper bit direction of data and the right direction is the lower bit direction of data. In this embodiment, each command is composed of 2 bytes regardless of the type of the command. Data indicating the type of the command is stored in the upper 1 byte, and the lower 1 byte is stored in the lower 1 byte. , Data serving as parameters of the command are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, data indicating that the command is a prefetch command is stored in the upper one byte of the prefetch command, and data serving as a parameter of the prefetch command is stored in the lower one byte. Have been.

  Specifically, the prediction prerequisite for the prefetch is indicated by the most significant bit of the eight bits forming the lower one byte. The lower three bits following the most significant bit indicate the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the lower three bits following the three bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lot indicate the prediction result of the variation pattern type. Is shown. Note that other information is indicated for the least significant bit.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the precondition for the prefetching is that if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates a low probability state, and the most significant bit of the lower byte is If “1” is stored, it indicates a high probability state. In other words, if the most significant bit of the lower byte is “0”, it means that the main control device 110 has predicted the lottery result using the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1. When the upper bit is “1”, it means that the main control device 110 has predicted the lottery result by using the high-probability occasional jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command is based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicates that if "000" is stored in the lower three bits following the most significant bit of the lower byte, it will be "completely out of order" that does not become a reach. Show. Similarly, if “001” is stored, it indicates “out-of-front-rear” in which a out-of-front-reach is generated. When "011" is stored, it indicates "15R normal jackpot". When "100" is stored, it indicates "2 probability variable jackpot". If "101" is stored, it indicates "15R probable big hit".

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b3), in the prediction result of the variation pattern type, “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following the 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command. Indicates that it is off (short off). Similarly, if “001” is stored, it indicates a miss (long out), if “010” is stored, it indicates normal reach, and if “011” is stored, it is super reach. , And if “100” is stored, it indicates that it is a special reach.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected, the main control device 110 executes the pre-reading process, and includes the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading in the pre-reading command, and By transmitting the information to the lamp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are configured to include both the case of the jackpot and the case of the miss, but each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of the miss. May be configured so as to be divided. Each reach in the case of a big hit and each reach in the case of a departure are configured separately, and further, the execution judgment of the continuous announcement effect in the sound ramp control device 113 is also taken into consideration in consideration of the prediction result of the variation pattern type. With such a configuration, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be determined under more detailed conditions by increasing the types of the prediction result of the variation pattern type notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, the control requiring pre-reading can be diversified, so that the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be more diversified.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 110 does not notify the audio lamp control device 113 only of whether the game is a jackpot or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the prefetch command. , Or "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out", and in the case of a big hit, notify whether it is "15R normal big hit", "2R probable big hit", or "15R probable big hit" I have. As a result, in comparison with the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is simply a notification of a miss or a jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform execution determination of a continuous announcement effect described later on more detailed conditions. For example, it is possible to diversify the control that requires pre-reading. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed more variously.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the result, divided into a 15R regular jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R probability variable jackpot. Although the prefetch command is configured as described above, it is a matter of course that the prefetch command may simply be configured to notify that a big hit has occurred. In addition, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur during the jackpot, the main control device 110 is divided into “15R jackpot” (corresponding to 15R regular jackpot and 15R probability variable jackpot) and “2R jackpot” (corresponding to 2R probability variable jackpot). The pre-read command may be configured so as to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from the. Alternatively, depending on whether or not the gaming state to be shifted to after the jackpot is a high probability state, the game state is divided into “probable jackpot” (15R certain jackpot and 2R jackpot) and “normal jackpot” (15R jackpot). The pre-read command may be configured so that the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the complete out, the out of front and back reach, and the reach other than the out of front and back. Although the pre-read command is configured as described above, the pre-read command may of course be configured to simply notify that the command is off. Further, the prefetch command may be configured to be separated into a case where a reach is generated or a case where a reach is completely performed. With this configuration, if the information content to be notified to the sound ramp control device 113 is reduced as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result of the present embodiment. It can be more simplified than in the case. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the control related to the pre-reading, suppress an increase in the load of the control related to the pre-reading, and direct the processing capability of the voice lamp control device 113 to other control. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require pre-reading while performing control by pre-reading.

  In addition, in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the pre-reading command, if the information content to be notified to the audio ramp control device 113 is simply reduced to “big hit” or “missing” as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 Then, the process based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared with the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the control related to the pre-reading, suppress an increase in the load of the control related to the pre-reading, and direct the processing capability of the voice lamp control device 113 to other control. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require pre-reading while performing control by pre-reading.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a description will be given of a fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the fanfare command. As in the case of FIG. 8, in FIG. 9, it is assumed that the left direction is the upper bit direction of the data and the right direction is the lower bit direction of the data. Of the two-byte command, data indicating the type of the command is stored in the upper one byte, and data serving as a parameter of the command is stored in the lower one byte.

  As described above, the fanfare command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 of the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. . Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and thereafter, when the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare command is sent from the main controller 110. It is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113.

  In the present embodiment, information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is included in the fanfare command. The game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is acquired. Although the details will be described later, the game state acquired here is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 determines a display mode of performing “fixed effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, data indicating that the command is a fanfare command is stored in the upper one byte of the fanfare command, and data serving as a parameter of the fanfare command is stored in the lower one byte. Have been.

  Specifically, the most significant bit of the eight bits forming the lower one byte indicates the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. That is, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is shown. Other information is indicated in the other lower 7 bits following the uppermost bit. As shown in FIG. 9B, if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “low probability state” at the end of the current big hit. When "1" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "high probability state" at the end of the current big hit.

  When the main control device 110 generates the fanfare command and the above-mentioned post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off, “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, and the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d Is ON, "1" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte.

  In the present embodiment, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a fanfare command. The main control device 110 may notify the sound ramp control device 113 of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, or an ending command. . That is, the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and further determines the type of the jackpot, and then determines whether the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by audio lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a command for notifying the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 by a fanfare command. When the stop type command notified from the control device 110 is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the stop type indicated by the stop type command is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on what the stop type indicates. The game state may be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  That is, in the main control device 110, when a jackpot lottery is performed, a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the determined stop type. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. It is shown whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the stop type command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the stop type indicated by the stop type command. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a continuous announcement determination table 222a. The RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 has a pre-reading information storage area 223a, a reserved ball count counter 223b, a post-big hit game state flag 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and an ending mode counter. 223f, a continuous notice lottery counter 223g, a continuous notice number counter 223h, and a post-notification big hit flag 223i are provided at least. For the sake of convenience, the continuous announcement determination table 222a in the ROM 222 will be described after the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g in the RAM 223.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is an area for storing various information (predictive preconditions, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and prediction results of the variation pattern type) notified from the main control device 110 by the prefetch command described above. is there.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The prefetch information storage area 223a has five areas, one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described jackpot lottery prediction result, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 stores information indicating the above-described fluctuation pattern type prediction result. This is an area for storing. Further, the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described prediction precondition for prefetching. Each area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is initialized in a RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to zero.

  Upon receiving the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 receives various information from the prefetch command (predictive preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and prediction results of the variation pattern type). Is extracted as prefetch information, and the extracted prefetch information is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Although details will be described later, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control device pre-reads the jackpot lottery result, only the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are controlled by the voice ramp control. The device was not notified. However, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result, in addition to the jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, further, a pre-reading prediction precondition Is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and the respective information is stored in the same holding area in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Therefore, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 for each reservation area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same reservation area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type are It is possible to determine what kind of prediction precondition was used for prefetching. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the pre-read was performed in main controller 110.

  In the case where the extracted prefetch information is stored in the reserved area, among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), the area numbers (first to fourth) of the reserved areas are stored. Data is stored in order from the smallest area. In other words, the data corresponding to the earlier start winning prize is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area.

  More specifically, in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the same data (see FIG. 8B2) as the data indicating the big hit lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the pre-read command is completely out of order, “000” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Similarly, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out-of-order reach, “001” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. “010” is stored in the prediction result storage area 223a1. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R normal jackpot, “011” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored. If it is a 2R probability change jackpot, "100" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R probability change jackpot, "101" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Is stored.

  Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b3)) as the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type indicated by the pre-read command is out of range (out of short), “000” is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2. Similarly, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is out of range (out of length), “001” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, “010” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and “011” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is super reach. When the type prediction result is the special reach, “100” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2.

  Similarly, in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b1)) as the data indicating the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the low probability state, “0” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. Similarly, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the high probability state, “1” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In the present embodiment, the same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. The same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type, the same data as the data indicating the precondition for the prefetching, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type, prediction of the prefetching It is stored as information indicating the precondition, but is not necessarily limited to this. Data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command, data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the prediction precondition of the prefetch After converting the data shown to other data, the converted data As the information indicating the prediction result of the lucky lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage It may be stored in the area 223a3.

  Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110, audio ramp controller 113 shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area. . Specifically, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the execution area. Similarly, the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the suspension first area is shifted to the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the execution area, and The prediction precondition stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the area is shifted to the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area.

  When the shift of the data to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and the data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is replaced with the area number. A shift process is performed to fill one reserved area (reserved first area to reserved third area). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed on the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control load can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the reserved area (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) may be shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area), so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the look-ahead information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, as in the case of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110, one execution area and four reserved areas (the reserved first area) To a reserved fourth area). This is because data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. That is, the prefetch information corresponding to the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Similarly, the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a stores the prefetch information corresponding to the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a stores the reserved ball. The look-ahead information corresponding to the reserved second area of the storage area 203b is stored, and the look-ahead information corresponding to the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved third area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a. The prefetch information corresponding to the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved fourth area of the information storage area 223a.

  As will be described in detail later, when the ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance, the main controller 110 acquires data associated with the new starting winning and stores the data in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is newly stored in the holding area, and the pre-reading is performed for the starting prize. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetch and a precondition of the prefetch prediction is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. You. When the pre-read command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, various information and prediction preconditions are extracted as pre-read information from the pre-read command, and the pre-read information is newly stored in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. (See S1210 in FIG. 31). Thus, every time a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance, data accompanying the starting winning is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device, and the like. The pre-read information storage area 223a stores the read-ahead information storage area 223a.

  When the jackpot lottery is newly started in main controller 110, a shift process is performed for each area of reserved ball storage area 203b (see 307 in FIG. 21). Then, when a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, a fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 along with the jackpot lottery. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and performs the setting for the fluctuation display, the shift processing is performed for each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (see S1506 in FIG. 38). As described above, each time a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113 are respectively Shift processing is performed. Accordingly, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio ramp control device 113.

  The above-mentioned prefetch information storage area 223a is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect. When the sound ramp control device 113 stores new look-ahead information in the reserved area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a with the reception of the above-described look-ahead command, the look-ahead information stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223a and the look-ahead information described later will be described. Based on the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b and the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g, it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous announcement effect for a series of variable effects suspended at that time.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit. When performing the ending effect that is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, the sound ramp control device 113 performs, based on the content of the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the state of the after-hit jackpot gaming state flag 223c, It is determined whether to perform “determined effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect.

  The reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect which are suspended in the control device 110. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number by the reserved ball number counter 223b. I have.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added due to the entry into first entrance port 64, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of added reserved ball number counter 203c. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 obtains the value of the reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the counter 223b (see S1208 in FIG. 31).

Further, in the main control device 110, when a new variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and the variable display to be started on the third symbol display device 81 is further performed. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the fluctuation display mode on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b. One is subtracted (see S1505 in FIG. 38).
As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203c.

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223b, and displays the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the control device 114, a display pending ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the display reserved device displays the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c is, like the post-big-hit gaming state flag 203d of the main control device 110, a special jackpot in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state. This is a flag indicating whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. If the post-big hit game state flag 223c is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state when the big hit has ended, and if the post-big hit game state flag 223c is on, the big hit will end. This indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high probability state when the game is performed.

  The post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c is set to an initial value of off by the initial value setting of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (see S1010 in FIG. 28). The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set when a fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1214 in FIG. 31). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and thereafter, when the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare is performed. A command is transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113. In this case, the main control device 110 generates a fanfare command including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, and the generated command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. .

  When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the fanfare command. That is, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted. If the extracted gaming state is the “low probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to off, and if the extracted gaming state is “high probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to on. Is done.

  The post-big hit game state flag 223c is used by the MPU 221 when the ending effect determination process (S1221 in FIG. 31) described later is executed. Although the details will be described later, when performing the ending effect which is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, based on the content of the above-mentioned reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the state of the after-hit jackpot game state flag 223c, It is determined whether to perform “determined effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set based on the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110. However, the main control device 110 The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c may be set based on the stop type command transmitted from the. That is, in the main control device 110, when a jackpot lottery is performed, a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the determined stop type. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. It is shown whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the stop type command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 can set the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c based on the stop type indicated by the stop type command.

  Specifically, if the stop type indicated by the stop type command is a probable change big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit can be determined to be the high probability state, and thus the after-big hit gaming state flag 223c is turned on. Set to. On the other hand, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a normal jackpot, it is possible to determine that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a low probability state, and thus the gaming state flag 223c after the jackpot is set to OFF. I do. When the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set by the stop type command, the fanfare command does not need to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. good.

  In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is newly provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Configure it. Then, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c may be set based on a new command transmitted from the main control device 110. Note that the method of setting the post-big hit game state flag 223c may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described fanfare command, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command does not need to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fanfare command is received, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set, but the state of the flag 223c will be described later after the fanfare command is received. The setting may be made before the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is started. Note that, even when the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set when the stop type command is received, the state of the flag 223c is determined by the ending effect determination process described later after the stop type command is received. It may be configured to set before the start. In addition, even if a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, and the new command is received, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may set before receiving the new command and before the ending effect determination process mentioned later is started.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1202 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1502 in FIG. 38). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1508 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h. It is determined whether the stop type is set to the chance.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “big hit”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1512 in FIG. 38). Also, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is "out of range" and the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38). reference). On the other hand, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out” and the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance type is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type. This is set (see S1513 in FIG. 38).

  The ending mode counter 223f is a counter used to determine the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed, for example, by adding one by one in the range of 0 to 3 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 wins a jackpot and determines the display mode in the ending effect, the value of the ending mode counter 223f and the ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 are used. It is determined whether the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table.

  Although the details will be described later, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and immediately before starting the ending effect described above, the contents of the reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and the contents described above are described. It is determined whether to acquire the value of the ending mode counter 223f based on the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c. Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is not acquired, the display mode is determined so as to perform “normal display” in the ending effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is obtained, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the “determined effect display” is displayed. The display mode of the ending effect is set to be performed (see S1414 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is other than a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that “normal display” is performed. (See S1415 in FIG. 33). That is, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is obtained, the display mode is determined so that the “determined effect display” is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the “normal display” is performed with the remaining 2/3 probability. Is determined in such a manner as to be performed.

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect (“normal display” or “fixed effect display”) is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. . Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that an ending effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous announcement effect, and is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is updated by, for example, adding one by one in the range of 0 to 127 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, based on the prediction result of the current prefetch, the type of the jackpot of the held jackpot, the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g, and the like, The start of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous advance lottery counter 223g is compared with a continuous advance determination table 222a (see FIG. 11) described below, and the value of the continuous advance lottery counter 223g is within a range predetermined in the continuous advance determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see S1315 and S1316 in FIG. 32).

  The continuous notice determination table 222a satisfies a predetermined condition (one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (refer to a continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)) when a prefetch command is received from main controller 110. If so, it is a table for setting the “continuous notice determination probability”. Here, the continuous announcement determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 should start the continuous announcement effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination table 222a has two tables: a large announcement continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and a missed continuous announcement determination table 222a2. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-read command received from the main control device 110 is "big hit", the sound ramp control device 113 selects the continuous jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the big hit lottery prediction result. Is "disconnected", the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection is selected. Thereby, the continuous announcement determination probability can be changed according to the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (whether it is "big hit" or "missing").

  Each of the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure is a value “1” that can be taken by the retained ball counter 223b (the number of times N of the variable display is retained) in the sound lamp control device 113. The range of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g that determines the start of the continuous announcement effect (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous announcement determination range”) is defined in association with “「 4 ”.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit defines “0” as the continuous announcement determination range in association with the value “1” of the retained ball number counter 223b, and the retained ball number counter The continuous notice determination range is defined as “0 to 15” in association with the value “2” of 223b, and the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0 to 39” in association with the value “3” of the reserved ball counter 223b. The continuous announcement determination range is defined as "0 to 63" in association with the value "4" of the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  In addition, the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of departure defines the continuous announcement determination range as "0" in association with the value "1" of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and sets the value "2" of the reserved ball number counter 223b. In association therewith, “0-9” is defined as the continuous announcement determination range, and “0-25” is defined as the continuous advancement determination range in association with the value “3” of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b. "0-39" is defined as the continuous announcement determination range in association with the value "4" of the counter 223b.

  When the pre-read command is received from main controller 110, sound ramp control device 113 satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of condition 1 to condition 3 described later (see continuous announcement determination process in FIG. 32)). If so, as the table for setting the continuous announcement determination probability, one of the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the miss is selected. Then, from the selected continuous announcement determination table, the continuous announcement determination range associated with the value of the number of retained balls counter 223b at that time is specified, and the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g at that time becomes the continuous advance determination range. If it is included, determine the start of the continuous announcement production.

  By the way, in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure are both defined such that the larger the value of the number-of-reserved-ball counter 223b, the wider the continuous announcement determination range. However, if the continuous announcement determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that the continuous announcement effect is to be performed, and the continuous announcement determination probability is increased. Therefore, the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the jackpot and the continuous announcement determination at the time of departure are performed. Both of the tables 222a2 mean that the larger the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b (the number of times N of the variable display is retained), the higher the continuous notice determination probability is defined. Here, since the continuous announcement effect is performed over all the variable effects that are suspended when the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement determination probability is set to be higher as the number of times of suspension is increased. Is likely to increase in the number of variable effects included in the continuous announcement effect of the above. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. Expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of times of suspension of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of times of suspension is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous announcement effect from being performed frequently. When it becomes large, it is possible to make the continuous announcement effect easy to be performed.

  In addition, when comparing the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of departure in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination range associated with the same value of the retained ball number counter 223b is: It is defined that the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit is the same as or wider than the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure. That is, the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "out". Is also set to be high. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game state is likely to be "big hit" after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation. In addition, the probability that the gaming state (ie, the result of the lottery performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64) after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “big hit” is usually smaller than the probability of “missing”. Is also set to be small, so that if the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “out of place”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous announcement effect is not frequently performed, while if the game state is “big hit”, Thus, it is possible to easily perform a continuous announcement effect.

  In addition, in the sound ramp control device 113, not only is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-read command received from the main control device 110 "big hit", but the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "out", and Also in the case where the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “reach out of order”, the permission of the continuous announcement effect is determined. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous announcement effect even when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “out-of-front-reach reach”, so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be performed under various conditions. Can be performed. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the lottery continues to be missed as a result of the lottery, the continuous announcement effect is provided, so that the player can have a high sense of expectation and prevent the player from getting bored. be able to.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The continuous notice number counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The initial value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the number of retained balls counter 223b at that time is determined. Is stored (see S1317 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance type is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type (see S1513 in FIG. 38), and the set stop type is determined. Is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. Also, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is reduced by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 38).

  The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. When the chance type is set as the stop type, for example, on the activated line L1 shown in FIG. A symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38), and the set stop is performed. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. Note that the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is kept at 0 (see S1515: No in FIG. 38). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1, since the execution of the continuous notice effect is the last variable effect set, the stop type is set. Like the case where the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 32), and the set stop type is set to the display stop type. The display control device 114 is notified by a command. However, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is decreased by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 32).

  As described above, as long as the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, every time the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, a chance is set as the stop type, and the set stop type is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol serving as a chance is displayed.

  Here, the continuous announcement number counter 223h stores the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b at the time when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined. , If the value is 1 or more, the value is reduced by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, a stop symbol serving as a chance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the variable effects suspended in the main control device 110. That is, the stop symbols serving as chances are continuously displayed.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the variable effect that is most closely watched during the game. Further, even when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eyes are displayed, so that the player has an expectation that the jackpot can be obtained after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Can be made.

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is referred to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect has already been set (FIG. 32). S1305). When the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0 (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 32), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set in all the variable effects suspended in the main control device 110. It is determined that (Condition 1) is satisfied among the above predetermined conditions, and the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the process related to the continuous announcement effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, and wins the first ball entrance 64. The lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the game state flag at the time of the prize) acquired according to the (start winning), and various information ( The prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the prediction precondition of the prefetch are included in the prefetch command, and are notified to the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the prefetch command, stores them as prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223a, and determines the start of the continuous announcement effect according to the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223a. to decide. When the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the setting of the stop type is performed for each of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  The post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is obtained by storing the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b in the continuous announcement number counter 223h, thereby executing all of the continuous announcement effects set for the plurality of variable effects. It is a flag indicating the game state after the fluctuation effect. When the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the game state after the variable effect after all the continuous announcement effects have been executed becomes the "big hit" state, When the value is off, it indicates that the game state after the variable effect after all the continuous notice effects have been executed becomes the "out" state. Note that the variable effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is a variable effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1.

  The post-announcement jackpot flag 223i indicates the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the look-ahead command when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the look-ahead command received from the main control device 110. If it is "big hit", it is set to on (see S1319 in FIG. 32), and if the prediction result of the big hit lottery extracted from the prefetch command is "out", it is set to off (see S1320 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is held until the next start of the continuous announcement effect is determined.

  When it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is being executed when the pre-read command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i (see S1307 in FIG. 32). Then, when the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is on (see S1307: Yes in FIG. 32), the game after the variable announcement after the continuous announcement effect is performed in all the variable announcements for which the continuous announcement effect is set. Since the state is the “big hit” state, furthermore, between the variable effect (reserved ball) corresponding to the received look-ahead command and the last variable effect (reserved ball) for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, 2 It is determined whether or not the above-described fluctuating effect (reserved ball) exists (that is, whether the difference between the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 3 or more), and It is determined whether or not (condition 2) is satisfied among the conditions (see S1309 in FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, when the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is off (see S1307: No in FIG. 32), the game after the variable effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the "out" state, it is further determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery newly notified by the look-ahead command is "big hit", and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3) Is determined (see S1311 in FIG. 32).

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first ball opening 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to be activated at the timing of the new starting winning. And the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning state gaming state flag). Then, when the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern The type is pre-read in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the prediction prerequisites together with the various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device by the pre-reading command described above. 113 is notified. Upon receiving the pre-read command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts various information from the command as pre-read information and stores it in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. The pre-read information stored here is used by the sound lamp control device 113 when the display mode of the ending effect is set or when it is determined whether to start the continuous announcement effect.

  However, as described later, in both the pachinko machine 10 and the conventional pachinko machine, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by prefetching and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are determined by the main controller 110. May differ. This means that when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance opening 64, there is a pending starting winning and a jackpot is drawn with the held starting winning. The lottery result is a big hit, which is caused by a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before and after the big hit.

  In other words, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 is held a plurality of times (up to four times in the present pachinko machine 10). In the main control device 110, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a pending start winning, the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is performed. After the result is read in advance, the jackpot lottery associated with each new start prize that has been held at the time of the new start prize has been completed, and then the big jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed.

  Then, the jackpot lottery associated with each starting prize held at the time of the new starting prize is executed by the main controller 110, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 Is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize. I will.

  In the conventional pachinko machine main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for pre-reading the jackpot lottery result are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning, and further, in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start winning prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting prize, it is used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery lottery result. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the respective comparison results do not match. The main controller 110 may differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning match and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery associated with the new starting winning match, it is used for pre-reading the lottery result of the big hit lottery. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 correspond to the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the prediction results correspond to each other. The main control device 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed. It was not configured so as to be able to determine whether or not it was obtained using 202a2. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113, audio ramp control device 113 also determines which table 202a1, 202a2 the prediction result was obtained from. could not.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, both the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result. The main control device 110 performs the same game state. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are always stored in the main control device 110. Matches. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110. The jackpot lottery results were treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the main controller 110 and before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. It becomes unknown in which gaming state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. Was treated as untrustworthy.

  If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the audio ramp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine refrains from using the prediction result, and performs processing irrelevant to the actual jackpot lottery result (for example, Continuous announcement effects, ending effects, etc.). For this reason, the pre-reading of the jackpot effect lottery results and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery have been wasted.

  On the other hand, for example, if the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to use all the obtained jackpot lottery prediction results so that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained in the main control device 110 is not wasted, As described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, there is a problem that a process unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. In any case, as described above, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a pending start winning, and the starting which has been held is When a jackpot lottery is performed along with a prize, the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes before and after the jackpot.

  Here, with reference to each of FIGS. 53 to 55, a description will be given of a problem that occurs when the display mode of the ending effect that is a part of the big hit effect is determined using the prediction result of the big hit lottery. Note that the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery immediately before the ending effect is started. In addition, to make the explanation easy to understand, here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, “determined effect display” is always selected in the ending effect. Then, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning is selected.

  Each of FIGS. 53 to 55 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the big hit lottery during the big hit effect. First, an example of the problem will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 53 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed, and the variable effect is further performed. Shows a state in which start winning prizes A and B have occurred during the execution of. In addition, in the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize A, it is assumed that the lottery result is lost regardless of the gaming state (low-probability state, high-probability state) of the pachinko machine. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be off.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when the start winning prize A occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the prefetch A of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. When the start winning prize A occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, so the high probability state is selected as the precondition for the prediction of the prefetch A. As a result, when the prefetch A of the lottery result is performed for the start winning A, the prediction result of the prefetch A is out of order. Also, at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize B, similarly to the case of the starting winning prize A, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state. As a result, when the pre-reading B of the lottery result is performed for the start winning B, the predicted result of the pre-reading B becomes a probability change jackpot.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. Since the big hit is usually a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine remains in the low-probability state even after the big hit production ends. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize A is performed, and a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize A is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state.

  Therefore, although the high-probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetch A is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the starting winning A is performed in the low-probability state, so that the prediction result of the prefetch A and the actual lottery result are different. It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for the winning start A, both the prediction result of the pre-reading A and the actual lottery result are accidentally out of alignment, so that the respective lottery results match.

  In addition, as in the case of the start winning A, the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning B is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state. Therefore, also in this case, although the high-probability state is selected and the pre-reading B is performed as the prediction precondition, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize B is performed in the low-probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result will be different. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the prediction result of the pre-reading B is a jackpot, but the actual lottery result is out of order and the respective lottery results do not match.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to simply determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the look-ahead, the prediction result of the look-ahead B is a jackpot. It is determined that some of the lottery results have a big hit, and as a result, “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “confirmed effect display”, it is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery held with the end of the big hit, and thus the “confirmed effect display” is performed. The player has an expectation that if one of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot.

  However, after that, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and even if the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A, B held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out of order. It does not really hit the jackpot. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, Actually, there is a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. In other words, there arises a problem that a process (for example, an effect or the like) irrelevant to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed by giving the player a useless expectation, which lowers the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  Subsequently, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 54 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a probable big hit, and a fluctuating effect corresponding to the probable big hit is executed. Shows the state in which start winning prizes C and D occur during the execution of. In addition, in the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C, the lottery result is assumed to be lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will normally be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the start winning prize C occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the look-ahead C of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. At the time of occurrence of the start winning prize C, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state. As a result, when the pre-reading C of the lottery result is performed for the start winning C, the predicted result of the pre-reading C is out of order. Also, when the start winning D occurs, similarly to the start winning C, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state, and therefore, the low probability state is selected as the precondition for predicting the prefetch D. As a result, when the prefetch D of the lottery result is performed for the start winning D, the prediction result of the prefetch D usually becomes a big hit.

  After that, even if the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low-probability state in the first place, so that the pachinko machine continues to be in a low-probability state. It should be noted that the jackpot this time is a probable jackpot, and when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C is performed, and a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize C is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead C is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize C is performed in the high probability state, so that the prediction result of the look-ahead C and the actual lottery result are different. It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), for the start winning prize C, both the prediction result of the pre-reading C and the actual lottery result are out of alignment, so that the respective lottery results match.

  The jackpot lottery associated with the start winning D is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as in the case of the starting winning D. Therefore, also in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead D is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning D is performed in the high probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result is different. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 54B, the prediction result of the prefetch D is usually a big hit, but the actual lottery result is out of order, and each lottery result does not match.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to simply determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the look-ahead, the predicted result of the look-ahead D is a jackpot. It is determined that some of the lottery results have a big hit, and as a result, “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “confirmed effect display”, it is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery held with the end of the big hit, and thus the “confirmed effect display” is performed. The player has an expectation that if one of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot.

  However, after that, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and even if the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C and D held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out of order. It doesn't really hit the jackpot. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, Actually, there is a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. In other words, there arises a problem that a process (for example, an effect or the like) irrelevant to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed by giving the player a useless expectation, which lowers the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  Next, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which a start winning prize E or F has occurred when the pachinko machine has become a jackpot and a jackpot effect associated with the jackpot has been executed. This shows a state in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine changes from a low probability state to a high probability state. As described above, the jackpot lottery is not performed while the pachinko machine is in the jackpot, but the gaming state is in the low probability state. In addition, in the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize E, it is assumed that the lottery result is lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine. If the gaming state is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the start winning prize E occurs during the execution of the big hit effect, the pre-reading E of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. At the time of occurrence of the start winning prize E, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state. As a result, when the pre-reading E for the start winning prize E is performed, the prediction result of the pre-reading E is incorrect. Also, when the start winning prize F occurs, as in the case of the starting winning prize E, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state. As a result, when the prefetching F of the lottery result is performed for the start winning F, the prediction result of the prefetching F becomes a probability change jackpot.

  Thereafter, when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. First, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize E is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, a large jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize F is performed, and the variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed. Be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize E is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the pre-reading E is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the starting winning E is performed in the high probability state, so that the prediction result of the pre-reading E and the actual lottery result are It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for the start winning prize E, both the prediction result of the pre-reading E and the actual lottery result are out of alignment, so that the respective lottery results match.

  The jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize F is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as in the case of the starting prize F. Therefore, also in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead F is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning F is performed in the high probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result is different. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the prediction result of the pre-reading F is a probability change jackpot, but the actual lottery result is out of order and the respective lottery results do not match.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to simply determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the look-ahead, the predicted result of the look-ahead F is a jackpot. It is determined that some of the lottery results have a jackpot, and as a result, “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “confirmed effect display”, it is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery held with the end of the big hit, and thus the “confirmed effect display” is performed. The player has an expectation that if one of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot.

  However, after that, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and even if the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prizes E and F held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out of order. It doesn't really hit the jackpot. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, Actually, there is a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. In other words, there arises a problem that a process (for example, an effect or the like) irrelevant to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed by giving the player a useless expectation, which lowers the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use all the prediction results of the jackpot lottery so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery are not wasted, There is a problem that processing unrelated to the lottery result (for example, an effect) is executed. As described above, all of these problems are caused by the fact that when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a pending start winning and a jackpot associated with the pending starting winning. In the lottery, the lottery result is a big hit, which is caused by a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before and after the big hit.

  That is, as described above, in the main control device 110, when a new start winning is made, if there is a pending start winning, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start winning is read in advance, After all the jackpot lotteries associated with each start winning prize held at the time of the new starting prize are completed, the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed. Therefore, the jackpot lottery associated with each starting prize held at the time of the new starting prize is executed in the main control device 110, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. , The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize. I will.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for pre-reading the jackpot lottery result are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning. Further, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize, the pachinko machine is used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead.

  Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the comparison are different, it is highly likely that the respective comparison results do not match. In some cases, the main control device 110 may differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result. Then, such a prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when used in the audio ramp control device 113, a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result. ) Is performed.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 He treated the prediction results of the lottery as unreliable and refrained from using those prediction results. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  In order to solve this, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows, for example, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result corresponding to each of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. It is conceivable that it is possible to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to, and to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the result.

  With such a configuration, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is used in the audio lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can be always treated as being reliable. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit random number table 202a1 and 202a2 are stored as in the case of the jackpot lottery. A process of comparing the hit values with each other one by one is performed. Therefore, every time a new start winning is generated, a process of comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one, It must be repeated up to 33 times. Therefore, each time a new start prize is generated, the comparison process may take a long time every time, and the time may be wasted.

  The main controller 110 uses the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to obtain prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively. In such a case, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, some of the comparison processes that may take time in main controller 110 are wasted. Further, the main control unit 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start prize is won, but the voice lamp control unit 113 uses only one prediction result, so that useless prediction results always occur. Therefore, the number of wasteful prediction results increases as compared with the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, and therefore requires a larger storage area than in the related art. Further, main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio ramp control device 113, respectively, so that data transmitted from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read in the main control device 110, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained by using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to and to notify the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as an increase in processing time and control load occur.

  Alternatively, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main controller 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the end of the current jackpot to pre-read each of the pending start winnings. It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the prediction results obtained by the redoing, respectively.

  With this configuration, in the main control device 110, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed and before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, instead, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 is performed instead. The result can be used as trustworthy.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, the pre-reading for each pending start winning in the main controller 110 is redone, and each prediction result obtained in the redo is the main result. The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 again. Therefore, the look-ahead of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery targeted for re-execution and the prediction results are wasted.

  Therefore, useless processing is performed in main controller 110, and a control burden is imposed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives a useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also performs useless processing, and the control burden is increased. Hangs. Further, the data transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the time of the end of the current big hit to start each of the pending start winnings. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 again of the prediction results obtained by rereading the pre-reading of the Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as increased useless processing and increased control load arise.

  Alternatively, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main control device 110 sets a jackpot random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. It is conceivable that prefetching is performed for each pending start winning using 202a1 and 202a2, and each prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 can perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the pre-reading is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot is completed. . Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the sound lamp controller 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Can be treated as Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed, so that the number of prefetching (frequency) is reduced. Then, the number of prediction results of the jackpot lottery notified from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 also decreases, so that the frequency of using the prediction results of the jackpot lottery in the audio ramp control device 113 decreases, and Opportunities to execute the notice production will be reduced. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting.

  As described above, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the main control device 110 responds to the game state at the end of the big hit only when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize, and to notify each prediction result from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. However, although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results is reduced, and there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting. Occurs.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 stores prediction preconditions, and uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, and The big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 that are to be used in the actual big hit lottery are determined. As a result, it is possible to handle more reliable prediction results without causing a problem that useless processing and control load increase, and a problem that the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result decreases.

  That is, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, when the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. It becomes unknown in which gaming state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. It was not possible to determine whether they matched. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. Was treated as untrustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the voice lamp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the big random number table 202a1, which is used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, is stored. Whether the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead can always be determined by the audio ramp control unit 113. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine as being reliable even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. The jackpot lottery prediction result can be appropriately handled.

  More specifically, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, data accompanying a new starting winning is acquired in main controller 110, and the data is stored in reserved ball storage area 203b. Is newly stored in the holding area, and the pre-reading is performed for the start winning. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetch and a precondition of the prefetch prediction is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. You.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the precondition of the prefetch are extracted as prefetch information from the prefetch command. The prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Thereby, when using the pre-read information in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is obtained by the pre-read based on which game state by referring to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information. Can be determined. That is, the main controller 110 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used to obtain the jackpot lottery prediction result.

  Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot are changed from the main controller 110 by the sound lamp by the fanfarre command. The control device 113 is notified. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change, the newly set gaming state can be notified to the sound lamp control device 113 again by the fanfare command.

  When the fan lamp command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the game state from the fan fare command, and sets the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c according to the game state. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the big hit is completed in the main control device 110 based on the after-big hit game state flag 223c. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current big hit is completed.

  As described above, since the sound premise condition and the post-big-hit game state flag 223c are stored in the sound ramp control device 113, when using the pre-read information in the sound lamp control device 113, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed. The main control device 110 can determine whether the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled in the present embodiment, because the pachinko machine 10 may be able to handle the prediction result that was treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine, as the trusted result. . Therefore, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result becomes higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that, also in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number table 202a1 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching , 202a2 in the main controller 110, and if the tables 202a1, 202a2 do not match, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is the same as the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Since it is likely to be different, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is treated as unreliable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled, and problems such as execution of a process (for example, an effect) unrelated to the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is not necessary to obtain both prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, it is not necessary to reread the look-ahead for each pending start winning. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled without causing a problem such as an increase in processing time or a control load, or a problem such as a useless process or a control load.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like in the prefetch command, the main control device further includes information indicating the precondition of the prefetch prediction. Although the information is transmitted from 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, the information indicating the precondition for the prediction of the prefetch is only one bit. Further, the fan control command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, at the end of the jackpot. The information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the amount of data processed in the MPUs 201 and 221 is almost the same as in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 has the same design as that of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Since there are models, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1601 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 18) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a process of drawing the next one frame of image and a process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used when drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the above, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (the storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 39).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13C, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “「 ”is displayed on the display screen of the main image at power-on at the lower right of the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main controller 110. The result is judged, and when it is “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 13B is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable effect, and when it is “out of place”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Here, returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams illustrating three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 14B is for the back surface B corresponding to the “sky stage”, and FIG. 15 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B among the back surfaces A to C are images each of which is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is provided in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back surface C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating morning dawn is displayed. Then, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white with time, and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 15A, and the back images of FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15A and 15B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a 'or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image between FIGS. 15A and 15B is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed. By using the image data resident in the 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the rear surface B and the rear surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images shown in FIGS. 15A so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b). Thus, while the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B and 15C and FIGS. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear surface image. be able to.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position “b” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b 'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward.

  Here, returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numerals “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. It is. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, image data necessary for drawing an image thereafter, from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a fanfare data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, This is an area in which transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a fluctuation effect, a fanfare effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variable effect is started, if the stop type of the variable effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variable effect is 15R certain variation big hit, 2R If it is one of the probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will congratulate the jackpot. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery (performs a fixed effect display), or simply informs the player that the jackpot ends. This is an effect for notifying (performing normal display).

  By displaying the fixed effect in the ending effect, the player will be able to obtain a jackpot if one of the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot is performed after the jackpot ends. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the jackpot will surely be a big hit, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the player can be depressed. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or a plurality of pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the elapse of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, in the variable display data table, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage where the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variable symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 16) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the operation of the user, and thus the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and, as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the performance specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  The transfer data information includes a start address (storage source start address) and a final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and a start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 18) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Here, returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1605 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3205 in FIG. 50B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1901 in FIG. 41B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 41) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) (see S1909). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are executed.

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3101 in FIG. 50A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describing the contents of the instruction to draw an image with respect to is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 41 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S2805 in FIG. 47) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is stored before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes the transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S2807 in FIG. 47). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite of the transfer target. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3317 in FIG. 51). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3318 in FIG. 51). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3402 in FIG. 52).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 41B) is executed, it is performed (see S3402 of FIG. 52).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing started when the power is turned on, a main processing executed after the start-up processing, and a regular start-up (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, when the external output process of the main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to the maximum value. When they reach (899, 99, 99, 198, 250, respectively) in this embodiment, they are cleared to 0, respectively. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one round), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one round), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as an initial value of the second or random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting the variation pattern type of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the first ball entry is performed. A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the mouth 64 (S105). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a start winning, the amount of the ball is excluded. If the number of reserved balls is less than the maximum value (four balls), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of starting winning, and are stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is stored. Further, based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning) newly stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, a prefetch execution flag is set to prefetch the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. 203f is set to ON.

  After finishing the start winning process, it is next determined whether the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106). If the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106: Yes), the prefetch process is executed (S106: Yes). S107) For the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the prize-winning game state flag) newly stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the above-mentioned start prize processing, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read. . The details of the prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the prefetch execution flag 203f is off (S106: No), the process of S107 is skipped. Next, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Accordingly, when an external output process of a main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball (start win) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a start win, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are set. Is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read for the retained data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning). In order to do so, a process of setting the prefetch execution flag 203f to ON is performed.

  In this start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start win) (S201). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c (reservation of the variable effect suspended in the main control device 110) The number of balls N is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 4 or more. If there is (S203: No), the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (The number of reserved balls N) is incremented by 1 (S204), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value (the number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output processing of the main processing described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the 1st area to the 4th pending area, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the pending ball number counter 203c. And, each is held (stored) in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the reserved first area. . If the value of the added ball count counter 203c is “2”, the stored area of the reserved second area is “2”, and if the value of the added ball counter 203c is “3”, the reserved third area is “3”. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c after addition is "4" in each storage area, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved fourth area.

  Next, the game state flag 203a is set as a winning state game state flag, and corresponds to the value (N) indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203c among the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is stored in the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 of the winning area (S207). That is, in the process of S207, the game state flag at the time of winning is stored in the same holding area as the holding area in which the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the process of S206.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect has come, the MPU 201 sets the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the winning game state flag, It shifts to the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, a jackpot lottery and a determination of a variation pattern type are performed. As described above, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is used in a jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, determination of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  Next, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON (S208). Here, when the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, a prefetch process described later (see FIG. 23) is executed, and as a result, the data stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203b by the processes of S206 and S207 (each The lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read for each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning state gaming state flag). That is, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is also used for prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203e is on (S209). As described above, if the jackpot during flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and if the jackpot during flag 203e is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (during a high probability state or during a jackpot). During the low-probability state). If the big hit flag 203e is on (S209: Yes), it means that the current start winning is a big hit starting win, so the big hit winning flag 203g is set on (S210). The start winning process is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off (S209: No), it means that the current start winning is a win in the normal state, so the big hit winning flag 203g is set to off (S211). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The MPU 201 pre-reads the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S206 and S207. The state of the big hit prize flag 203g is referred to. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. That is, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the big hit. Therefore, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64 during the jackpot, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of starting winning, The state of the gaming state flag 203a is always off (low probability state), and as a result, the winning state gaming state flag is also always off.

  Therefore, if the data to be prefetched is obtained along with the start winning prize during the big hit, if the lottery result is predicted in accordance with the gaming state flag at the time of the prize in the data, the prediction precondition of the prefetching Is always in a low-probability state, the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result deteriorates. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, if the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start winning prize during the jackpot, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot The lottery result is predicted according to the state. In the processing of S209 to S211, it is determined whether or not the data acquired with the start winning prize is obtained with the start winning prize during the big hit, when the prefetching processing described later (see FIG. 23) is executed. The state of the big hit prize flag 203e is set so as to be possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the fluctuation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interruption processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S104). The fluctuation process (S104) controls the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203e is on and a big hit is currently being made (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. The big hit flag 203e is set to ON at the timing when the start of the big hit is set by the process of S315 described later, and thereafter, the timing of ending the big hit by the process of S914 of the big hit control process (see FIG. 27) described later. Is set to off.

  As a result of the determination in S301, if the big hit flag 203e is on and if the big hit is being made (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off and not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the first symbol display is performed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not fluctuating (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuating display on the first symbol display device 37 (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the retained balls of the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is acquired (S304), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the acquired reserved ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S305). As a result, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (reserved ball number N) exceeds 0 (S305: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start the execution of the fluctuation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (Number of reserved balls N) is decremented by 1 (S306). This is because one of the pending fluctuation effects is started to be executed by the later-described fluctuation start process (S308), and as a result, the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S307). The data shift process performed in the process of S307 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the reserved sphere storage area 203b toward the area having the smaller area number. Specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data.

  When the process of S307 is completed, next, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S308), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203c (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S305: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S309). In the process of S309, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the process is performed until the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S309: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S310), and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S310 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and when an external output process of a main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, a sound lamp is output. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demonstration command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect according to the demonstration command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after the elapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S311). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern type selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and the change time elapses. If not (S311: No), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S311: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a change start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the change start process, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The stop symbol (big hit type) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, a stop symbol (jackpot type) that becomes a 15R probable jackpot after a jackpot (the maximum jackpot changes to a high probability state after a 15 round jackpot) (a jackpot type) or a 2R jackpot (a maximum round number of 2 rounds) Stop symbol (jackpot type) that becomes a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot or stop symbol (jackpot type that becomes a 15R regular jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots) ) Is determined.

  Then, in this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hits occurs, and the red LED is turned on when the 15R normal change hits And the blue LED. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the processing of S312 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a big hit (S313). If the lottery result corresponding to the variable display is out of range (S313: No), the variable processing ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a jackpot (S313: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S314). Here, when the start of the jackpot is set, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process branches to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27) to execute the fanfare command. Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  After the processing of S314 is completed, the big hit flag 203e is set to ON (S315), the gaming state flag 203a is set to OFF (low probability state) (S316), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off (low probability state) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit. If the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a probability change jackpot, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON when the big hit ends, while the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a normal jackpot. If there is, even if the big hit ends, the state of the game state flag 203a is kept off.

  In the above-described fluctuation processing, the start of the big hit is set in the processing of S314, and subsequently, the big hit flag 203e is set to ON in the processing of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (see S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, S901: Yes (see FIG. 27) ) Branch. Therefore, in the big hit control process, when branching to S901: Yes, the big hit flag 203e may be set to ON. In other words, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON by the time of the start of the jackpot, any process may be executed.

  Next, a variation start process (S308), which is one of the variation processes performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S308). In the change start process (S308), a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. At the same time, an effect pattern (variable pattern type) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored. It is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 203a is on (high probability state) (S402). If the gaming state flag 203a is on (S402: Yes), two types of jackpot random number tables are prepared. The high probability probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is acquired from the 202a (S403). On the other hand, if the state of the gaming state flag 203a is off (S402: No), the large probability random number table 202a1 for low probability is acquired from the two types of the large number random number tables 202a prepared (S404).

  Then, the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 (S405). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 as random numbers (hit values) that are large hits at low probability. In addition, the random number table 202a2 for high probability at the time of high probability has 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” as random number values (winning value) which are to be a large hit at the time of high probability. , 298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892. In the process of S405, the random number value (winning value) stored in the obtained jackpot random number table is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401. Is determined.

  Then, it is determined whether the result of the comparison in the processing of S405 is a jackpot (S406). If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S406: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S401 is determined. Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the big hit type table described above (S407).

  In the process of S407, in the jackpot type table, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, that is, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. It is determined whether it is a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R regular jackpot whose maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot whose maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (the lighting state of the LED 37a) on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is, The display mode at the time of the big hit in the three symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S401 and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for the big hit, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of the big hit is determined (S408). In the process of S408, the large hit type determined in the process of S407 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 are selected from among various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and 2R variations A to C. The associated fluctuation pattern type at the time of the big hit is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S408, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the variation symbol type stops at the big hit symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  When the processing of S408 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the processing of S407 is a probability change jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, if the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (S409: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot starts, and thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot ends. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the post-big hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state after the big hit is finished is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S414. On the other hand, in the process of S409, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot (S409: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot starts, and thereafter, the jackpot ends. However, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in the low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the post-big hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state after the big hit is completed is set to off (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S406: No), the display mode at the time of departure is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401. The stop type to be displayed is set to any of reach before and after, reach other than before and after, and complete stop. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of departure is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to S414. In the process of S413, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the symbol is stopped and displayed with a missing symbol. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at normal time excluding the time reduction state, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach, various deviations. From the various types of super reach and various types of special reach, the type of stop pattern set in the process of S412 and the type of variation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 are determined.

  Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of a probability change, the short reach, the long release, the various normal reach, and the super reach are based on the variation pattern table for the deviation (probability). From the various types and various types of special reach, the type of variation at the time of disconnection that is associated with the stop type set by the process of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired by the process of S401 is determined. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S414, based on the variation pattern type determined by the processes of S408 and S413, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S414). . Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S412 is set (S415), and the process returns to the fluctuation process. These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and when an external output process of a main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, these commands are output. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d (S410 and S411) is set in the change start processing. In step S902, the process is referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, the timing may be set at any timing before the processing of S902 is performed.

  Next, the prefetching process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In this pre-reading process, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a winning game state flag) accompanying the detection of the start winning is newly obtained in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20), and the pre-read execution flag is obtained. This processing is executed when 203f is set to ON, and prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the prize-winning game state flag stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b lastly. Is read (S501). The data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is specified based on the reserved ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the reserved first area is specified as the data finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Similarly, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the reserved second area is 3. When the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b is 3, the data stored in the reserved third area is reserved. When the value of the ball number counter 203b is 4, the data stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the data finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the winning gaming state flag acquired in the processing of S501 is on (high probability state) (S502). In the processing of S502, when the winning gaming state flag is ON (S502: Yes), the precondition for prefetching is set to the high probability state, that is, the premise that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. This is a case where prefetching is performed under a condition. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot random number table for high probability 202a2 is obtained from the jackpot random number tables 202a prepared in two types (S505), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the winning state gaming state flag is off (S502: No), it is determined whether the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on (S503).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, when the data to be prefetched is acquired with the start winning prize during the big hit, the winning gaming state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state. Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted in accordance with the winning game state flag in the data, the prediction precondition for the prefetch is always in a low probability state, and the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result. As a result, the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result becomes poor.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for a winning start during a big hit, the game state at the end of the big hit is pre-read as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is improved. That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main control device 110, the type of the big hit is further determined, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit. Then, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the current big hit type. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined by the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, but when the pachinko machine 10 is performing the jackpot, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot has already been determined. The main control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the big hit.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is completed, if there is a jackpot lottery held in the main controller 110, the held jackpot lottery is performed one by one in the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. It is executed in main controller 110 in order. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when performing a look-ahead for a start winning prize during a jackpot, it is better to set the prediction precondition to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than to always set the prediction precondition to the low probability state. The possibility that the main control device 110 will match the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the predicted result in the main control device 110 can be improved. Therefore, the number of prediction results that can be treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be increased, and in this embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  Specifically, in the processing of S503, if the big hit prize flag 203g is off and a prize is made during the normal state (S503: No), the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the process of S503, if the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is on and a winning is started during the jackpot (S503: Yes), it is determined whether the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is on (high probability state). (S504). As described above, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit, and the above-described fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is Is determined, the state of the flag 203d is set. Therefore, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is already set before the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit. Therefore, when a winning start is made during the big hit, the look-ahead for the start winning can be predicted based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit (the state of the game state after the big hit 203d).

  Then, in the processing of S504, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is ON (S504: Yes), the winning is started during the big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit has a high probability. Since it is in the state, the process proceeds to S505, the jackpot random number table for high probability 202a2 is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S507. In the process of S504, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off (S504: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is in a low probability state, although the start winning is achieved during the big hit. Since this is the case, the process proceeds to S506. In the process of S506, the big random number table 202a1 for low probability is acquired (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, the success or failure is predicted by comparing the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S505 or S506 with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 (S507). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 as random numbers (hit values) that are large hits at low probability. In addition, the random number table 202a2 for high probability at the time of high probability has 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” as random number values (winning value) which are to be a large hit at the time of high probability. , 298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892. In the process of S405, the random number value (winning value) stored in the obtained jackpot random number table is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401. Predict that

  Then, as a result of the comparison in the processing of S507, when it is predicted that the jackpot is a jackpot (S508: Yes), the jackpot type and the variation pattern type are predicted (S509), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S509, first, in the above-described jackpot type table, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 is determined. Predict. Next, in the above-described jackpot variation pattern table, the jackpot variation pattern types (normal reach various types, Predict various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and 2R fluctuations A to C).

  If it is predicted in the processing of S508 that the hit is not a big hit (S508: No), the type of stop at the time of departure and the type of variation pattern are predicted (S510), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S510, first, the type of stop (reach out of front and rear, reach other than out of front and rear, complete out) is predicted based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set to have different ranges.

  Next, when the gaming state flag at the time of the prize acquired in the processing of S501 is ON, or when the big win prize flag 203g is ON and the post-big-hit gaming state flag 203d is ON, the above is described. Based on the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probable variation), from the short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach various, deviation super reach various, deviation special reach various, the previously predicted stop type and the fluctuation acquired in the processing of S501. The variation pattern type at the time of disconnection associated with the type counter CS1 is predicted.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state flag at the time of prize acquired in the processing of S501 is off and the big hit prize flag 203g is off, or if the big hit prize flag 203g is on, and the big hit after-gaming flag is set. When the switch 203d is off, based on the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern table, it is previously predicted from various types of short-reach, long-reach, departure normal reach, departure super reach, and departure special reach. The variation pattern type at the time of disconnection associated with the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501 is predicted.

  In the processing of S511, a prefetch command is generated based on various prediction results predicted in the processing of S507 to S510 (S511). Here, of the pre-read command described with reference to FIG. 8, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and each bit value other than the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. That is, a bit value indicating that the command is a pre-read command, a bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and a bit value indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type are set.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit prize flag 203g is on (S512). In the process of S512, when the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is ON (S512: Yes), it is a case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read with the game state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, a bit value indicating a prediction precondition for a pre-read command is set according to the state of the post-big-hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state at the end of the big hit, and the pre-read command is further transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113. In order to transmit the prefetch command, the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S513).

  Specifically, if the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, a bit value “0” is set to a bit (the most significant bit of the lower one byte) indicating a prediction precondition of a prefetch command, and the post-jackpot gaming state flag is set. If 203d is ON, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set to the bit value “1”. Then, when the process of S513 ends, next, the big hit prize flag 203g is set to OFF (S514), and the process shifts to S516.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control unit 110, only the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is notified from the main control unit 110 to the audio ramp control unit 113 by a pre-read command. It had been. That is, the prediction precondition has not been notified. Therefore, even when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is extracted from the pre-read command, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 has obtained the prediction result.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main controller 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-fetching is read-ahead. The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a command.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is in the high-probability state. Is prefetched using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, based on the prediction precondition indicated by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command.

  In the process of S512, when the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is off (S512: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read with the gaming state at the time of winning as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, a bit value indicating a precondition for prediction of a prefetch command is set in accordance with the state of the game state flag at the time of winning acquired in the processing of S501, which indicates the game state at the time of winning. In order to transmit the prefetch command to the lamp control device 113, the prefetch command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S515).

  Specifically, if the prize-winning game state flag is off, a bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower one byte) is set to a bit value “0”, and the prize-winning game state flag is set. If on, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set to the bit value “1”. When the processing of S513 or S515 described above is executed and the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, the external output processing of the main processing described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is performed. When executed, a look-ahead command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. Then, when the processing in S515 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S516. In the process of S516, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to off (S516), the prefetch execution process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  When the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result by the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23, the prediction precondition that can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-reading is determined by the pre-reading. Along with the obtained prediction result, the result can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in a pre-read command. Therefore, based on the prediction precondition indicated by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main controller 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed. However, it was not configured to be able to determine whether or not it was obtained. That is, the prediction precondition was not stored. For this reason, after the prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 obtains the prediction result using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Could not be determined.

  However, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, even if the prediction prerequisites are not stored, the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery lottery results, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Both the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed in the same game state in the main controller 110. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are always stored in the main control device 110. Matches. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110. Therefore, in the audio ramp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction results of this jackpot lottery were treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, the main control device 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unknown in which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different from each other in the main control device 110. Had treated the prediction results of the jackpot as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the big random number table 202a1 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is stored. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching can be always determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine as being reliable even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. The jackpot lottery prediction result can be appropriately handled.

  In addition, by the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23, the pre-reading is performed for the start winning during the big hit with the game state at the end of the big hit as a prediction precondition, so that the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result can be improved. . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, when the data to be prefetched is acquired with the start winning prize during the big hit, the winning gaming state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, the prediction precondition for the prefetching is always in a low probability state, so that the prediction result is unlikely to match the actual lottery result. As a result, the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is deteriorated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. Is determined, the main control device 110 can determine the game state at the end of the big hit. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery held in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery held is one in the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. It is sequentially executed in main controller 110 in order.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a starting prize during a jackpot, and when performing pre-reading for the starting prize, it is better to set the prediction precondition to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than to always set the prediction precondition to the low probability state. The possibility that the prediction result of the lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110 can be improved. Therefore, the number of prediction results that can be treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be increased, and in this embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  In the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23 described above, pre-reading is performed on a winning prize during a big hit with the game state at the end of the big hit as a prediction precondition, thereby improving the accuracy of the lottery result prediction. I have. As described above, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, so that after the determination, the game state at the end of the jackpot can be prefetched as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning prize during the jackpot, in addition to the winning prize from the determination of the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery to the start of the jackpot, the game state at the end of the jackpot is to be read as a precondition for prediction. It may be performed. Thereby, the chance that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result coincide with each other in the main control device 110 can be increased. Therefore, the number of prediction results treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be further increased, so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In the above-described pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23, the big hit prize flag 203g is provided. May be. When the big hit prize flag 203g is not provided, the big hit prize flag 203e is referred to instead of the big hit prize flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data obtained with the start winning is obtained with the big win.

  In the above-described pre-reading process, the game state flag at the time of a prize is provided. However, when the main control device 110 executes each process in a single task system, the game state flag at the time of a prize may not be provided. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the game state flag at the time of winning. As described above, the prize-winning game state flag is a flag indicating the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the start winning prize. When a ball starts to win in the first ball opening 64, each of the counters C1 to C1 is started at the timing of winning. The values of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are obtained. Then, the gaming state flag 203a obtained here is set as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start prize is a high probability state, and if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko machine at the time of the start prize is provided. This indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in the low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetch processing. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the gaming state 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described starting winning processing (see FIG. 20), so that the load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the game state at the time of prize winning storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the sub-control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S704). If it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S712 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S712 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S813 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (sub-control device) (S712). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S713, S714).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S713, S714) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S713, S714) is executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S713, S714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S713), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S714). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S704: Yes), S707: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (sub-control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S709), and the process proceeds to S710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the processing of S710, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S710), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S711), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main processing, pre-reading processing, counter updating processing, and power-off processing are roughly performed. As an outline, each process of S801 to S807 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S809 and S810 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (sub-device). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S801). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the pre-read command set in the pre-read process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, in the previous 4 ms period, the fanfare command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set by the jackpot control process described later are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S802). Next, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the big hit state, the execution of the big hit effect and the variable winning device 65 are performed. A big hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S803). Although the details of the jackpot control process will be described later, in the jackpot control process, the special winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a It is determined whether or not the ball has won a specified number. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the jackpot control process ends, next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric auditors accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S804). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening time of the electric accessory is set as a hit of the second symbol, or the lottery result of the jackpot lottery usually becomes a jackpot, the opening time and the opening of the electric accessory are set. When the number of times is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S805). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern type is set by the process of S408 or S413 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22), the variation display according to the variation pattern type is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the change time corresponding to the change pattern type set by the process of S408 or S413 of the change start process (see FIG. 22) ends, and as a result, the change process (FIG. 21) When the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S312 in the reference symbol display device 37, the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and S407 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22). The stop symbol (first symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up display) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of step S412 or the process of step S412.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S806). In the second symbol display update process, when the lottery of the second symbol is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is started. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the second symbol ends, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 83.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S807). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S807: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S808). If the predetermined time has already passed (S808: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described processes after S801 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S808: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S809, S810).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S809). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S810). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S801 to S807 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S807, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S807: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at S811 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S811), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S812). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S813), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S814), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S807 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S801 to S806 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S809 and S810 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S801, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S701). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S801. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, in the main processing, the prize ball counting signal, the abnormal payout signal reading processing (S802), the big hit control processing (S803), the electric accessory opening / closing processing (S804), the first symbol control processing (S805), the second processing Although the symbol control process (S806) is executed, a part or all of these processes may be executed not in the main process but in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S803) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S803). The jackpot control process (S803) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed, or a specific winning opening (large jackpot) is executed. This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot is started (S901). Specifically, the process of S314 of the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S901, when the big hit is started (S901: Yes), the game state at the end of the big hit in the fanfare command is set based on the state of the post-big hit game state flag 203d (S902).

  In the process of S902, of the fanfare command described with reference to FIG. 9, the upper one byte indicating the command type and the uppermost bit in the lower one byte are set. Specifically, first, a bit value indicating that the command is a fanfare command is set, and then, if the post-big hit game state flag 203d is off, the game state at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command is set. Is set to the bit value "0" (the most significant bit of the lower one byte), and if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on, the bit indicating the gaming state at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command Is set to the bit value "1". Then, a fanfare command is set (S903), and the process ends.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. When receiving the fanfare command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the big hit is not started in the process of S901 (S901: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203e is on and the current big hit is made (S904). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. As described above, the big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and the start of the big hit is set by the processing of S315 of the above-described variation processing (see FIG. 21). While it is set to ON at the timing, it is set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot ends by the process of S914 of the jackpot control process.

  In the processing of S904, if the big hit flag 203e is off and it is not a big hit (904: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S904, if the big hit flag 203e is on and the big hit is being made (S904: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S905). If it is the start timing of a new round (S905: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S906), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S907). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S905, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S905: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been released after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S908, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S909), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S908: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S910).

  In the processing of S910, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S910: Yes), the ending command is set (S911), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a display mode of the ending effect based on the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S910 (S910: No), it is determined whether the current big hit is to be ended (S912).

  In the process of S912, when ending the current big hit (S912: Yes), the big hit end is set (S913), and the big hit flag 203e is set to off (S914). Next, it is determined whether the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S915). As described above, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit and ends. It is a flag. If the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the end of the current big hit, and if the flag 203d is off, the current big jackpot is ended. It sometimes indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state.

  In the processing of S915, when the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off (S915: No), this processing is ended without doing anything, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is kept in the low probability state. As described above, during the big hit, since the gaming state flag 203a is off, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the flag 203a does not need to be set to off again at the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S915, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on (S915: Yes), the gaming state flag 203a is set to on (high probability state) (S916), and this processing ends. Here, by turning on the gaming state flag 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state at the end of the big hit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the post-big-hit gaming state flag 203d is off in the processing of S915 (S915: No), the processing ends without performing any processing. 203a may be set to off (low probability state), and the present process may be terminated.

  When the fanfare command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 by the jackpot control process shown in FIG. 27, information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is included in the fanfare command. It can be sent including it. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current jackpot is completed based on the received fanfare command. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command. If the lottery result is a jackpot, the main control unit 110 notifies the audio ramp control unit 113 of whether the current jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by the fanfare command. The main controller 110 notifies the sound ramp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, or an ending command. You may. That is, the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and further determines the type of the jackpot, and then determines whether the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by audio lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided. The game state may be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command need not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1116 in FIG. 29), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1119 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1119 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006 described below. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1119 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1119, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1119 (see S1118 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1119 is executed, the process of S1008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1008 is performed via the processes of steps S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), the process skips S1009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1011), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is that when the process from S1004 to the process in S1008 is performed via the process in S1006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101). If the above has not elapsed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1112 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1111. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. In steps S1102 to S1111, the processing related to display (effect) is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1112 and the command determination process in S1113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform setting relating to the variable effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. Further, by executing the process of S1113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from main controller 110.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), first, in the previous 1-msec cycle, various commands set by the processing of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1109 described later (S1103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1104). . The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of turning on the pending lamp 285 according to the value of the pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is completed, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1108). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (S1108), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1151), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1152). As a result, if the vibration level is lower than the predetermined level (S1152: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process ends, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1152: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and the sound output device 226 is set to output an alarm sound (S1153) and displayed. An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1154), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29). Thus, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 29, description of the main processing will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1109), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1110). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illuminations 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. When the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (see FIG. 30) (see S1153), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 226.

  After the processing of S1110, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1111), and the process shifts to S1112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1109 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1110 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1112, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1113 is completed, the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is updated (S1114), and the ending mode counter 223f is updated (S1115). The update of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is performed such that each time the update process is performed, one is added in order within the range of 0 to 127, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed in such a manner that each time the updating process is performed, one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 2 and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 2). The value of the continuous preview lottery counter 223g updated by the update process of S1114 is referred to by the continuous preview determination process (see FIG. 32) described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous preview effect. The value of the ending style counter 223f is referred to in the ending effect determination processing (see FIG. 33) described later, and is used to determine whether the display mode of the ending effect is normal display or fixed effect display.

  When the process of S1115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1116). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1116 (S1116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1118), and the power-off processing is executed (S1119). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S1120), and thereafter, the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1117: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1117: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a store clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1113). This command determination processing (S1113) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In this processing, when a prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, the start of a continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and when an ending command is received from the main control device 110, the ending The display mode in the effect is set.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it is (S1201). When the variation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1203). Return to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). When the stop type command is received (S1204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1206). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (variable display suspension) The number of times N) is extracted, and this is stored in the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1208). In the process of S1208, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the end of the process in S1208, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, so that every time a starting winning is detected, a voice is executed by the processing of S1208. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 detects Can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.

  In the process of S1207, if the pending ball count command has not been received (S1207: No), then it is determined whether a prefetch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1209). Then, when the prefetch command is received (S1209: Yes), the prefetch prediction precondition, the jackpot lottery prediction result, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result are extracted from the received prefetch command, and these are prefetched. The information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S1210). Then, a continuous announcement determination process is executed (S1211), and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control device 110 changes the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a. The acquired values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the acquired game state flag 203a is set as a winning state game state flag. C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the same reserved area as the stored reserved area. Then, when data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the prize-winning game state flag) is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110, separately from the original jackpot lottery, From the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding area and the gaming state flag at the time of winning, various types of information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained when the original jackpot lottery is performed. Is read ahead (predicted).

  When the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a pre-read command indicating various information (acceptance / non-permission, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-read and a pre-condition for pre-reading is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp. Sent to control device 113. Upon receiving the prefetch command, the voice ramp control device 113 extracts a prefetch prediction precondition, a jackpot lottery prediction result, and a fluctuation pattern type prediction result from the prefetch command, and uses them as prefetch information as prefetch information. The information is stored in the reservation area of the information storage area 223a.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is in the high-probability state. Is prefetched using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 has used the prediction result of the prefetch information based on the precondition of the prediction of the prefetch information.

  In the continuous preview determination process, the fluctuation that is suspended at that time is determined based on the prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous preliminary lottery counter 223g. It is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous announcement effects for the effect.

  In the process of S1209, if the prefetch command has not been received (S1209: No), then it is determined whether a fanfare command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). When the fanfare command is received (S1212: Yes), the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the received fanfare command (S1213), and the extracted game state is set. Based on this, the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set (S1214). In the processing of S1214, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is “low probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to off, and the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is set. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to ON.

  Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the big hit in the main control device 110 based on the after-big hit game state flag 223c.

  Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the jackpot ends, and when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 thereafter, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the new jackpot lottery are based on the gaming state set at the time of jackpot termination. Is determined. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 refers to the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, and after the current big hit ends, the big random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110. Can be determined.

  Next, a display fanfare command for starting the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1215), and the process returns to the main process. The display fanfare command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display fanfare command, the display control device 114 starts a fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if a fanfare command has not been received (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1216). When the round number command is received (S1216: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1217), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S1217). S1218), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1216 (S1216: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1219). If an ending command has been received (S1219: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S1221), and this process ends. In the ending setting process, it is determined based on the look-ahead information stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223a whether the display mode of the ending effect is the normal display or the fixed effect display, and the display for the display corresponding to the determination is performed. An ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect of a display mode corresponding to the display ending command.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the processing of S1219 (S1219: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1220). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  As described above, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, when the fan fare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fan fare command is received. Is extracted, and the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set in accordance with the gaming state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the main controller 110 determines whether the current jackpot is a variable jackpot or a regular jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, if the stop type command indicates the big hit type, the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. May be. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is not always necessary to include information indicating a game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the continuous announcement determination process (S1211). This continuous announcement determination processing (S1211) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and receives the prefetch command as described above. In this case, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect.

  In this continuous announcement determination process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of predetermined conditions (condition 1) to (condition 3) described later is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, next, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect. Here, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is started, the continuous announcement effect is started. S1302 to S1310 to be described later are processes for determining whether any one of (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and S1311 to S1316 to be described later start a continuous announcement effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to perform.

  (Condition 1) is that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set, and (Condition 2) is “big hit” when all of the set continuous announcement effects are completed, and further, a new jackpot is set. Two or more variable effects (holding balls) exist between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received look-ahead command and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set (holding ball) ( That is, the difference between the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b and the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 3 or more. (Condition 3) is that when all the set continuous announcement effects have been completed, "Large" in the lottery result of the jackpot lottery among the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command.

  In the continuous announcement determination processing, first, the prefetch information (that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of the prefetch) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is read (S1301). . The prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is specified based on the reserved ball number counter 223b. That is, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 1, the prefetch information stored in the reserved first area is specified as the prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Similarly, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 2, the look-ahead information stored in the reserved second area is, and when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 3, the look-ahead information stored in the reserved third area is. When the value of the reserved ball count counter 223b is 4, the prefetch information stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Next, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is “big hit” (S1302). (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1302: No), it is determined whether the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the processing of S1301 is “reach out of front and rear” (S1303). ). In the process of S1303, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “reach out of order” (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the variation pattern type is not “reach out of order” but is another variation pattern type (S1303: No), the process ends.

  In the processing of S1304, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b is substituted for the variable A (S1304), and then the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is substituted for the variable B (S1305). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous announcement number counter 223h) is 0 (S1306). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1306: Yes), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed. Since it is not set and the above (condition 1) is satisfied, the process shifts to the process of S1311, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect by the process of S1311 and thereafter.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if the value of the variable B (that is, the number of continuous announcements counter 223h) is not 0, that is, if it is 1 or more (S1306: No), the execution of the continuous announcement effect has already been set Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is ON (S1307). As described above, when the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is ON, the game state after the variable production after the continuous announcement production has been performed in all the variable productions in which the continuous announcement production is set is “big hit”. And the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is off, the game state after the variable announcement after the continuous announcement effect has been performed in all the variable announcements for which the continuous announcement effect has been set. Indicates that the state is “off”.

  Then, in the process of S1307, if the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is on (S1307: Yes), it becomes “big hit” when all the set continuous notice effects have been completed, so the variable The difference between the value of A (that is, the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (that is, the number of continuous announcements counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted for the variable C (S1308). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1309). As a result, if the variable C is 3 or more (S1309: Yes), the variable effect (hold) corresponding to the received prefetch command is received. It can be determined that two or more variable effects (reserved balls) exist between the ball (ball) and the last variable effect (reserved ball) for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set. Therefore, it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309 that the above-described (condition 2) is satisfied, and the process shifts to the processing of S1311. Decide whether to do it.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1309, when the variable C is not equal to or more than 3 (that is, less than 3) (S1309: No), the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuously Since there is no more than one variable effect (reserved ball) between the last variable effect (reserved ball) for which the execution of the notice effect is set, the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309 are not performed. From the result, it can be determined that none of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous announcement effect.

  In the process of S1307, if the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is ON (S1307: Yes), it becomes a "big hit" when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed. As a result, the player's expectation due to the continuous announcement performance is temporarily interrupted. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set If two or more variable effects (reserved balls) exist, a determination is made as to whether or not to start a continuous announcement effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined with a predetermined probability, in the two or more variable effects performed after the "big hit", the chance eyes can be always displayed as the stop symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous announcement effect, and to enhance the expectation that the player feels for the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1307, if the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is off (S1307: No), it becomes “out” when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed, so that In the pre-read information read in the process of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is “big hit” (S1310). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” (S1310: Yes), the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301. From the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309, it can be determined that the above (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S1311, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect by the processes after S1311.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1310, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out of place” (S1310: No), the above-described processing is performed based on the results of the processing of S1307, the processing of S1308, and the processing of S1311 ( It can be determined that none of the conditions 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous announcement effect. Here, when the value of the post-announcement big hit flag 223i is off (S1307: No), it becomes "out" when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed. In such a situation, the start of the continuous announcement effect with a predetermined probability is determined only when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” among the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect that is being executed from being completed and “being out”, and the continuous announcement effect being continuously performed and becoming “out” again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state of “disengagement” continuously after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, when the continuous preview production ends, it will be “off”, and if the continuous preview production is continued, the player can have a strong sense of expectation to be a “big hit” and continue playing the game for the player Can be motivated to do so.

  As described above, in the processing of S1302 to S1310, it is determined whether any one of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and any of (condition 1) to (condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous announcement determination processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing. As a result, when none of (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, the process from S1311 for determining the start of the continuous announcement effect is not executed, so that the determination of the start of the continuous announcement effect can be performed reliably and easily. Can be prevented. Further, since the processing after S1311 is omitted, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S1311 to S1313, it is used to determine the start of the continuous announcement effect from the two continuous announcement determination tables 222a (the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit, or the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure). Is selected (see FIG. 10).

  First, in the process of S1311, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” in the pre-read information read in the process of S1301 (S1311). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" (S1311: Yes), the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit is selected as the continuous announcement determination table used to determine the start of the continuous announcement production (S1312). ). On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1311: No), the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the outage is selected as the continuous announcement determination table used to determine the start of the continuous announcement production (S1313). ).

  After the continuous announcement determination table is selected by the processing of S1311 to S1313, the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is obtained (S1314). Then, the continuous announcement determination table selected in the process of S1312 or S1313 (the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of a big hit, or the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of a loss), and the value of the retained ball counter 223b (variation display) The continuous notice determination range is specified based on the number N of times of suspension, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice lottery counter 223g (S1315).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous announcement determination range, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect (S1316). In the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous announcement determination range and the continuous announcement effect is not started (S1316: No), the process of S1317 and thereafter is skipped, and the command determination process is performed. Return to That is, the setting of the continuous notice number counter 223h is kept as it is. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball set to perform a variable production announcement, a continuous announcement effect is performed on the retained ball, and if there is no such retained ball, a continuous announcement effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1316, when the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous announcement determination range and it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started (S1316: Yes), the continuous announcement number counter 223h and the reserved ball number counter 223b are set. Is set (S1317). Here, by setting the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223h in the processing of S1317, all the variable effects suspended before the variable effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously processed. Execution of a notice effect is set. In other words, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a chance eye over all the variable effects corresponding to the reserved ball retained before the reserved ball corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, among the pre-read information read in the processing of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is “big hit” (S1318). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” (S1318: Yes), the post-notification big hit flag 223i is set to ON (S1319), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1318: No), the post-notification big hit flag 223i is set to off (S1320), and this processing ends.

  By the processing of S1319 or the processing of S1320, when all the set continuous announcement effects have been completed, it is possible to set the after-announcement jackpot flag 223i as to whether it is a "big hit" or "missing". . Thereby, the continuous notice determination processing is executed again, and when the processing of S1307 is executed, the above-mentioned (condition 2) or (condition 3) is used by using the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i set here. Can be determined.

  Next, the ending setting process (S1221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1221). The ending setting process (S1221) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1221 in FIG. 31). This is a process for determining the display mode of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result is determined to be "big hit" in the big hit lottery in the main control device 110, when the variable effect corresponding to the "big hit" ends, the pachinko machine 10 moves to the big hit. At the same time, a big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, first, a fanfare effect is performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot. Next, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a jackpot, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the number of rounds is notified to the player. Then, when the big hit (2 rounds or 15 rounds) ends, an ending effect is finally performed, and the end of the big hit is notified to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, a fixed effect display that informs the player that the jackpot ends and the lottery result becomes a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery, or simply a jackpot. Or a normal display notifying the player of the end of the game.

  In the ending setting process, first, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is obtained (S1401), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1401). S1402). In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b is 0 (S1402: No), it is the timing to start the ending effect, but no major jackpot has been suspended in the main controller 110. If not, the process proceeds to S1415.

  In the processing of S1402, if the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1402: Yes), one or more jackpot lotteries are reserved in the main control device 110. The prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one, starting from the jackpot lottery in the order of suspension.

  Specifically, among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the reserved area having the smaller area number. Check one by one. It should be noted that data corresponding to a start winning a prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number in time.

  Therefore, first, the variable i is set to 1 (S1403), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S1404). Then, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserved i-th area is compared with the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c (S1405). As a result of the comparison, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition is compared with the game state indicated by the prediction precondition. Then, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c indicates the same gaming state (S1406).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-read is determined by the main control command. The device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113. If the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, it means that the main controller 110 has used the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching. Means that the pre-reading has been performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, from the prefetch command, prediction preconditions for prefetch, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and the like are extracted as prefetch information, and are stored in the reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Is stored. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information, and the main control device 110 obtains the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Can be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main controller 110, and thereafter, when the timing of starting the big hit comes, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113. . In this case, the main control device 110 generates a fanfare command including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, and the generated command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. . Upon receiving the fanfare command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command, and sets the post-big hit game state flag 223c according to the game state. The state is set. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the big hit is completed in the main control device 110 based on the after-big hit game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. At the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the big hit type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 after the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the game state set at the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the main control device 110 newly executes the game state after the current big hit ends. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery can also be determined based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c.

  Therefore, in the above-described processing of S1405, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot, the jackpot used in the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is compared. The main controller 110 can compare whether the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead.

  Then, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), the jackpot lottery is performed. This is a case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-reading of the lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result The corresponding actual jackpot lottery results match in main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, when the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery results is performed. The main control device 110 does not match the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It is unclear whether they match in main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S1406, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), as described above, This is the case where the predicted result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S1404 and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1407).

  In the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out of order (S1407: No), 1 is added to the variable i (S1409), and the value of the variable i becomes It is determined whether the value is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S1410). In the process of S1410, if the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b (S1410: Yes), the prefetch information is also stored in another reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Since this is the case, the process returns to S1404, and the prefetch information stored in another holding area is confirmed.

  After returning to the process of S1404, the above-described processes of S1404 to S1410 are repeated, and the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in another holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area). Is compared with the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c in ascending order of the area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the reserved ball count counter 223b (S1410: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is read. This is a case in which all the prediction results in all the pre-read information are out of check. In this case, there is no pre-reading information to be confirmed, so the flow shifts to the processing of S1415.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1407: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S1411 to display the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect. A process is performed to determine whether to set. In the present embodiment, a plurality of prefetch information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and even if each processing of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the processing of S1407 is a big hit, For example, the configuration is such that the repetition of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, the process does not return to each process of S1404 to S1410, and does not check the remaining prefetch information.

  This is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery. If there is at least one jackpot, the result of the other jackpot lottery may be any, and it is not necessary to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  Also, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery held is executed and the jackpot is again obtained, the ending effect determination process is executed during the second jackpot, Thus, no problem arises because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is a jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in which the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery held is terminated after the running jackpot is completed. If it is executed one by one, the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big hit lotteries, and the big hit will be made again. Then, when the jackpot again occurs, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by a fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fan fare command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fan fare command. The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110, there is a jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, the gaming state after the jackpot The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main control device 110, for the jackpot lottery executed after the jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the post jackpot game state flag 223c. But I can't trust the result of that comparison. Therefore, it is meaningless to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is not necessary to check the pre-read information, the check is not performed, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), as described above. The main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Is the case. Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, as will be described later, the jackpot lottery prediction result may be exceptionally treated as being trustworthy, so it is determined whether the jackpot lottery prediction result in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1408). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c indicate different game states in the processing of S1406. (S1406: No), the process proceeds to S1408 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot. In the case of S1406: No, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is determined. May be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S1415 without performing the process in S1408.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the large random number table 202a2 for high probability do not overlap. Thus, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the gaming state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c. Even when the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the corresponding actual jackpot lottery do not match in the main control device 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is the jackpot, the prediction result corresponds to the prediction result. In the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are not determined by the main controller 110 as to whether they match or not. Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value that is a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value indicated by becomes a hit value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a big hit or a miss in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S1408, when the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1408: Yes), as described above, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally out of order and can be trusted. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1409. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled. In that case, the process returns to the process of S1409, and the repetitive processes of S1404 to S1410 can be continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that the display mode of the ending effect can be set to “determined effect display”.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out of order (S1408: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c. This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the state. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unknown whether the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is a jackpot or a loss.

  Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S1415 without returning to the processes of S1404 to S1410, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect determination process, if it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot or a loss, the process will not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410 and the remaining prefetch information will be checked. It is configured not to.

  This is because when one of the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery is checked one by one from the jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in the order of the reserved lottery, the prediction result becomes one of the prediction results. If it becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. In addition, the result of the lottery is also unknown for the subsequent jackpot.

  As described above, the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, so if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result will be Becomes unknown. Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the process of S1411, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is obtained (S1411), and the obtained counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1412). If the acquired counter value is included in the range in which the execution of the fixed effect display is selected, and it is determined that the fixed effect display is to be executed (S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to S1414. In the process of S1414, the fixed effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1414), and the process shifts to the process of S1416. In the process of S1413, if the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the normal display, and it is determined that the normal display is to be executed (S1413: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1415. In the process of S1415, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1415), and the process shifts to the process of S1416.

  In the process of S1416, a display ending command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display mode of the ending effect is generated based on the display mode set by the process of S1414 or the process of S1415, and the command is displayed. The setting is made for transmission to the control device 114 (S1416). Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 controls the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 33, in the process of S1405, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the big hit flag 223c, so that the big hit lottery is performed. The main control device 110 compares whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. In 113, the jackpot lottery prediction result was treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the jackpot random number used in prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is stored. It can always be determined whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  When the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same. And the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, a plurality of prefetch information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and even when each of the processes of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the big hit lottery is performed in the process of S1407. If the prediction result is a big hit, the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 can be stopped there. In other words, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and if the prediction result becomes a jackpot, the process does not return to each of the processes of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery held at the same time as the "confirmed effect display". This is because if there is at least one of the jackpot lotteries performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  Also, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery held is executed and the jackpot is again obtained, the ending effect determination process is executed during the second jackpot, Thus, no problem arises because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is a jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in which the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery held is terminated after the running jackpot is completed. If it is executed one by one, the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big hit lotteries, and the big hit will be made again. Then, when the jackpot again occurs, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by a fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fan fare command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fan fare command. The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110, there is a jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, the gaming state after the jackpot The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main control device 110, for the jackpot lottery executed after the jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the post jackpot game state flag 223c. But I can't trust the result of that comparison. Therefore, it is meaningless to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is not necessary to confirm the prefetch information, the confirmation is not performed, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, when a plurality of prefetch information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and when each of the processes of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the prefetch information is determined in the process of S1406. Is different from the gaming state indicated by the prediction prerequisite in step S1406 and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot (S1406: No), and in the processing of S1408, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot. If it is (S1408: Yes), the process returns to S1409, and the repetition process of S1404 to S1410 can be continuously executed.

  As described above, in the process of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. This is a case where the main controller 110 does not match the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch do not match in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information in the process of S1408 is the jackpot. Then, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are not determined by the main controller 110 as to whether they match or not. In other words, in the sound lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery results and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Even if the main controller 110 does not match, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result is deemed to be out of order, the process returns to S1409, and the processes of S1404 to S1410 can be repeatedly executed. .

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the gaming state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S1408. If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot lottery lottery results Is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. In addition, the result of the lottery is also unknown for the subsequent jackpot.

  As described above, the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, so if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result also becomes Becomes unknown. Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  More specifically, in the above-described ending effect determination process, when a plurality of pieces of prefetch information are stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the processes of S1404 to S1410 are repeatedly performed, the process of S1406 is performed. The game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the game state indicated by the post-big-hit game state flag 223c (S1406: No). If it is determined that there is (S1408: No), the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown and the prediction result cannot be trusted, the process does not return to the processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information cannot be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the ending effect determination process, when it is not clear whether the actual jackpot lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect. . With this, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  The ending effect determination process described above is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. The ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is time to start the ending effect. You. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the big hit effect is started, but is executed after waiting until just before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times). If the prefetch information is acquired from the prefetch information storage area 223a after waiting just before the start of the ending effect to be performed, four prefetch information can be acquired in most cases.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the ending effect determination process is executed immediately after the big hit effect is started, the possibility of obtaining a larger amount of prefetch information is increased, and the possibility of branching to Yes in the process of S1407 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, and if any of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result is It is possible to increase opportunities for giving the player a sense of expectation that the game will be performed. In addition, each time a jackpot lottery is held, it is possible to increase opportunities to make the player feel delighted, and to increase opportunities for the player to increase expectation that the next hit will be a big hit. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the above-described ending effect determination process is configured to be executed when an ending command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, but the ending effect determination process is for determining the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, it is sufficient that the processing is executed and ended before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed at any time as long as the process ends after the fanfare command transmitted from main controller 110 is received and before the ending effect is started.

  In addition, in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment, every time the jackpot lottery associated with the ball entry into the first entrance 64 is held, the lottery result is pre-read, and the lottery result obtained by the pre-reading ( The process of notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the prediction result) is performed. Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, when it is immediately before the ending effect starts, based on the prediction result obtained by the pre-reading in the main control device 110, the ending effect displays “determined effect display” or “ A complicated process such as a process of determining a display mode for performing “normal display” is performed. Thereby, the processing in main controller 110 can be concentrated on the jackpot lottery (that is, the jackpot lottery associated with the entry into first entrance 64), which is the most important processing of pachinko machine 10, while the audio If the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used for the lamp control device 113, the display mode determination conditions in the ending effect can be easily set to various modes.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process will be described. Each of FIGS. 34 to 37 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the description starts assuming that the start winning is not suspended in the pachinko machine 10.

  In FIG. 34 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which start winnings G, H, and I have occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize G, it is assumed that the lottery result will be lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize H, the pachinko machine If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be a big hit. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize I, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot. Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the start winning prize G occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, but is not in the jackpot, so the prefetching of the starting winning prize G is performed. If performed, the low-probability state, which is the gaming state at the time of the start winning, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize G is incorrect. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize G is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize H, similarly to the start winning prize G, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit state and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, when the prefetching is performed for the start winning prize H, The low-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize H is a probability change jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the starting prize H is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command is performed. The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning prize I occurs, similarly to the start winning prize G, there is no big hit, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state. The low-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize I is usually a jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the starting prize I is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command is performed. The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when it is time to start the jackpot effect, the main control device 110 transmits a fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot has been completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low-probability state in the first place, so that even if a jackpot effect is started, the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low-probability state. In addition, since the current jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the low probability state even when the jackpot effect ends. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize G is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize H is performed, and the jackpot is determined. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. After that, a jackpot lottery according to the start winning prize I is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since the information is acquired from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the storing order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning G is determined. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize G matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot prize corresponding to the start winning prize G matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot prize. .

  However, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize G is out of order. , The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the big hit. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize H matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize H matches the actual jackpot lottery result. . Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize H is a probability change jackpot this time.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a big hit. In addition, it is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. Further, it is configured not to check other prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. This is because the `` confirmed effect display '' informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery, so at least among the held jackpot lotteries This is because if there is one big hit, it is not necessary to check the lottery result for other prefetch information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing proceeds to S1411, and the processing of determining whether to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. Done. That is, in the present ending effect determination process, the look-ahead information corresponding to the start winning prize I is not referred to, so that “determined effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the fixed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially performed. If done, you will win a jackpot in one of the lotteries. Therefore, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player will end up with a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be delighted every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 35 will be described. In FIG. 35 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which start winning prizes J, K, and L occur during the execution of the fluctuation effect. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize J, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result will be off. In the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize K, the lottery result is assumed to be off regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize L, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result will be out. Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the start winning prize J occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a jackpot, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. In, a high probability state, which is a game state at the time of starting winning, is selected as a prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize J is usually a jackpot. When the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize J is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, and the prediction preconditions indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are obtained. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning K is generated, as in the case of the starting winning J, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a big hit, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. The high-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning K is out of order, and a prefetch command corresponding to the starting winning K is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command is obtained. The conditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning L is generated, as in the case of the starting winning J, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. The high-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize L is a probability change jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize L is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command is performed. The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when it is time to start the jackpot effect, the main control device 110 transmits a fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot has been completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a high probability state to a low probability state when a jackpot effect is started. In addition, since the current jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the low probability state even when the jackpot effect ends. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize J is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize K is performed, and the jackpot is determined. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize L is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since the information is obtained from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the storing order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning J is determined. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize J is different from the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot prize corresponding to the start winning prize J does not coincide with the actual lottery result of the jackpot prize.

  However, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), even if the predicted precondition does not match the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning prize J is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition of the prefetch does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result will be off.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state. Similarly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read information does not become unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out of order.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning K and the prediction precondition are obtained in the second process of S1404, and the prediction result is obtained in the second process of S1405. The predicted precondition thus set is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the big hit. However, even in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning K does not match the gaming state at the end of the big hit. Furthermore, this time, as shown in FIG. 35B, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning K is out of order.

  As described above, in the case where the prediction precondition of the pre-reading does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order, the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery It is unclear whether it will be a jackpot or a miss.

  In the ending effect determination process described above, if it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot or a loss, the process will not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410 and the remaining prediction result will be unknown. It is configured not to check the pre-read information. Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S1415 without returning to the processes of S1404 to S1410, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. That is, in the present ending effect determination process, the prefetch information corresponding to the start winning prize L is not referred to, so that execution of unnecessary processes can be suppressed.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. In FIG. 36 (a), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a probability variable jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, and further, during the execution of the jackpot effect according to the jackpot, start winning M, N, O occurs. FIG. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize M, the lottery result is determined to be off regardless of the gaming state (low-probability state, high-probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize O, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability variable jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be out. Shall be As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the start winning prize M occurs during the execution of the big hit effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since the big hit is being performed, the prefetching is performed for the start winning prize M. In this case, a high-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the big hit, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning M is incorrect. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize M is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are obtained. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning N is generated, similarly to the start winning M, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but it is a big hit. , A high-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the jackpot, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N is out of order, a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize N is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command is indicated. The conditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning prize O occurs, as in the case of the start winning prize M, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but it is in a big hit. , A high-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the jackpot, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O is a probability change jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize O is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot effect has already been executed. However, before the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the jackpot of this time is a probable jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high-probability state at the end of the jackpot, and is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. . Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state, although no jackpot lottery is performed during the jackpot effect. In addition, since the current jackpot is a probable jackpot, at the end of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a low probability state to a high probability state. Then, when the jackpot effect is completed, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize M is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize N is performed, and the jackpot is performed. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize O is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since it is obtained from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the stored order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning M is determined. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize M matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize M matches the actual jackpot lottery result. .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize M is out of order, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize N is next processed in the second processing of S1404. , The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize N matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize N matches the actual jackpot lottery result. .

  However, also in this case, as shown in FIG. 36B, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N is out of order. The prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the third process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the predicted precondition corresponding to the start winning prize O matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize O matches the actual jackpot lottery result. . Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O becomes a probability change big hit.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a big hit. In addition, it is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing proceeds to S1411, and the processing of determining whether to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. Done.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the fixed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially performed. If done, you will win a jackpot in one of the lotteries. Therefore, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player will end up with a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be delighted every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 37 will be described. In FIG. 37 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which the start winning prize P has occurred during the execution of the variable effect. Further, a state in which the variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is completed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, and further, during the execution of the jackpot effect accompanying the jackpot, start winning prizes Q and R are shown. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize P, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be off. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize Q, the lottery result is lost if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, while the lottery result is lost if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. Will be a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize R, the lottery result is assumed to be lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning prize P occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. A high-probability state is selected as a condition and its look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize P is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize P is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are obtained. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when it is time to start the jackpot effect, the main control device 110 transmits a fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot has been completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a high probability state to a low probability state when a jackpot effect is started. In addition, since the current jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the low probability state even when the jackpot effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning prize Q occurs during the execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, but since the jackpot is during the jackpot, the prefetching is performed on the starting prize Q. In this case, a low-probability state, which is a gaming state at the end of the big hit, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q is a probability change jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize Q is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning prize R occurs, similarly to the start winning prize Q, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state, but is in a big hit. , A low-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the big hit, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize R is out of order, a look-ahead command corresponding to the start winning prize R is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the look-ahead command is obtained. The conditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize P is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize Q is performed, and the jackpot is determined. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. After that, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize R is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since it is obtained from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the stored order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning prize P is obtained. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize P is different from the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize P does not match the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), even if the predicted precondition does not match the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the start winning prize P is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition of the prefetch does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result will be off. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read information does not become unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out of order.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q and the prediction precondition are acquired in the second process of S1404, and the prediction result is acquired in the second process of S1405. The predicted precondition thus set is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the big hit. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize Q matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot prize corresponding to the start winning prize Q matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot prize. . Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q becomes a probability change big hit.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result, and the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the big hit lottery. , It is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. In this case, it is configured not to check the remaining prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. This is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 If there is at least one jackpot, any other jackpot lottery result may be used, and it is not necessary to check the lottery result for the remaining prefetch information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing proceeds to S1411, and the processing of determining whether to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. Done. That is, in the present ending effect determination process, since the look-ahead information corresponding to the start winning prize R is not referred to, the “ending effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and the execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the fixed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially performed. If done, you will win a jackpot in one of the lotteries. Therefore, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player will end up with a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be delighted every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is off, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1311). The variable display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707). Then, in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1708 is a stop type corresponding to "big hit" (S1709). If the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, when the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “out” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, so that the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1712), the process proceeds to S1713. By the processing in S1712, the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the symbol on the chance line (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, as a continuous announcement effect, when the variable effect is stopped on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol serving as a chance can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (the continuous notice number counter 223h). Since the value is 1) or when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set (the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0), the flow shifts to the processing of S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1713.

  If the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 1 as a result of the process in S1711, the stop type is not set as the chance type as the stop type because the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set is performed. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1713, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1713). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice number counter is determined. The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112). This variable display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1507. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then, in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). Upon receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 performs the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command. , The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1505), and the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is shifted (S1506). In the process of S1506, a process of sequentially shifting the prefetch information stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift the look-ahead information. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1507.

  In the process of S1507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1507). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1507: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1508). Then, in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1509).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1509 is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1510). If the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to "big hit" (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “out” (S1510: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, so that the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1513), the process proceeds to S1514. By the process of S1513, the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the chance (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, as a continuous announcement effect, when the variable effect is stopped on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol serving as a chance can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1511, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1511: No), when the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (the continuous notice number counter 223h). If the value is 1) or if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set (the value of the continuous announcement counter 223h is 0), the flow shifts to the processing of S1512. In the process of S1512, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1512), and the process proceeds to S1514.

  If the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 1 as a result of the process in S1512, this is the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, and therefore the chance type is not set as the stop type. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1514, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1514). . When the display stop type command is received, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515: Yes), the continuous notice number counter is determined. The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1516), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0 (S1515: No), the process of S1516 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception process is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1702, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 39). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S1602 in FIG. 39) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1601) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot processing shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1702. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1701. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1702, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, then the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1604, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 50A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3102 in FIG. 50A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B), a simple command is displayed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. A determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and a simple display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64, and the main control device 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. If the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low readout speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data, so that after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on also becomes longer. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1605, interruption permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1606, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1902), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S1903), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S1902) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S1904). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S1903) or the simple display setting processing (S1909). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S1905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1906). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1904), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S1905) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing processing according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15 probable big hit, 2R probable big hit, 15R normal big hit, out-of-front reach, out-of-front reach) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete departure, chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S1908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S1909) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46, details of the above-described command determination processing (S1902), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2001: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2005), and returns to the process of S2001.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2101, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2101 is turned on, and other variation table data is determined. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2103, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2106), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2105, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2102. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2006). If there is a display stop type command (S2006: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2007), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any one of 15R certain jackpot, 2R certain jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out, complete out of chance, chance) Is determined (S2201), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2203).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2202. In the above-described task process (S1904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set in the process of S2202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2203, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the process of S2203, next, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of 15 probable jackpot, 2R probable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, reach out of front and back, reach other than back and forth, reach out, complete out, and chance) Is determined to be a jackpot stop type (S2204), and if it is a jackpot stop type (S2204: Yes), if it is in the on state, the transfer start of the image data used in the fanfare effect is set to the normal image The fanfare data transfer flag 223i to be notified to the transfer setting process (S3103) is set to ON (S2205), the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, when the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2204: No), the process of S2205 is skipped, the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the fanfare data transfer flag 223i, the image data to be used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the variable effect of the jackpot is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display fanfare command instructing the start of the fanfare effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the display fanfare command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time occurs between the end of the variable effect and the start of the fanfare effect. There was a possibility that the user might feel uneasy or uncomfortable about stopping.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device is started. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in 81. With this, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 ends, the fanfare effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is concerned about whether the operation is stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the character ROM 234 is read from the normal ROM. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2201, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is set, even if it is actually "miss", the stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 may be mistaken for a “big hit” by the player, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure is set, and in fact, if it is a "big hit", the completely departure stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even so, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit", which can delight the player.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2006, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fanfare command for display among unprocessed commands (S2008). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2008: Yes), fanfare command processing is executed (S2009), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command processing (S2009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the fanfare command processing. This fanfare command process executes a process corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2303). S2304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2305), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fanfare command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2304, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set fanfare display data table is stored in the character ROM 2 in advance. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the fanfare command processing is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the third symbol display device 81 is performing the fanfare effect, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a jackpot effect (a fanfare effect, a round effect, an ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which the fanfare effect on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the fanfare effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated, and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give a sense of incongruity.

  The display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (15 rounds or 2 rounds) are completed. Since it is transmitted, after receiving the display ending command, the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the ending effect starts after the round effect ends. By this time, a lot of waiting time occurs, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display fanfare command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , And the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the fanfare effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). Or two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. With this, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 ends, the fanfare effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is concerned about whether the operation is stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2008, if it is determined that there is no display fanfare command (S2008: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2010), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S2010: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2011), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the round number command processing (S2011) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2402).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2401, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2405), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2010, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2010: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S2012). If there is an ending command for use (S2012: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2013), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the other ending display data tables are set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d refers to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2503. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). S2405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2406), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2012, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2014). If there is a change command (S2014: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2015), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2015) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103) of the rear image change associated with the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2601). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A to C), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2602), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S2601 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S2602. . If the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2602 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2014, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2014: No), it is next determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2016). If (S2016: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2017), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2017) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2702). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2701, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S2702, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2016 (S2016: No), processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2018), and the processing returns to S2001.

  In the processing of S2001, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2002 to S2018 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2001 to S2018 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 43 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 43 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2102, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S1903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2801). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2801: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S2802 to S2804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S2802), and then S2803 to S2804. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed. In the processing of S2803, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2804).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2901).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters. Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2804) or in the process of S2803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805. In S2805, a pointer update process is performed (S2805).

  Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3001). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3002). As a result, if it is End information (S3002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3003). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3003: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3005), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3006), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3002: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2806). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content acquired in the processing of step S2806 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2808). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S2808: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S2808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S2809).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S2809: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. The setting is made (S2810), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2811). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2813). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2814), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S2815), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set in the process of S2815 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S1904), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2815 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2809, if the confirmed display flag is on rather than on (S2809: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2816). If the demonstration display flag is off (S2816: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S2817), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2818). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2820), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2821), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command or the fanfare command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S2816, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2816: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and it means that the demonstration effect has been completed. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 13 (b) and 13 (c) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S1905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3102), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3101, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3103), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3102), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3201). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3201: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3202). In the process of S3202, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3202 (S3202: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to S3203. Also, as a result of the process of S3201, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3203.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3203). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3204), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3203, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3205), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S1908 in FIG. 41 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S1909 in FIG. 41 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are performed, the normal drawing of the image is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3101: No in FIG. 50A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3103), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S2805) of the previously executed display setting process (S1903). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3302). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S3302: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3303) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3304), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3305.

  In the process of S3302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3302: No), the process of S3303 and S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. In the process of S3305, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3305), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S3305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3306).

  In the process of S3306, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3306 (S3306: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to S3307. Also, as a result of the process of S3305, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3305: No), the process proceeds to S3307.

  In the process of S3307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3307). If the transfer start flag is on (S3307: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3303 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3317. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3307: No), then it is determined whether the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309).

  If the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. This means that the type of stop has been determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set off (S3310), and the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3311). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the fanfare effect, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained. Then (S3312), the flow shifts to the process of S3317.

  In the process of S3309, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but off (S3309: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3313). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3313: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3313: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S3314), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3315). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3316), and the process moves to S3317.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3315, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S3317, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317). The determination in the process of S3317 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S3317, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3317, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3318). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3318, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3319), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub-state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the above-described drawing process (S1906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3401). That is, in the process of S3401, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3402). Here, when the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image rendered in the first frame buffer 236b as the rendering target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3402, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the main control device 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1, and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning gaming state flag). Then, when the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern The type is pre-read in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the main control device 110 transmits the various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the predicted result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading and the pre-condition of the pre-reading from the main control device 110 by the pre-reading command. The device 113 is notified.

  As described above, the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 which is a precondition for the prediction when predicting a lottery result or the like in the prefetch. If this prediction precondition is in the low probability state, it means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and if the prediction precondition is in the high probability state, Means that the pre-reading has been performed by using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, various information (predictive preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of the jackpot lottery, prediction results of the variation pattern type) are extracted from the prefetch command as prefetch information. The prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. As described above, in the sound ramp control device 113, the prediction precondition is stored as the pre-read information together with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when using the pre-read information in the sound ramp control device 113, the prediction pre-condition in the pre-read information is determined. By referring to, it is possible to determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main controller 110, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type. Then, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. When a jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot random determination tables 202a1 and 202a2 according to the game state newly set at the end of the jackpot are used to perform the jackpot lottery.

  Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main control device 110, the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are sounded from the main control device 110 by the fanfare command. The lamp control device 113 is notified. When the fan lamp command is received, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the game state from the fan fare command, and sets the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c according to the game state. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the big hit in the main control device 110 based on the post-big hit game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. At the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the big hit type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 after the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the game state set at the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the main control device 110 newly executes the game state after the current big hit ends. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery can also be determined based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the case of using the look-ahead information, in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. It is possible to determine whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the above.

  However, since the conventional pachinko machine does not store the prediction preconditions, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching will be used. The main control device 110 cannot determine whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 of the main controller 110 coincide with each other, and in some cases, are unknown.

  In other words, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 is held a plurality of times (up to four times in the present pachinko machine 10). In the main control device 110, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a pending start winning, the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is performed. After the result is read in advance, the jackpot lottery associated with each new start prize that has been held at the time of the new start prize has been completed, and then the big jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed.

  Then, the jackpot lottery associated with each starting prize held at the time of the new starting prize is executed by the main controller 110, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 Is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new starting prize is performed in the changed gaming state. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery according to the start winning prize does not match.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in prefetching the jackpot lottery results are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning, Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning prize and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting prize do not match, it is used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery lottery result. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 no longer match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is simply performed. It was not configured to be able to determine whether or not it was obtained by use. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113, audio ramp control device 113 also determines which table 202a1, 202a2 the prediction result was obtained from. could not.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, both the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result. The main control device 110 performs the same game state. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are always stored in the main control device 110. Matches. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110. The jackpot lottery results were treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result from the pre-reading to the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unknown in which gaming state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do.

  Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. In 113, the jackpot lottery prediction result was treated as unreliable. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the audio ramp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine refrains from using the prediction result, and performs processing irrelevant to the actual jackpot lottery result (for example, Continuous announcement effects, ending effects, etc.). For this reason, the pre-reading of the jackpot effect lottery results and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery have been wasted.

  In contrast to such a conventional pachinko machine, the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, uses the jackpot random number table 202a1, The main control device 110 can determine whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat the predicted result that was treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine as being credible in the present pachinko machine 10. it can. As a result, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result becomes higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device At 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable, and the prediction result was not used. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  When this is solved by a method different from the present embodiment, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound ramp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results.

  That is, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result corresponding to each of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. It is conceivable that it is possible to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to, and to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the result.

  With such a configuration, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is used in the audio lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can be always treated as being reliable. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, as described above, when the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read in the main control device 110, they are stored in the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, as in the case of the jackpot lottery. A process of comparing the hit value with each other is performed. Therefore, every time a new start winning is generated, the process of comparing the first random number counter C1 and the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one is performed up to 33 times. It must be done repeatedly. Therefore, each time a new start prize is generated, the comparison process may take a long time every time, and the time may be wasted.

  In addition, the main controller 110 uses the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to obtain prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively. If used, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, the comparison process that may take time in main controller 110 is wasted. Further, the main control unit 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start prize is won, but the voice lamp control unit 113 uses only one prediction result, so that useless prediction results always occur. Therefore, the number of wasteful prediction results increases as compared with the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, and therefore requires a larger storage area than in the related art. Further, main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio ramp control device 113, respectively, so that data transmitted from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read in the main control device 110, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained by using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to and to notify the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as an increase in processing time and control load occur.

  Further, when solving by another method, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound ramp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main controller 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the end of the current jackpot to pre-read each of the pending start winnings. It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the prediction results obtained by the redoing, respectively.

  With this configuration, in the main control device 110, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed and before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, instead, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 is performed instead. The result can be used as trustworthy.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, the pre-reading for each pending start winning in the main controller 110 is redone, and each prediction result obtained in the redo is the main result. The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 again. Therefore, the look-ahead of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery targeted for re-execution and the prediction results are wasted.

  Therefore, useless processing is performed in main controller 110, and a control burden is imposed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives a useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also performs useless processing, and the control burden is increased. Hangs. Further, the data transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the time of the end of the current big hit to start each of the pending start winnings. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 again of the prediction results obtained by rereading the pre-reading of the Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as increased useless processing and increased control load arise.

  Further, when solving by another method, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound ramp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main control device 110 sets a jackpot random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. It is conceivable that prefetching is performed for each pending start winning using 202a1 and 202a2, and each prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 can perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the pre-reading is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot is completed. . Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the sound lamp controller 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Can be treated as Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed, so that the number of prefetching (frequency) is reduced. Then, the number of prediction results of the jackpot lottery notified from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 also decreases, so that the frequency of using the prediction results of the jackpot lottery in the audio ramp control device 113 decreases, and Opportunities to execute the notice production will be reduced. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting.

  As described above, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the main control device 110 responds to the game state at the end of the big hit only when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize, and to notify each prediction result from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. However, although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results is reduced, and there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting. Occurs.

  As described above, in the three other solutions different from the above-described embodiment, although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Another problem arises in that the processing time, useless processing, and control load increase, and that the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, in addition to the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch, Although transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, the information indicating the precondition for the pre-reading prediction is only one bit. Further, the fan control command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, at the end of the jackpot. The information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the amount of data processed in the MPUs 201 and 221 is almost the same as in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is calculated based on the result of the conventional pachinko machine that may be regarded as unreliable even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 because the prediction result may be regarded as reliable. It can be handled favorably. Therefore, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result becomes higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is appropriately handled without causing a problem such as an increase in processing time and a control load and a problem such as a useless process and an increase in a control load. In addition, it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1, and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning gaming state flag). Then, when the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern The type is pre-read in main controller 110.

  Then, when prefetching is performed in the main control device 110, if the data to be prefetched is obtained along with the start winning prize other than during the jackpot, the winning game state flag in the data is set to Based on this, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used for prefetching are determined. On the other hand, if the data to be prefetched is data that is acquired with the start winning prize during the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used for the prefetch are determined based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d. . When the prize-winning game state flag or the post-big-hit game state flag 203d is off (indicating a low-probability state), the low-probability-use big-hit random number table 202a1 is selected, and the prize-winning game state flag or When the gaming state flag 203d is ON (indicating the high probability state), the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the big hit, and when the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start winning during the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data is always off. . Therefore, when the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are determined based on the winning-state gaming state flags in the data, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is always selected. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is less likely to coincide with the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result deteriorates.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the data to be prefetched is data acquired with the start winning during the jackpot, the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 is determined. Thereby, the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result can be improved.

  That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of the jackpot, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot has already been determined. The control device 110 can determine the game state at the end of the big hit. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery held is one in the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. It is sequentially executed in main controller 110 in order.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a starting prize during a jackpot, and when performing pre-reading for the starting prize, it is better to set the prediction precondition to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than to always set the prediction precondition to the low probability state. The possibility that the prediction result of the lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110 can be improved. Therefore, the number of prediction results that can be treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be increased, and in this embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, a stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot, The big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. When the big hit effect ends, an ending effect that is a part of the big hit effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this ending effect, when the jackpot is ended and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning, whether the lottery result is a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries is notified to the player ( The fixed effect display is performed) or the player is notified that the big hit is finished (normal display is performed). Whether the “final effect display” or the “normal display” is performed in the ending effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Specifically, immediately before the ending effect is started, the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, and the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the ending mode counter are determined. Based on the value of 223f or the like, it is determined whether the display mode of the ending effect is “confirmed effect display” or “normal display”. The read-ahead information storage area 223a is provided with one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The smaller the area number, the older the starting time. The prefetch information corresponding to the winning is stored.

  When the ending effect deciding process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the sound ramp control device 113, of the reserved areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a, the reserved areas are stored in the reserved area in ascending order of area number. The pre-reading information is obtained one by one and is compared with the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c (see S1401 to S1410).

  Then, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the prediction precondition in the pre-read information matches the game state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c, as described above, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed. In this case, the main control device 110 matches the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the voice lamp controller 113 determines the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, in this case, in the process of S1407, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot.

  Then, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of place, another look-ahead information stored in the reserved area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is confirmed. Specifically, each processing of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to the process of S1411 without checking the remaining prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, A process for determining whether to set the display mode of the ending effect to “determined effect display” is executed. In other words, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and if the prediction result becomes a jackpot, the process does not return to each of the processes of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery held at the same time as the "confirmed effect display". This is because if there is at least one of the jackpot lotteries performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is not necessary to check the pre-read information, the check is not performed, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and in the process of S1406, it is determined that the prediction precondition in the prefetch information does not match the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c. In this case, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are drawn. And the main controller 110 does not match. Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information may be treated as reliable. Next, the processing in S1408 determines whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot. Is determined. Then, in the processing of S1408, if it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result can be trusted and considered to be out of range. Let it run.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap each other. You have set the hit value. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch do not match in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information in the process of S1408 is the jackpot. Then, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are not determined by the main controller 110 as to whether they match or not. Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the process of S1408, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result can be considered to be out of order. can do. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the gaming state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S1408. If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  Then, according to the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33), when the processes of S1404 to S1410 are executed, in the process of S1406, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the after-big hit If the game state indicated by the game state flag 223c is different (S1406: No), and it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of place (S1408: No), S1404 to S1410 Can be stopped there. That is, it is unclear whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result corresponding to the predicted result match, and if the predicted result cannot be trusted, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410 and the remaining processes are not performed. Do not check for prefetch information. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information cannot be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33), when it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the normal display is set as the ending effect display mode. It is configured so that: With this, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  The above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113. When the start timing is reached, it is transmitted from main controller 110. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the big hit effect is started, but is executed after waiting until just before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times). If the prefetch information is acquired from the prefetch information storage area 223a after waiting just before the start of the ending effect to be performed, four prefetch information can be acquired in most cases.

  Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is more likely that a larger amount of prefetch information can be obtained than in the case where the ending effect determination process is performed immediately after the big hit effect is started. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, and if any of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result is It is possible to increase opportunities for giving the player a sense of expectation that the game will be performed. In addition, each time a jackpot lottery is held, it is possible to increase opportunities to make the player feel delighted, and to increase opportunities for the player to increase expectation that the next hit will be a big hit. Can be enhanced.

  The above is the description of the first embodiment. As described above, in the first embodiment, as an example in which the sound lamp control device 113 can appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, in the ending effect determination process executed during the jackpot (see FIG. 33), the jackpot is determined. The example has been described in which the prediction result of the lottery is appropriately handled and the display mode of the ending effect is determined to be “determined effect display” or “normal display”.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the determination of the display mode of the ending effect, and the processing of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled as long as the process handles the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. For example, as one of the processes for handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, there is a process for a continuous announcement effect. The present invention can also be applied to the process related to the continuous announcement effect, and naturally, it is possible to appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  Next, as a second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a process related to a continuous announcement effect will be described. In the second embodiment, only the portions different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to the above-described counters 223b and 223f to 223h, and the flags 223c to 223e and 223i, a prefetch information storage area in which a part of the configuration is added compared to the first embodiment. 223a, a newly added game state flag 223j, and a newly added effect execution time game state flag 223k.

  Here, details of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment.

  The difference between the look-ahead information storage area 223a in the second embodiment and the look-ahead information storage area 223a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is that each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area has The difference is whether or not the notice execution status area 223a4 exists. As in the first embodiment, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment also stores various types of information (prefetch preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, and fluctuations) notified from the main controller 110 by a prefetch command. This is an area for storing pattern type prediction results).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the look-ahead information storage area 223a in the second embodiment includes, as in the first embodiment, one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, a continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is provided in each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area. The continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is an area for storing the continuous notice execution status. This indicates whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect in the variable effect when the variable effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, 13 types of continuous notice execution statuses are provided, and different status values are assigned to each status. Although details will be described later, there are six types of status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect, and six types of status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. In addition, there are provided 13 types of statuses, ie, one type indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed in the variable effect.

  For the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable production, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect out of the probability change jackpot, the normal jackpot, and the deviation, and the prediction that triggered the continuous announcement effect Status values of “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” are assigned so that it is possible to determine whether the result is a result. In addition, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is the type of the prediction result used for the determination when the continuous announcement effect is determined to be executed.

  The status value “1” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is the probability change jackpot, but the prediction result is not the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “2” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is usually a jackpot, and the status value “3” indicates that the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is , Which indicates that each prediction result is not a trigger for a continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, the status value “11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is the probability change jackpot, and that the prediction result is the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “12” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a normal jackpot, and the status value “13” indicates the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect. This indicates that the type is out of range, and that each prediction result is a trigger for a continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, for the status indicating that the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed in the variable production but was canceled, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement production out of the probability variable jackpot, the normal jackpot, and the miss Also, status values of "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" are assigned so that it is possible to determine whether or not the prediction result is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect.

  In the present embodiment, the status values are positive status values “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” and negative status values “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12”. , -13 ", but the status values may be distinguished by other methods. For example, if the status value is managed by 1 byte or 2 bytes, the status value may be distinguished by changing the most significant bit to 0 or 1. Specifically, when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates the above-described positive status value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the above-described negative status value. Note that other bits may be changed instead of the most significant bit. In addition, the status value may be only one of a positive status value and a negative status value, and the status values may be distinguished by assigning each status value so that each status value is different.

  The status value “−1” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect was the probability change jackpot, but the prediction result was not the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “−2” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous preview effect was a normal jackpot, and the status value “−3” indicates the prediction that triggered the continuous preview effect. Although the result indicates that it was out of order, it indicates that each prediction result was not a trigger for the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, the status value “−11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect was the probability change jackpot, and that the prediction result was the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “−12” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous preview effect was a normal jackpot, and the status value “−13” triggered the continuous preview effect. This indicates that the type of the prediction result is out of range, and that each prediction result is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect. Then, a status value of “0” is assigned to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed in the variable effect.

  Any one of these 13 types of status values is stored in the above-described continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4. As described in the first embodiment, the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area in the prefetch information storage area 223a are used in the RAM initial value setting processing (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Initialization is performed, and the inside of each of the five read-ahead information storage areas 223a is cleared to zero. That is, the status value of the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is set to “0” when the power is turned on.

  Also, the status value of the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 is determined when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command and determines to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch information extracted from the prefetch command. Be changed. As described above, the pre-read command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, and various information (pre-reading preconditions, prediction results of the jackpot lottery, prediction results of the fluctuation pattern type) are extracted from the pre-read command as pre-read information. Then, the prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area (one of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Then, a continuous announcement determination process described later (see FIG. 59) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the pre-read information newly stored in the reserved area. Here, if it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the continuous announcement effect is displayed in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 of the holding area where the prefetch information is newly stored, and the new announcement is executed in the variable effect. A status value (one of 11, 12, and 13) indicating that the prediction result of the pre-reading information is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect is set to one according to the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect. Is done.

  For example, if the prediction result of the new look-ahead information is a probability change jackpot, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the probability change jackpot becomes the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect, and as a result, the continuous announcement execution A status value “11” is set in the status storage area 223a4.

  Further, for all the reserved areas whose area numbers are smaller than the reserved area in which the prefetch information is newly stored, that is, for all the reserved areas in which the prefetch information is already stored, the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 stores the status. The value is set. Although the status value set here indicates that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect, the pre-reading information in the hold area where the status value is set is not a trigger for the continuous announcement effect. One of the indicated values (one of 1, 2, and 3) is set according to the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect.

  For example, when the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a probability change jackpot, the status value “1” is stored in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 for all the reserved areas in which the prefetch information is already stored. Is set.

  Then, the continuous notice status stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the reserved area is stored in the execution area and is referred to by the MPU 221 when the variable effect corresponding to the reserved area is started. Although the details will be described later, when the variable effect is started, if the continuous announcement execution status of the execution area is any of “1, 2, 3”, the continuous announcement is performed in the variable effect to be started. An effect is performed, and if the status value is “0”, “11, 12, 13”, or “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12, −13”, the fluctuating effect to be started. In, a notice effect is not performed, and a normal variable effect is performed.

  Further, although details will be described later, it is determined that the prediction result of the look-ahead information stored in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a cannot be trusted when the variable effect scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect is started. Then, a status value indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed but has been canceled is set in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. Specifically, a positive sign status value stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is assigned a minus sign and set to a negative sign.

  For example, when the variable effect is started, the status value in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area is “1”, and it is determined that the prediction result of the prefetch information stored in the execution area cannot be trusted. Then, the status value “−1” is set in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. As a result, even if the variable effect scheduled to execute the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect is not performed, and the normal variable effect is performed.

  In the present embodiment, in order to easily show the continuous notice execution status in the referenced drawings (FIGS. 62, 64, 66, and 68), not the status value but the presence / absence of a flag, the shape of the flag, and Indicate whether the flag is standing or falling. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, no flag is described. When the status value is a positive number, a flag is set up, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is set down. When the status value is “1”, it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, when the status value is “11”, the flag is a black triangle flag, when the status value is “2”, it is a white square flag, and when the status value is “12”, it is a black square flag. A value of “3” is a white flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square. Show.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The game state flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state (probable change), similarly to the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110. When the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, and when the gaming state flag 223j is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. Is shown.

  This game state flag 223j is set to off in the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. When the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 and the jackpot ends (that is, when the ending effect ends), the setting is made according to the jackpot type. Specifically, if the jackpot type is the probability change jackpot, the gaming state flag 223j is set to ON at the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is the probability change jackpot, the game state flag 223j is set to off at the end of the jackpot.

  Note that the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is set to off before the start of the jackpot, and is set to on or off after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. 223j is set to ON or OFF only after the end of the big hit. This is because the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to set the game state flag 223j because it does not refer to the game state flag 223j during the big hit. Note that the game state flag 223j may be set to off before the start of the big hit, similarly to the game state flag 203a.

  The gaming state flag 223j is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is credible or unreliable. If the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. If the flag 223j is off and the main controller 110 performs a jackpot lottery, the main controller At 110, it means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. Therefore, when the main controller 110 performs a jackpot lottery when the flag 223j is on, the main controller 110 Means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Then, as described above, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the pre-read information corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a in the sound lamp controller 113. You.

  In addition, as described above, the execution area and the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a include the jackpot lottery prediction result and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result. In addition, prediction preconditions for prefetching are also stored. Therefore, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area and the reserved area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type are determined. It is possible to determine whether the data is pre-read based on such a prediction precondition. That is, it is possible to determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used in the pre-reading performed by the main control device 110.

  Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the gaming state flag 223j is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, and is used in the current jackpot lottery. The main controller 110 can determine whether the large hit random number tables 202a1, 202 scheduled to be performed and the big hit random number tables 202a1, 202 used in the pre-reading of the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110.

  As a result of the comparison, when the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the predicted result of the current big hit lottery and the current lottery result of the big hit lottery match in the main control device 110, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 determines that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. On the other hand, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, the predicted result of the current jackpot lottery and the result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110. At 113, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is unreliable.

  The game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (when one target variable effect among the suspended variable effects is executed). (Probably changing).

  If the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is off, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state when one target variable effect is executed. As described above, since the variable effect is executed in accordance with the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is always performed before the variable effect. Therefore, if the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is off, the main control device 110 refers to the low-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a1 to execute the jackpot lottery when the target variable effect is executed. Means to be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect state game state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state when one target variable effect is executed. That is, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is ON, when one target variable effect is executed, the main control device 110 refers to the high probability time jackpot random number table 202a2 to execute the jackpot lottery. Means to be done.

  The game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to off in the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Further, although details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223j is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 actually used in the jackpot lottery are compared. In the case where it is determined that the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result match in the main controller 110, and that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area can be trusted. If the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set based on the predicted result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area. .

  Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, the above-described post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c is set. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the state of the gaming state flag 223j is set. Note that, in the case of setting the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution during the big hit, the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set without checking the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area. Is also good.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type. In other words, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes according to the jackpot type, the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to the game after the jackpot. The state of the state flag 223c is set, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is set. Thereby, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery.

  On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is out of order and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, the state of the gaming state flag 223j is set in the effect state gaming state flag 223k. Then, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Thereby, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery. As described above, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (that is, when the next variable effect is executed) is set to the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. You.

  The game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is credible or unreliable. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution Is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved first area can be trusted.

  Here, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 is set in the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Therefore, by comparing the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution with the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result, The audio ramp control device 113 can determine whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  If the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 can determine that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is reliable.

  Here, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the effect execution state gaming state flag 223k is set, and further, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is set. While it is determined to be reliable, the comparison is repeated in the order of the reserved second area, the reserved third area, and the reserved fourth area. In the present embodiment, among the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, data corresponding to a start winning prize that is earlier in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, In the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest start winning is stored. Therefore, the main control is performed by setting the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution while determining the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area. In the order in which the jackpot lottery is performed in the device 110, it can be determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps for executing the same processing as in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the second embodiment. In the main process, after the process of S1111 is executed and the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501). In the processing of S3501, if it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501: Yes), the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set in the game state flag 223j of the RAM 223 (S3502).

  Specifically, when the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is off and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state when the big hit ends, the gaming state flag 223j is also set to off. On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 223c is on and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 223j is also set on. In the process of S3501, if it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1112.

  Further, in the processing of S1101, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or the previous execution of the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), S1102 to S1111 , And the processing of S3501 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the start of the main processing or the processing of S1101 last time (S1101: No), S1102 to S1111 and S3501 are performed. The processing shifts to the processing of S1112 without performing the processing of.

  According to the main process shown in FIG. 58, when the ending effect ends (that is, when the big hit ends), the gaming state flag 223j is set to indicate the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit. You can set the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) in the second embodiment. This continuous announcement determination processing (S1211) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and, like the first embodiment, is read ahead. When the command is received, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect.

  In the continuous announcement determination process, in the process of S1302, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information read in the process of S1301 is “big hit” (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1312. . On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301 is “out” (S1302: No), the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the process of S1301 is “Super”. (S3601).

  In the process of S3601, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “super reach” (S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is not “super reach” and is another variation pattern type (S3601: No), the process ends.

  Further, in the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous announcement determination range and the continuous announcement effect is not started (S1316: No), the process of S3602 and thereafter is skipped. The process ends, and returns to the command determination process. That is, a continuous announcement effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous announcement determination range and the continuous announcement effect is started (S1316: Yes), among the prefetch information read out in the process of S1301 It is determined what the success or failure is in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (S3602). When the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “probably variable jackpot” (S3602: probability variable jackpot), the prediction of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a is performed. The continuous notice execution status of all the holding areas storing the results is set to "1" (S3603). In other words, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a jackpot is set.

  In addition, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “normal jackpot” (S3602: normal jackpot), the jackpot lottery in the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Is set to "2" for the continuous notice execution status of all the reserved areas in which the prediction result is stored (S3604). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a normal jackpot is set.

  In addition, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S3602: out), the prediction of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous notice execution status of all the holding areas storing the results is set to “3” (S3605). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is out of range is set.

Next, of the reserved areas of the read-ahead information storage area 223a, continuous notice of the reserved area in which the read-ahead information (that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of the pre-read) is stored last. “10” is added to the execution status (S3606)
In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the holding area where the pre-reading information is stored last. Is started, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area in which the pre-read information is stored last is triggered. Therefore, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started, by adding "10" to the continuous announcement execution status of the reserved area where the prefetch information is stored last, the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is stored. The continuous notice status of the reserved area that has been set can be set to any of "11, 12, 13". Therefore, when referring to the continuous announcement status of each reservation area, it is determined based on the status value whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the reservation area is the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect or is different. it can.

  According to the continuous announcement determination process shown in FIG. 59 described above, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started, the jackpot lottery in the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Can be set to the status value "1, 2, 3" indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect.

  Also, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started, the status value is increased by “10” for the hold area storing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery which triggered the determination, and the continuous announcement status is increased. It can be set to any of "11, 12, 13". Therefore, when referring to the continuous announcement status of each reservation area, it is determined based on the status value whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the reservation area is the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect or is different. it can.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112) in the second embodiment.

  The variable display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. In addition, in order to execute the continuous announcement effect in the variable effect, a stop type command for display is set based on the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the variable display setting process, the process of S1506 is executed to shift the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, and then the prefetch information of the prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223a by the process of S1506 is shifted. The reserved area that has become empty due to the shift is cleared (S3701). Then, the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is acquired (S3702), and the acquired continuous notice execution status indicates that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect. 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 "(S3703).

  In the process of S3703, when the acquired continuous notice execution status is the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3703: Yes), the continuous notice is executed. The notice execution status confirmation processing A is executed (S3702). Although details will be described later, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the continuous notice effect is set to be executed in the variable effect. By comparing the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is credible. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect.

  Further, in the process of S3703, when the acquired continuous notice execution status is other than the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3703: No). , Skip the processing of S3704, and proceed to the processing of S1507. Then, the process of S1509 is executed, and in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), if the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223, then the prefetch information storage area 223a Then, the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area is acquired (S3705).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect (S3706). In the process of S3706, if the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect (S3706: Yes), A chance is set as the stop type (S3707), and the flow shifts to the process of S1514.

  By the process of S3707, the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the chance eye (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, as a continuous announcement effect, when the variable effect is stopped on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol serving as a chance can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3706, if the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is other than the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3706: No), The stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S3708), and the process shifts to S1514.

  By the process of S3708, the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect, and the last time the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Is not set as the stop type. Also, a status "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect, but was canceled, or a continuous effect in the variable effect. Similarly, in the case of the status “0” indicating that the notice effect is not executed, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 60, when the stop type of the current fluctuation effect is set, the stop type is determined based on the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Can be set, or the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be set as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704).

  This continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) is executed in the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and newly changed in the third symbol display device 113. When the effect is started, it is executed if the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed in the variable effect. Then, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is reliable or not, and if it is not reliable, the continuous announcement effect is executed for the variable effect executed this time. Set to abort.

  In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A, first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S3801). Then, the prediction precondition acquired in the processing of S3801 is compared with the gaming state flag 223j (S3802). Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-read is determined by the main control command. The device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113. If the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, it means that the main controller 110 has used the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching. Means that the pre-reading has been performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information, and the main control device 110 obtains the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Can be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the pre-read information corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a in the sound lamp controller 113. You. Therefore, by referring to the prediction precondition of the prefetch information stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, in the prefetch performed in response to the jackpot lottery performed by the main controller 110, which of the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 can be used to determine whether a prediction result has been obtained.

  Further, as described above, the gaming state flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (probable change), and the gaming state flag 223j is off. The case indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. Therefore, when the main control device 110 performs the jackpot lottery, it means that the main control device 110 refers to the low-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a1 and performs the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 223j is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. This means that the jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can determine the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current big hit lottery performed by the main control device 110 based on the state of the game state flag 223j.

  Therefore, in the above-described processing of S3803, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, the jackpot random number used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is compared. The main controller 110 can compare whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery.

  Then, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), the current big hit lottery is performed. This is a case where the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the corresponding prefetch and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery match. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the current big hit lottery and the current In the main control device 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery matches. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, when the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate a different game state (S3803: No), the pre-condition is used in the pre-read corresponding to the current jackpot lottery. In this case, the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It is unclear whether they match in main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), as described above, the processing of S3801 is performed. This is a prediction result obtained in the process, in which the main controller 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed this time with the current lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, the current setting is maintained and the present process is ended so that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the current variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), as described above, The main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current lottery result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment also uses the jackpot lottery. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, as described in the first embodiment, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery may be exceptionally handled as a reliable one. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not It is determined whether it is a jackpot (S3804).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the large random number table 202a2 for high probability do not overlap. Thus, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the look-ahead information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the current jackpot lottery Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the lottery result will be out of the present jackpot lottery. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are not determined by the main controller 110 to be consistent or undetermined, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value that is a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value indicated by becomes a hit value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a big hit or a miss in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally excluded. In this case, the current setting is maintained so that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the current variable effect, and the process ends.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled. In this case, the setting is maintained so that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the current fluctuation effect, so that the opportunity to execute the continuous announcement effect can be increased.

  Also, in the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out of order (S3804: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state flag 223j are displayed. This is a case where the predicted gaming state differs from the indicated gaming state and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not.

  Therefore, in this case, a minus sign is given to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect. But change to a status indicating that it has been aborted. As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Execution can be stopped.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A shown in FIG. 61 described above, in the processing of S3803, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, The main control device 110 can compare whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Become. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110. The results of the lottery were treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223j are stored in the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is stored. It can always be determined whether or not 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, whether the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main In the present embodiment, the discrimination can be performed even in the case where the information is unknown for the pachinko machine.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same. And the predicted result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, the game state is used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot random determination. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current lottery result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment also uses the jackpot lottery. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information differs from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the current jackpot lottery are displayed. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot in the processing of S3804, the prediction result In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S3804. For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed to a variable effect. Is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed but was canceled. As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped.

  That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation change executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A described above, in the processing of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states. (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, and it is determined whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted. As a matter of course, the processing may proceed to S3805 without performing the processing in S3804.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and the fluctuation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. However, in this embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed at the end of the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. May be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the fluctuation effect is a continuous announcement effect, but a different image is displayed during the fluctuation effect, or a sound different from the normal sound is displayed. The effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A may be executed when the variable effect is started, as in the present embodiment.

  Next, an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A.

  In FIG. 62, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, a floating effect is newly executed based on the reserved starting winning, and two starting winnings are provided separately from the starting winning. This indicates that the status is suspended. In addition, in each of the variable effects that are newly performed and the variable effects corresponding to the two pending start winnings, the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a has the prefetch information The prediction result of the jackpot lottery deviates, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the data of the status value “1” is stored as the continuous announcement execution status.

  In addition, in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “1” is a continuous announcement execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the probability change jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “11” is the continuous announcement execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to easily show the continuous notice execution status in the drawings (FIGS. 62, 64, 66, and 68), the presence / absence of a flag, the shape of the flag, The flag indicates whether the flag is standing or falling. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, no flag is described. When the status value is a positive number, a flag is set up, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is set down. When the status value is “1”, it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, when the status value is “11”, the flag is a black triangle flag, when the status value is “2”, it is a white square flag, and when the status value is “12”, it is a black square flag. A value of “3” is a white flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square. Show.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction are calculated from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired jackpot lottery result is out of order. In the main control device 110, it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result matches the lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired, that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery executed this time.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the process of S3805, where a minus sign is given to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area, and as a result, the status value is changed to “−1”, and the continuous notice effect is produced in the variable effect. Was changed to a status indicating that it was scheduled to be executed but was canceled. Then, the current continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A ends.

  Then, after the current continuous announcement execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the continuous announcement execution status is displayed. Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. As a result, in the present variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  As described above, when the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect executed this time can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Then, when the current variable effect ends and the next variable effect is executed, as described above, the information is stored in each area (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A shift process is performed to shift the data that has been shifted to the execution area side. Specifically, the prefetch information in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area → the first reserved area, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-2) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are firstly executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, as in the previous case. In the processing of S3802, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, although the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot. As described above, even if the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the actual jackpot lottery indicates the lottery result. Comes off.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state. Similarly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read information does not become unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out of order. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can regard the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery as being out of order.

  As described above, in the case of the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine, it is unclear whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result treated as unreliable However, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be able to handle the result as a reliable one, and thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  Then, in this case, the flow shifts to the processing of S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the second continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A ends. Then, after the second continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is completed, in the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the second variable effect to be executed is set, the continuous notice Since the status value of the execution status is "1", the flow branches to S3706: Yes, and "chance chance" is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous announcement effect is performed in the present fluctuation effect, and a “chance eye” is displayed in the fluctuation effect.

  As described above, with the conventional audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted and the continuous announcement effect in the variable effect is stopped, the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment At 113, the setting to execute the continuous announcement effect can be maintained, and the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to execute the continuous announcement effect.

  Then, when the second variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is executed, similarly to the previous time, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area). Are shifted to the execution area side, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-3) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are firstly executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, as in the previous case. In the processing of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j match, so that the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are determined by the main controller 110. Matches. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the flow shifts to S3804: Yes processing, the current state is maintained, and the third continuous preview execution status confirmation processing A ends.

  However, the continuous announcement execution status has a status value of “11”, indicating that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a trigger for the continuous announcement effect. That is, the third variable effect is the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, after the third consecutive notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the third variation effect to be executed is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process proceeds to S3706: No. Then, the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the present variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect, and the variable effect to be executed is the last variable effect to execute the continuous announcement effect, the main control device The stop type instructed by the stop type command from 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, it is suggested to the player that the continuous announcement effect is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a continuous announcement execution status confirmation process B which is a modification of the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process B which is a modified example of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. It is set so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect is stopped. On the other hand, in the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process B, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed from the variation effect to be executed this time to the last variation effect that was to execute the continuous announcement effect. Set to abort.

  This continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B is executed in place of the continuous notice execution status A described above. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, when a new variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 113, continuous notice is given in the variable effect. It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B, the following processing is executed instead of the processing of S3805 described above. That is, in the prefetch information storage area 223a, a minus sign is given to the continuous announcement execution status of all the areas (execution area, the first to fourth areas of the suspension) in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (that is, the prefetch information) is stored. (S3901), and changes each continuous notice execution status to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled.

  As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), every time the stop type of each variable effect that was to execute the continuous announcement effect is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Can be stopped for all the variable effects that were scheduled to be executed.

  According to the continuous notice execution status B shown in FIG. 63 described above, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the processing of S3804, When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out of order and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown, not only the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also the A minus sign can also be given to the continuous notice execution status of all the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in which the prefetch information is stored.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown. That is, if it is not clear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not, the lottery results of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries will also be unknown.

  Therefore, in the continuous announcement execution status processing B, not only the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also the continuous announcement execution status stored in all the reserved areas is fluctuated. Has been changed to a status indicating that a continuous announcement effect was to be executed but was canceled. As a result, the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and every time the stop type is set for the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped in each of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after this time is unknown, a continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud, and a problem that a continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states in the processing of S3803, (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, and it is determined whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted. As a matter of course, the processing may proceed to S3901 without performing the processing in S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B, as in the case of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B is performed between the start of the variable effect and immediately before the end of the variable effect. May be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the fluctuation effect is a continuous announcement effect, but a different image is displayed during the fluctuation effect, or a sound different from the normal sound is displayed. The effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Here, referring to FIG. 64, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the continuous announcement execution status is changed by the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B.

  In FIG. 64, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the reserved starting winning, and two starting winnings are provided separately from the starting winning. This indicates that the status is suspended. In addition, in each of the variable effects that are newly performed and the variable effects corresponding to the two pending start winnings, the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is ON, and as shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a has the prefetch information The prediction result of the jackpot lottery deviates, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the data of the status value “1” is stored as the continuous announcement execution status.

  Also, in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is deviated long, the prediction precondition is low probability, and the status value “1” is set as the continuous announcement execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probable jackpot, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value "11 Is stored.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B (see FIG. 63) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction are calculated from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired jackpot lottery result is out of order. In the main control device 110, it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result matches the lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired, that is, the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the processing of S3901, and in the prefetch information storage area 223a, all the areas where the jackpot lottery prediction results (that is, the prefetch information) are stored (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area). A minus sign is attached to the continuous notice execution status of ()). As a result, the status values of the execution area and the first hold area are both changed to “−1”, and the status value of the second hold area is changed to “−11”, and the continuous announcement effect is executed in the variable effect. The status is changed to indicate that it was scheduled but was canceled. Then, the present continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B ends.

  Then, after the current continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B is completed, in the variation display setting processing (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set, the continuous announcement execution status is displayed. Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. As a result, in the present variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  Then, in both the case where the second variable effect is executed after the current variable effect is completed and the case where the third variable effect is executed, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is performed. When the stop type of each variable effect is set, the status of the continuous notice execution status is “−11”, and the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the stop specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is performed. The type is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is suspended over each variation effect from the current variation effect to the last variation effect in which the continuous announcement effect was to be executed, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  In this way, if the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the continuous announcement production is performed from the current variation production to the last variation production that was to execute the continuous announcement production. Can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modified example of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A and B described above, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in only the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C, whether the lottery results of the jackpot lottery stored in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) as well as the execution area can be trusted for all the holding areas Determine whether or not.

  Further, in the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C, if it is determined that the prediction result stored in any of the areas is unreliable, the continuous announcement production is performed from the variable effect corresponding to the prediction result determined to be unreliable. The setting is made so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is suspended over each of the variable effects up to the last variable effect that was scheduled to be executed.

  This continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is executed instead of the continuous notice execution statuses A and B described above. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, when a new variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 113, continuous notice is given in the variable effect. It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, the processing of S3801 to S3803 is executed, and in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are the same. If it indicates (S3803: Yes), it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S4001).

  Here, if it is determined as S4001: Yes, the prediction precondition acquired in the processing of S3801 matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction of the jackpot lottery acquired in the processing of S3801. Since the result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted. Furthermore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the processing of S3801 is a jackpot, after the current variable effect ends, the jackpot always becomes the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result.

  Then, as described above, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly changed according to the jackpot type. Is set to Therefore, after the jackpot that is the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type that is the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined from the jackpot type indicated by the prediction result. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the process of S4001, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S4001: Yes), the effect execution game state flag 223k of the RAM 223 is set to the pachinko machine at the end of the jackpot. A game state set to 10 is set (S4002). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set. Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S4004.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is not correct (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003. In the processing of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate a different game state (S3803: No), the pre-read information storage area 223a is stored in the pre-read information storage area 223a. It is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S3804).

  In the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally excluded. Since it can be handled as trustworthy, the processing shifts to S4003. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  In the processing of S4003, the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, that is, the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the effect execution state game state flag 223k of the RAM 223 (S4003). Specifically, when the game state flag 223j is on, the effect state game state flag 223k is also set to on, and when the game state flag 223j is off, the effect state game state flag 223k is also off. Set.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type. In other words, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off. Therefore, if the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery is out of order, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the effect state gaming state flag 223k, so that the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the next jackpot lottery is set. 202a2 can be indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S4004.

  In the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out of order (S3804: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j. This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the state. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not. Therefore, in this case, the process of S3901 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, if the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states in the processing of S3803 (S3803: No), The process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is regarded as unreliable and the process of S3804 is performed. May be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  In the process of S4004, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is obtained (S4004), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005). . In the process of S4005, if the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b is 0 (S4005: No), the main controller 110 finishes this process because no jackpot lottery has been suspended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005: Yes), it means that one or more jackpot lotteries are suspended in the main control device 110. The prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are confirmed one by one from the held jackpot lottery in the order of the held jackpot lottery. Specifically, among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the reserved area having the smaller area number. Check one by one. It should be noted that data corresponding to a start winning a prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number in time.

  First, the variable i is set to 1 (S4006), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S4007). Then, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserved i-th area is compared with the game state indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k (S4008). As a result of the comparison, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the same game state (S4009).

  Here, by the processing of S4002 or the processing of S4003, the state of the flag 223k is changed so that the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery. Is set. Specifically, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is off, the main control device 110 refers to the low-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a1 to indicate that the next jackpot lottery will be performed. On the other hand, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is on, the main control device 110 refers to the high probability time jackpot random number table 202a2 to indicate that the next jackpot lottery will be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the data corresponding to the earlier start winning prize is stored as the area number is smaller as the area number is smaller. Therefore, at this point, the prefetch information corresponding to the next jackpot lottery is stored in the reserved first area.

  Therefore, in the process of S4007 described above, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the game state indicated by the effect state game state flag 223k, so that the game state is used in the prefetch corresponding to the next jackpot lottery. The main controller 110 can compare whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next jackpot lottery.

  Then, in the process of S4009, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the next time This is a case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the next In the main control device 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery matches. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the next big hit lottery as reliable.

  Therefore, in the processing of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the jackpot lottery Then, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4010).

  In the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4010: Yes), the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. The game state to be set is set (S4011). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set. Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Then, control goes to a step S4014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is not correct (S4010: No), the process of S4011 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4014. As described above, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 does not change the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, so that the jackpot to be used in the jackpot lottery The random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not change. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of order, by maintaining the state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are updated. It can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  In the case of S4010: No, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, may be set in the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Specifically, when the game state flag 223j is on, the effect state game state flag 223k is also set to on, and when the game state flag 223j is off, the effect state game state flag 223k is also off. Set.

  Then, in the processing of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k indicate different gaming states (S4009: No), as described above. The main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next jackpot lottery. .

  Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the next big hit lottery and the lottery result of the next big hit lottery match in the main control device 110. In this case, even in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the big hit is determined. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be exceptionally treated as being credible. Therefore, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4012). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the large random number table 202a2 for high probability do not overlap. Thus, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the look-ahead information is different from the game state indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next jackpot lottery, Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 that are scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery do not match in the main control device 110, if the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the lottery result will be It will be off. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value that is a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value indicated by becomes a hit value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a big hit or a miss in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S4012, when the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4012: Yes), as described above, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally out of order and can be trusted. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4014. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled. In that case, as will be described later, the process returns to step S4014, and the repetition process of steps S4007 to S4015 can be continuously performed. If an unreliable one of the jackpot lottery prediction results is found, By the processing of S4013 to be described later, the continuous notice effect can be stopped from the variable effect to the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the processing of S4014, 1 is added to the variable i (S4014), and it is determined whether or not the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015). In the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b (S4015: Yes), the prefetch information is also stored in another reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Since this is the case, the process returns to S4007, and the prefetch information stored in another reserved area is confirmed. After returning to the process of S4007, the processes of S4007 to S4015 described above are repeated, and the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in another reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area). Is compared with the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the reserved ball count counter 223b (S4015: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is deleted. This is the case when all are confirmed. In this case, there is no more pre-reading information to be confirmed, so this processing ends.

  Further, in the processing of S4012, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out of order (S4012: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state flag 223k for effect execution are indicated. This is a case where the predicted state of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state, and the prediction result is out of order. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unknown whether the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is a jackpot or a loss.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to each of the processes of S4007 to S4015, and shifts to the process of S4013. In the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the reserved i-th area is stored. A minus sign is given to the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the area to the reserved M-th area (S4013), and the process ends.

  That is, in the process of S4013, the continuous announcement execution status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect is changed to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. . As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process branches to S3706: No every time the variable effect stop type corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area is set. Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped over each variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area.

  In other words, if an unreliable thing is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, from the variable production corresponding to the prediction result to the last variable production that was to execute the continuous announcement production, You can cancel the continuous announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Also, as described above, in the continuous run execution status confirmation processing C, if it is not clear whether the actual jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot or a loss, it will not return to the processing of S4007 to S4015, and the remaining It is configured not to check the pre-read information. This is because when one of the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery is checked one by one from the jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in the order of the reserved lottery, the prediction result becomes one of the prediction results. If it becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  And since the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result becomes unknown. . Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C shown in FIG. 65, in the processing of S4008, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is compared with the game state indicated by the effect execution state game state flag 223k. The main controller 110 compares whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries match. it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery results of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are different in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the lottery of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries Since there is a possibility that the result is different from the result, the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats not only the current time but also the predicted result of the next big hit lottery as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries are controlled by the main control. In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the device 110.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k, the prefetch corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In this case, the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, the prediction result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery are unknown in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th one cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery. Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery in the i-th jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information does not match in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different in the processing of S4012. If not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery is also unknown.

  Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the status, and the continuous announcement execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed in the variable production but was canceled.

  As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the present embodiment, if the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states in the processing of S3803 (S3803: No), The process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is regarded as unreliable and the process of S3804 is performed. May be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  Also, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, in the processing of S4009, a game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and a game state indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k are different. In this case (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, but in the case of S4009: No, the jackpot lottery The prediction result may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S4013 without performing the process in S4012.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and the fluctuation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed at the end of the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. May be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the fluctuation effect is a continuous announcement effect, but a different image is displayed during the fluctuation effect, or a sound different from the normal sound is displayed. The effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C may be executed when the variable effect is started, as in the present embodiment.

  Further, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is executed when the variable effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, but is executed during the big hit instead of when the variable effect is started. You may comprise so that it may be. By configuring so as to be executed during the big hit, the number of times of execution of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, of the repeated processing of S4007 to S4015, the processing of S4010 is used to check whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the i-th area is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the repetitive processing may be interrupted there.

  Here, referring to FIG. 66, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C.

  In FIG. 66, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, a floating effect is newly executed based on the reserved starting winning, and three starting winnings are provided separately from the starting winning. This indicates that the status is suspended. In addition, in each of the variable effects that are newly performed and the variable effects corresponding to the three pending start winnings, the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a has prefetch information as The prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the data of status value “3” is stored as the continuous announcement execution status.

  In addition, in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probable change jackpot, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the status value “3” is a continuous notice execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, and the status value “3” is set as the continuous announcement execution status. Is stored. In the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, and the status value “13” is set as the continuous announcement execution status. Is stored.

  When the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C (see FIG. 65) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Are acquired, and in the processing of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j match, so that the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are determined by the main controller 110. Matches. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4001 is executed, the process branches to S4001: No, and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, that is, the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 Is set.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out. Therefore, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to the game state flag at the time of effect execution 223k, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are indicated by the game state flag at the time of effect execution 223k. Can be.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the processing of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution match, so that the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined by the main control. In device 110 they match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process branches to S4009: Yes, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the probability change jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and the game state at the time of the end of the jackpot, ie, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the probability change jackpot, is set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Is set. Specifically, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are obtained from the reserved second area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the process of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the effect state gaming state flag 223k, and the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result is out of order. It is unclear whether the predicted result matches the actual jackpot lottery result in main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4013, in which the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved second area to the reserved third area in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is indicated by a minus sign. Then, the continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. Specifically, the status value of the reserved second area is changed to “−3”, and the status value of the reserved third area is changed to “−13”. Is changed to a status indicating that Then, the present continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C ends.

  Then, after the current continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C is completed, in the variation display setting processing (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set, the status of the continuous announcement status is set. Since the value is "3", the flow branches to S3706: Yes, and "chance eyes" is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous announcement effect is performed in the present fluctuation effect, and a “chance eye” is displayed in the fluctuation effect.

  Then, even when the stop type of the variable effect executed for the second time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “3”, so the process branches to S3706: Yes, and the variation in the third symbol display device 81. “Chance eyes” is set as the effect stop type. As a result, a continuous announcement effect is performed in the present fluctuation effect, and a “chance eye” is displayed in the fluctuation effect.

  However, when the stop type of the variable effect executed for the third time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−3”, so the process branches to S3706: No, and the main control device 110 stops. The stop type specified by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the third variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  When the stop type of the variable effect performed for the fourth time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−13”, so the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop from the main control device 110 is performed. The stop type specified by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the fourth variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  In this way, when an unreliable thing is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the variable production corresponding to the prediction result to the last variable production scheduled to execute the continuous announcement production is performed in each variable production. You can cancel the continuous announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a continuous announcement execution status confirmation process D which is a modification of the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process D which is a modified example of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C has been executed when the variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. However, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D is performed as described above. It is executed when it is determined in the determination process (see FIG. 59) that a continuous announcement effect is to be performed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D, processing similar to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is performed. The difference from the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is that steps S4004 and S4005 are not provided, and steps S4101 to S4104 are added.

  In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S4101). If the big hit is not being made (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S3801 and the processing of S3801 to S3804 is performed. The processing, the processing of S3901, and the processing of S4001 to S4003 are executed. Then, when the processing of S4002 or the processing of S4003 is completed, the processing shifts to the processing of S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if the jackpot is during the big hit (S4101: Yes), the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the gaming state indicated by the after-big hit gaming state flag 223c, that is, the pachinko machine at the time when the current big hit is ended. Ten game states are set (S4102). The process moves to S4006. In the process of S4102, specifically, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is on, the effect state gaming state flag 223k is also set to on, and if the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is off, The game state flag 223k is also set to off.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the post-big hit game state flag 223c. Therefore, after the current big hit is completed, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c. Therefore, by setting the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c in the rendering execution gaming state flag 223k, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the rendering execution gaming state flag 223k. Can be shown.

  Then, the processing of S4006 to S4015 is executed, and in the processing of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), or when the processing of S4013 ends Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103). In the process of S4103, if the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: Yes), the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed There are few, and the continuous announcement performance does not last long. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the continuous announcement effect does not last for a long time, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped. Thus, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term sense of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Specifically, in the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103: Yes), the correct one of the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is assigned to all the continuous announcement execution statuses (S4104), and the process ends. That is, in the process of S4104, the continuous announcement execution status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect is changed to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. .

  As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the variable effect corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped over each variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area. As a result, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, if the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped, and this process ends.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D shown in FIG. 67, when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination processing (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the execution area It can be determined whether the prefetch information stored in the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) is reliable. Then, when an unreliable one of the prefetch information is found, a continuous production is performed from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prefetch information to the last fluctuation production in which the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed. You can cancel the notice production.

  Further, when the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is 2 or less, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is small. Then, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term feeling of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player. In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D, if the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, but the number is not limited to 2 and may be set arbitrarily. .

  In the present embodiment, when the above-described continuous advance execution status confirmation processing D is determined to be performed in the above-described continuous advance determination processing (see FIG. 59), the above-described continuous advance execution status confirmation processing is performed. Similar to A, B, and C, the third symbol display device 81 may be executed when a variable effect is started. Further, it may be executed any time during the period from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. It may be performed during the fluctuation effect, during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation, or during the big hit.

  Here, referring to FIG. 68, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the continuous announcement execution status is changed by the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D.

  FIG. 68 shows a state in which four start winnings are suspended when the gaming state is in the low-probability state because the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability of a big hit. In addition, a state in which a continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed for each of the variable effects corresponding to the four start winning prizes on hold is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and the post-big hit game state flag 223c is on. As shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, as the look-ahead information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the probability change jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, and the prediction precondition. Is a low probability state, and data of a status value “0” is stored as a continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the pre-read information in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value is “2” as a continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “2” is a continuous announcement execution status. Is stored.

  In the reserved third area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value is “2” as the continuous announcement execution status. Data is stored. In the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value "12 Is stored.

  When the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D (see FIG. 67) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), first, in the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not a big hit is present. Here, since it is during the probability change big hit, the process branches to S4101: Yes, and the state of the post-big hit game state 223c is set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. More specifically, since the current jackpot type is the probability change jackpot, the post-jackpot gaming state 223c is set to ON, and similarly to the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. You.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the processing of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution match, so that the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined by the main control. In device 110 they match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the big hit lottery is out of order, the process branches to S4010: No, and the state of the effect execution state gaming state flag 223k is maintained as it is. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off, the state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is maintained, so that the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are displayed. It can be indicated by the gaming state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are obtained from the reserved second area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the process of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution match, so that the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined by the main control. In device 110 they match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and the game state at the time of the end of the jackpot, that is, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the normal jackpot is set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Is set. Specifically, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to off. As a result, the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the second jackpot lottery.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and in the process of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are obtained. Is compared with However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the effect state gaming state flag 223k, and the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result is out of order. It is unclear whether the predicted result matches the actual jackpot lottery result in main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4013, in which the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is indicated by a minus sign. Then, the continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. More specifically, the status value of the reserved third area is changed to “−2”, and the status value of the reserved fourth area is changed to “−12”. Is changed to a status indicating that

  Here, the continuous notice execution status, which is a positive number, among the consecutive notice execution statuses stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, is stored in the reserved first area and the reserved second area. There are two. Therefore, in the process of S4103, the process branches to S4103: Yes, and the minus notice is also given to the continuous notice execution status stored in the first reserved area and the second reserved area.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-2), the status values of the first to third areas are changed to "-2", and the status values of the fourth area are changed to "-12". Thus, the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect is all changed to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been cancelled. Then, the present continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D ends.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D is completed, that is, after the currently-determined large-variable jackpot is completed, the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 60) is executed up to the first to fourth times. Every time the stop type of the variable effect is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−2” or “−12”, so the process branches to S3706: No, and is instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110. The performed stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, in each of the first to fourth variable effects, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed. That is, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed is two or less, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the continuous announcement effect is set. Is performed a small number of times, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term feeling of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  The above is the description of the second embodiment. As described above, in the second embodiment, as an example in which the predicted result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled in the audio lamp control device 113, in the process regarding the continuous announcement effect, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is appropriately handled, The example of executing the continuous announcement effect has been described.

  That is, according to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A to D (see FIGS. 61, 63, 65, and 66), in the processing of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state By comparing the gaming state indicated by the flag 223j, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery are obtained. , Can be compared in main controller 110.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Become. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110. The results of the lottery were treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223j are stored in the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is stored. It can always be determined whether or not 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unclear whether to perform the determination.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same. And the predicted result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, the game state is used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot random determination. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current lottery result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment also uses the jackpot lottery. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information differs from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the current jackpot lottery are displayed. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot in the processing of S3804, the prediction result In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S3804. For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A processing, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed. The status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the effect, but was canceled. As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped. That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation change executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  On the other hand, in such a case, in the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B, C, and D, not only the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also all the reserved areas. The continuous notice execution status is also changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. As a result, the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and every time the stop type is set for the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped in each of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after this time is unknown, a continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud, and a problem that a continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), in the processing of S4008, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are determined. By comparing the gaming state with the indicated gaming state, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries are controlled by the main control. The device 110 can compare for a match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery results of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are different in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the lottery of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries Since there is a possibility that the result is different from the result, the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats not only the current time but also the predicted result of the next big hit lottery as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries are controlled by the main control. In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the device 110.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k, the prefetch corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In this case, the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, the prediction result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery are unknown in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th one cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery. Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery in the i-th jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information does not match in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different in the processing of S4012. If not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery is also unknown.

  Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the status, and the continuous announcement execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed in the variable production but was canceled.

  As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  According to the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), when it is determined in the above-described continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is determined. Alternatively, it can be determined whether the prefetch information stored in the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) is reliable. Then, when an unreliable one of the prefetch information is found, a continuous production is performed from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prefetch information to the last fluctuation production in which the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed. You can cancel the notice production.

  Further, when the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is 2 or less, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is small. Then, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term feeling of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  It should be noted that the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims, and the "chance chance" described in the above embodiment is "indicative information" described in the claims. Corresponding to The “high-probability state or high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “an example of a plurality of lottery conditions” described in the claims. The probability state or the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 "corresponds to" an example of a plurality of lottery conditions "described in the claims. Further, the “bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “judgment result information” described in the claims, and the “prefetch command” described in the embodiment. The bit value indicating the prediction precondition included in the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the “judgment information” described in the claims, and is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit included in the fanfare command described in the embodiment. The "bit value indicating the game state" corresponds to "condition information" described in the claims.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the variable effect is a continuous announcement effect, but during the variable effect, a different image is displayed or a different sound is displayed. The effect of emitting a sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. According to this configuration, the stop type of each variable effect for executing the continuous announcement effect does not need to be changed to the “chance eye”, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is. it can. In addition, since the continuous announcement effect can also be performed in the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is executed, the number of times of the continuous announcement effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for giving the player a sense of expectation that the game state will be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, when performing a continuous announcement effect over a plurality of variable effects, the effect contents may be changed for each variable effect, or the effect contents may be changed only for a part of the variable effects. In addition, if the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement production is a jackpot and the prediction result is reliable, the continuous announcement indicating the jackpot determination with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability). You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. When the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, and D may be executed when the variable effect is started, as in the present embodiment.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61), in the processing of S3803, a game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and a game state indicated by the game state flag 223j are different. If (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. The prediction result may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S3805 without performing the process in S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B, C, and D (see FIGS. 63, 65, and 67), in the processing of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state flag 223j are set. If the indicated gaming state indicates a different gaming state (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. : In the case of No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S3901 without performing the process of S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C (see FIGS. 61, 63, and 656), the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, This is executed when the variable effect is started in the three symbol display device 81. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed at the end of the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. , B and C may be executed at any time. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67) described above, in the processing of S4009, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are determined. If the state indicates a gaming state different from the state (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot. : In the case of No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), among the repetition processing of S4007 to S4015, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a large jackpot due to the processing of S4010. Although it is confirmed that there is a jackpot lottery prediction result in the reserved i-th area, if the jackpot lottery prediction result is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is regarded as unreliable and the processing may be repeatedly interrupted there. good.

  In addition, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C (see FIG. 65) is executed when the variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, but instead of when the variable effect is started, a big hit is performed. It may be configured to be executed during execution. By configuring so as to be executed during the big hit, the number of times of execution of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C can be suppressed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D (see FIG. 67), if the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is two or less, the continuous notice effect itself is stopped, but the number is not limited to two. May be set arbitrarily.

  Also, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, and D (see FIGS. 61, 63, 65, and 67), if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the prediction result corresponding to the unreliable prediction result is handled. Is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, the continuous announcement effect will be executed in the variable effect not only for the unreliable prediction result but also for the continuous announcement execution status corresponding to the reliable estimation result. However, the status may be changed to a status indicating that the cancellation has been made.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D (see FIG. 67) is executed when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination processing (see FIG. 59) that a continuous notice effect is to be executed. The apparatus 81 may be configured to be executed when a variable effect is started. Further, it may be executed any time during the period from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may be performed during a big hit. By configuring so as to be executed during the big hit, the number of times of the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, when it is determined in the above-described continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a is determined. ), The continuous announcement execution status of each holding area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored is changed to the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 12,” indicating that the continuous announcement production is once executed in the variable production. 13 ". Then, after that, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, D is to execute the continuous notice effect in the variable effect based on the continuous notice execution status of each holding area storing the unreliable prediction result. However, the status has been changed to "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that the operation has been stopped. On the other hand, in the above-described continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 59), among the respective reserved areas in which the predicted results of the jackpot lottery are stored, only the reserved areas in which the reliable predicted results are stored are changed. May be configured to set a status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" indicating that a continuous announcement effect is to be executed.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment, a game state flag 223j configured similarly to the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is provided. As described above, in the main control device 110, when the gaming state flag 203a is off and the prefetching of the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is referred to. Read ahead. On the other hand, if the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read by referring to the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Then, when the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, immediately, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a pre-read command. Therefore, when the pre-read command is received in the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are used by referring to the state of the game state flag 223j configured similarly to the game state flag 203a. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not pre-reading has been performed in main controller 110, and it is possible to determine a precondition for prediction. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the prefetch information storage area 223a, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is included therein. You do not need to include it. As described above, in the main control device 110, when the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery is performed during the jackpot, based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d indicating the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the low-probability jackpot. It is determined whether to refer to the random number table 202a1 or the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Then, the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with a post-big hit game state flag 223c configured similarly to the post-big hit game state flag 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, when the pre-reading command is received during the jackpot, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the state of the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c configured in the same manner as the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d to determine which of the following. Using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, it is possible to determine whether the main controller 110 has performed prefetching during a jackpot. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is included in the notification. You don't have to. That is, with such a configuration, the conventional main control device 110 can be used as it is. Therefore, the development cost of the gaming machine and the burden on the designer can be reduced.

  In the variation process (see FIG. 21) of the above embodiment, the start of the big hit is set in the process of S314, and the big hit flag 203e is subsequently turned on in the process of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, S901: Yes (see FIG. 27). Branch. Therefore, in the big hit control process, when branching to S901: Yes, the big hit flag 203e may be set to ON. In other words, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON before the start of the jackpot, any process may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d (S410 and S411 in FIG. 22) is set in the change start process (see FIG. 22). In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) described later, the process of S902 is executed, and is referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, the timing may be set at any timing before the processing of S902 is performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the big hit prize flag 203g is provided. However, when the main control device 110 executes each process in the single task system, the big hit prize flag 203g may not be provided. When the big hit prize flag 203g is not provided, the big hit prize flag 203e is referred to instead of the big hit prize flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data obtained with the start winning is obtained with the big win.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning game state flag is provided, but when the main control device 110 executes each process in a single task system, the winning game state flag may not be provided. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the game state flag at the time of winning. As described above, the prize-winning game state flag is a flag indicating the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the start winning prize. When a ball starts to win in the first ball opening 64, each of the counters C1 to C1 is started at the timing of winning. The values of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are obtained. Then, the gaming state flag 203a obtained here is set as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start prize is a high probability state, and if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko machine at the time of the start prize is provided. This indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in the low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetch processing. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the gaming state 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described starting winning processing (see FIG. 20), so that the load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the game state at the time of prize winning storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, for a player who wins during a big hit, the game state at the end of the big hit is pre-read as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is improved. Have improved. As described above, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, so that after the determination, the game state at the end of the jackpot can be prefetched as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning prize during the jackpot, in addition to the winning prize from the determination of the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery to the start of the jackpot, the game state at the end of the jackpot is to be read as a precondition for prediction. It may be performed. Thereby, the chance that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result coincide with each other in the main control device 110 can be increased. Therefore, the number of prediction results treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be further increased, so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In addition, in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above-described embodiment, the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is provided. Need not be provided. When the big hit prize flag 203g is not provided, the big hit prize flag 203e is referred to instead of the big hit prize flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data obtained with the start winning is obtained with the big win.

  In the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above-described embodiment, a prize-winning game state flag is provided. However, when each process is executed by the main controller 110 in a single task system, a prize-winning game state flag is set. Need not be provided. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the game state flag at the time of winning. As described above, the prize-winning game state flag is a flag indicating the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the start winning prize. When a ball starts to win in the first ball opening 64, each of the counters C1 to C1 is started at the timing of winning. The values of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are obtained. The gaming state flag 203a obtained here is used as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start prize is a high probability state, and if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko machine at the time of the start prize is provided. This indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in the low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetch processing. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the gaming state 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described starting winning processing (see FIG. 20), so that the load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the game state at the time of prize winning storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command. In this case, the main control unit 110 notifies the audio ramp control unit 113 whether the current jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command. The main controller 110 notifies the audio ramp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, and an ending command. You may. That is, the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and further determines the type of the jackpot, and then determines whether the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by audio lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided. The game state may be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command need not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, in the case of receiving the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment extracts the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command. Then, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the main controller 110 determines whether the current jackpot is a variable jackpot or a regular jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, if the stop type command indicates the big hit type, the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. May be. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is not always necessary to include information indicating a game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  The ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) of the above embodiment is configured to be executed when an ending command transmitted from main controller 110 is received. Is a process for determining the display mode, so that it is sufficient that the process is executed and ended before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed at any time as long as the process ends after the fanfare command transmitted from main controller 110 is received and before the ending effect is started.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the information indicating the prediction precondition is further included in the prefetch command. However, the information included in the pre-read command is not limited to the information indicating the prediction precondition, and the audio lamp control device 113 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 has used the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Any information may be used as long as it is information. For example, information indicating which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is obtained may be included in the prefetch command.

  In the above-described embodiment, the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect has been described as an example in which the voice lamp control device 113 can appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. If it is a process to be used, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled, similarly to the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect. For example, even when the display mode of the continuous announcement effect is set, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the fanfare command includes information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, other commands may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, including information indicating the skill state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. For example, the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the round number command or the ending command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the ending effect determination processing is executed in the sound ramp control device 113. The ending effect determination process may be executed at any time as long as it is in the middle and before the ending effect is performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits the fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113 in the fanfare command, including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state at the end of the big hit from the received fanfare command. On the other hand, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of the big hit) extracted from the stop type command. You may. That is, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a probable jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined to be a high probability state, and the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is determined. Is a normal jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a low probability state. In this case, the main control device 110 does not need to include, in the fanfare command, information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, so that the main control device 110 is not required. It is possible to reduce the control burden of the 110.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits the prefetch command to the sound ramp control device 113 including the prefetch prediction precondition in the prefetch command. It may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by being included in the hold number command. In this case, after the pre-reading is completed, a configuration is made such that the hold number command is generated.

  In the ending effect determination process of the above-described embodiment, the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of the stored order, and the prerequisite precondition for the prefetch information is obtained. Is compared with the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c, and when the same game state is indicated, it is checked whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is a big hit, First, it is checked whether there is any pre-reading information stored in the reserved area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. When there is, the prediction precondition of the pre-reading information may be compared with the game state indicated by the post-big-hit game state flag 223c. .

  In the ending effect determination process of the above-described embodiment, while prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of storage order, the preconditions for predicting the prefetch information and , Comparing the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot with the gaming state indicated by the flag 223c, and displaying the ending effect if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the look-ahead information indicates the jackpot if the same gaming state is indicated. It is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as an aspect. On the other hand, while acquiring the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a one by one irrespective of the order in which the prefetch information is stored, the prediction precondition of the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223c after the jackpot. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the look-ahead information indicates a jackpot when the same gaming state is indicated, "determined effect display" is displayed as the display mode of the ending effect. May be determined. As described above, when the prediction precondition of the look-ahead information matches the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the prediction result corresponding to the prediction precondition is the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Likely to match. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress disappointment of the player by giving the player a useless expectation, and it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the main control device 110 of the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading for the starting winning is performed, the information indicating the precondition for the pre-reading, the information indicating the predicted result of the jackpot lottery, and the predicted result of the variation pattern type Is included in the pre-read command, and the pre-read command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the pre-read command is not transmitted, and the information indicating the precondition of the pre-read prediction and the jackpot lottery The information indicating the prediction result and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type may be included in the pending ball count command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the reserved ball count command includes both the reserved ball count and the prediction result of pre-reading (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern type). Therefore, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, the correspondence between the reserved ball count and the prediction result of the prefetching becomes clear. That is, the correspondence between the number of reserved balls and the prediction result of the pre-reading is always accurate without paying attention to the timing of receiving the command and the timing of obtaining the number of reserved balls and the predicted result of the pre-reading from the RAM. And the like can be executed accurately. In addition, when the prefetching for the start winning is performed, a part of the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is partially replaced. It may be included in the pre-read command and the remainder may be included in the reserved ball count command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information indicates the jackpot. In this case, it is configured such that “determined effect display” is set as the display mode of the ending effect with a probability of 1/3, but the probability of setting the determined effect display may be determined as appropriate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation symbol command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. , A fluctuation effect according to the fluctuation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when the execution time of the fluctuation effect comes to an end, the stop symbol of the stop type corresponding to the stop type command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing the stop display of the stop symbol is newly provided. It may be configured so that the fluctuation effect is continued even after the end.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the prefetching for the start winning is performed in the main control device 110, but the prefetching for the starting winning may be performed in the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, when the main control device 110 detects a winning start, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 and the pachinko machine at the time of winning are determined. The gaming state of the machine 10 (if a jackpot is in progress, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot) is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the sound ramp control device 113, the large-hit-value jackpot random number table 202a2, the low-probability-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in advance. Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the sound lamp control device ROM 222. The prefetching process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main controller 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that the audio lamp controller 113 can execute it. With this configuration, when a pre-read command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts various counter values from the pre-read command and performs a jackpot lottery. You can look ahead the results. As a result, the main control device 110 does not need to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, so that the control load on the main control device 110 can be further reduced, and the transition should be made based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. It is possible to concentrate on a lottery process for selecting a gaming state. However, since there is a possibility that an important random number value such as a jackpot random value may be found illegally, it is necessary to include the lottery result (whether or not), the stop type, and the variation pattern in the pre-read command and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the result. Is preferred. For example, it is possible to prevent a signal output from the main control device 110 from being illegally stolen and analyzing each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Further, it is possible to prevent an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is to be analyzed from a signal output from the main control device 110 from being analyzed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect (the continuous announcement determination process in FIG. 32), and determines the display mode of the ending effect (FIG. 33). Ending setting process), the display control device 114 may execute these processes. In this case, a program for executing each process so that the continuous announcement determination process shown in FIG. 32 and the ending setting process shown in FIG. 33 can be executed by the display control device 114, and the continuous announcement determination table 222a It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). Also, in the work RAM 233, the above-mentioned pre-reading information storage area 223a, the number of retained balls counter 223b, the after-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the ending mode counter 223f, the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g, the continuous announcement number counter 223h, the after-announcement big hit flag 223i, and the like. Are provided in advance. Then, when receiving the prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the prefetch command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect (the continuous announcement determination process of FIG. 32). Further, when receiving the ending command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114 as it is. Upon receiving the ending command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining the display mode of the ending effect (the ending setting process of FIG. 33).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above-described embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Accordingly, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, a process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  The process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Also, since the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify the address set in the common address system. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is by the NAND flash memory 234a. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage unit such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but by using the configuration described in the above embodiment of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored as part of the boot program to be executed. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory constituted by a nonvolatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a may be stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", it reads out the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address from the buffer RAM 234c, and reads the data from the buffer RAM 234c. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the setting is in progress, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects the address. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The area may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored at least for the resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 may be used. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer data). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, the image data can be prevented from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 needlessly, and the time required to recover from the power failure can be reduced. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. Note that the RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned, the buffer is scanned. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a are stored in the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. A case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Also, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super-reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 47). The warning image setting process (refer to FIG. 48) may be executed when it is determined that the warning symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display control device 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Thereby, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image of the frame is displayed is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information specified by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, the various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed and drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing an image in accordance with the drawing content defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing data corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player is defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. In addition, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be specified. In comparison with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “variation start-up”, “high-speed fluctuation”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display contents and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f in the display data table and the transfer data table. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the drawing process is completed (every 20 ms in the above embodiment). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed such that the image of one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image of one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is expanded May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 sends the finalized display effect through the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d. Further, in this case, until one of the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first stores the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. Transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the display contents are defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233j. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in a part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the sprite type required in the table, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a rear image. It may move or change.

  In the embodiment described above, the case where the continuous announcement effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, even if the continuous announcement effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory in the pachinko machine 10 that operates according to various effects, and operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. In addition, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  Thus, each time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode. By playing the sound, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illuminations 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player usually continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, but the display of symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since the continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, an unusual effect is performed on the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if a continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 performs the lottery process at the time of the start / stop judgment and the variation start, the continuous announcement effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation control is performed by the display control device 114. When performing a notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33) , Or a combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous announcement production modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous announcement production (15R probable big hit, 2R probable big hit, time saving big hit, departure) are prepared. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, an image for a continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the continuous announcement effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and the other stop symbol determination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination processing, the continuous notice command processing is executed after the stop identification command processing. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, the chance is set as the stop symbol, so the fluctuation stop. Occasionally, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eyes. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays a chance symbol as a stop symbol for each variable effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to finally obtain a big hit.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous announcement effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the continuous announcement effect execution decision and the continuous announcement effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. Is also good. Thus, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started before the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type is used in the continuous preview effect, the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub-area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data used in the continuous preview effect can be prevented from being overwritten by other image data, and the image data corresponding to the desired continuous preview image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous announcement effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  In addition, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous announcement effect. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous preview effect is the last display. Therefore, while the continuous preview effect is being performed, the display control device 114 is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous preview effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the information on the execution of the continuous preview effect and the continuous preview image type is included in the display variation pattern command, a display data table that does not correspond to the continuous preview image for each variation pattern, A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 stores the corresponding display data table in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type in the display data table buffer. 233d. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous preview effect corresponding to the continuous preview image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. Thus, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, so that an increase in the number of data tables can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out completely) determined by the main control device 110. Although the case of setting by 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuating effect that has been held is not changed. If it is not a jackpot, the stop symbol of the last variable effect may be replaced with the stop symbol in the front-rear reach mode instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 and set. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is not a stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 but always reaches the front and rear, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, when performing a continuous announcement effect together with all of the suspended variable effects, each variable effect is performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each change. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the variable effect other than the last variable effect that has been suspended is changed to the variable effect. Then, the process of generating a display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1504 in FIG. 38) allows the variation pattern to be changed according to the setting state of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect. You may. When the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is displayed as it is based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control device 110. You may. Here, even if the continuous announcement effect is performed continuously, if a situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result despite the corresponding variable effect mode being, for example, a super-reach variable effect, the player's expectation May be retreated, but the continuous notice effect is performed continuously, and the variable effects other than the last performed variable effect are continuously performed in the variable effect, so that the final effect is performed last. It is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation for the variable performance.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where the continuous announcement effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the player has pressed the frame button 22 in a situation where the execution of the effect has been determined, a continuous announcement effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the pattern is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entry port 64 for starting a jackpot lottery when a ball is entered is provided in the game board 13; however, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrance ports from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, the reserved ball number command transmitted from main control device 110 to voice lamp control device 113 when a reservation is made at each first entrance indicates which one of the first entrances is being retained. Information may be included. Also, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when starting the fluctuation may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the fluctuation effect held by the first entrance. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each of the first entrance ports, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the number of retained balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by one, and the first entrance is obtained. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous announcement effect when receiving the reserved number-of-balls command. A continuous announcement effect may be executed over a variable effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. In addition, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and in a pachinko machine that preferentially executes a variable effect held at one first entrance, the variable effect is preferentially executed. Only when the ball is entered in the first entrance, the start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined. As a result, the continuous announcement effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, so the continuous announcement effect is provided for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority. Is started, and when the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the continuous announcement effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is sent to the main controller 110. Has been described above, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the number-of-retained-balls counter 203c in the main control device 110 increases, the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-remaining-balls command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp controller 113 receives the number-of-remaining-ball command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden on the 110 and the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the sound lamp control device 113 when the pre-read command is received, the continuous announcement effect is executed for all the variable effects suspended at that time. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each individual variable effect. As a result, a continuous announcement effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous announcement effect, and perform an effect that does not tire the player. Can be. In this case, the counter is updated each time the continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each of the variable effects is set. It may be provided. Then, in the continuous announcement determination process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S1316: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect in each of the variable effects is limited to a predetermined value. Alternatively, a continuous announcement effect may be started. Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous announcement effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b at the time of determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous announcement effect, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be determined, , The game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (15 probable jackpot, 2R probable jackpot, 15 regular jackpot, missed), or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, the probability that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance effect in each variable effect. .

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to perform display. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the audio lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence command is generated instead of a command generated by the audio lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 such as an error occurrence command. Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning images are generated. Alternatively, a necessary image data transfer instruction may be set.

  In the above embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is equal to the number of the reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as a variety of gaming machines such as a game machine such as an arepachi, a sparrow ball, and a so-called pachinko machine combined with a slot machine.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols is provided, and is not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described. When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A game machine A1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means so as to notify one of the solicitation information.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine A1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are set based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In the gaming machine A1, the notification control means may determine a result of the comparison by the comparison means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and a condition information received by the condition information receiving means. The gaming machine A2, wherein the notifying unit is controlled so that the second suggestion information is notified when the lottery conditions do not match.

  According to the gaming machine A2, as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In such a case, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine A2, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, the second suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification unit regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Therefore, since the use of the unreliable lottery result can be suppressed, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notification control means includes a result of the comparison by the comparison means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means. When the lottery condition indicated by (1) matches, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result shifting to the special game state, the first suggestion information is notified. A game machine A3 for controlling the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In this case, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to a special game state, the notification unit is controlled by the notification control unit so that the first suggestion information is notified. You. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine A3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. In this case, if the credible lottery result indicates the lottery result that shifts to the special game state, the first suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, the notification by the notification means can be performed by using the reliable lottery results among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means. In other words, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those which can be trusted can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, from among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, a determination that the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. A determination result information acquisition unit that performs a comparison between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. A comparison stopping means, wherein the judgment condition information acquired by the judgment result information acquiring means is displayed in ascending order of the reception order. And drawing conditions, the gaming machine is characterized in that to compare the drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and stores the information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, for the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of reception order, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped by the first comparison stop means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match during the comparison, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In the subsequent comparison, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine A4, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison by the comparison unit can be continued. If the results are consistent or unknown, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, from among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, a determination that the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. In the comparison by the judgment result information acquiring means and the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information is associated with the judgment condition information that matches the lottery condition. A second comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means when the determined result information indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special game state; Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order of the reception order, and a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception unit. Gaming machine A5, characterized by comparing

  According to the gaming machine A5, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result information acquisition means obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. Then, with respect to the obtained determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of the reception order, and In the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is changed to the special game state. When the result indicates the lottery result to be shifted, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. According to the gaming machine A5, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit match, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is In the case of indicating the result of the lottery transition to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped even if the determination condition information for comparing the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, the number of comparisons by the comparing means can be suppressed, so that the control load can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the comparing means stores the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means. A gaming machine A6 for comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the determined condition information.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparing means can be increased, so that the opportunity to execute the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be increased.

  When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the solicitation information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are determined based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine B1 and the gaming machines A1 to A6, the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special game state, and performs the lottery determination. The means is configured to suspend the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end, and the main control means, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, A game state determining means for determining whether or not the game is in the special game state, and, if the game state is determined by the game state determining means, to be set by the lottery condition setting means after the special game state is over. And a third lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition to be performed, wherein the lottery result determining means determines that the special game state is established by the gaming state determining means. (3) The lottery condition obtained by the lottery condition obtaining means is used to determine a lottery result when the random number information obtained along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when shifting to the special game state, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition by the lottery condition setting means, and the time from the transition to the special game state to the end is determined. , The determination of the random number information by the lottery determination means is suspended. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special game state is determined by the game state determination means, and when the special game state is determined, the lottery is performed after the special game state ends. The lottery condition set by the condition setting means is obtained by the third lottery condition obtaining means. In addition, if the game state determination means determines that the game state is the special game state, the random number information acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. Is determined by lottery result determination means. During the special game state, the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended, so if the predetermined start condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special game state to the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is determined. This is performed after the end of the special game state. According to the gaming machine B2, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special gaming state to the end, the special gaming condition is not set in the special gaming state but the special lottery condition set in the special gaming state. The lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the end of the state makes it possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined starting condition. Therefore, even if the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special game state to the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means in accordance with the establishment can be accurately determined. The possibility that the result can be determined can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A game machine C1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the solicitation information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine C1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are set based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the lottery determination unit in accordance with random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. The random number information indicating the lottery result to be determined, and the random number information for determining the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is configured to be different for each lottery condition, and the comparing means is configured to determine the determination condition information Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes inconsistent, for each judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information, Comparing the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information; If the lottery condition indicated by the information does not match, it is determined whether the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information that does not match the lottery condition indicates the lottery result that shifts to the special game state. Determination result information determining means to perform the comparison control when the determination result information determining means determines that the result indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, so that the comparing means continues the comparison. Means, and the notification control means, the result of the comparison by the comparing means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the condition information received by the condition information receiving means If the lottery conditions shown match, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the second Gaming machine C2, which suggests information is characterized in that for controlling the informing means so as to broadcast.

  According to the gaming machine C2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination unit in accordance with the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, and shifts to a special gaming state. The random number information for determining the lottery result is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes inconsistent, the judgment condition information is stored for each judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that the lottery condition does not match is used. It is determined by the determination result information determining means whether the result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Here, when it is determined that the result indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the comparison control unit controls the comparison unit to continue the comparison. As a result of the comparison by the comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the judgment is made. If the determination result information associated with the condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so as to notify the first suggestion information. Since the random number information for determining the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is changed to the lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Then, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result does not become a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit shifts to the special game state. If the lottery result is a lottery result, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state. According to the gaming machine C2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is different from the lottery determination means. If the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by The comparison can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, simply by the comparison unit. Compared to the case where the comparison is terminated, the opportunity for performing the comparison by the comparing means can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C2, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means includes: determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means; And the information is stored in association with the order in which the determination information is received, and the comparison unit is configured to store, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information. In the comparison by the determination result information obtaining means and the comparing means, wherein the determination result information is obtained by the lottery determination means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is not matched with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. A first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means, wherein the determination condition information obtained by the determination result information obtaining means is Gaming machine C3 which characterized in that a comparison between sequentially drawing condition indicated by the determination condition information to old signal sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, for the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of reception order, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped by the first comparison stop means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match during the comparison, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In the subsequent comparison, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine C3, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison by the comparison unit can be continued. If the results are consistent or unknown, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means includes: determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means; And the information is stored in association with the order in which the determination information is received, and the comparison unit is configured to store, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information. In the comparison by the determination result information obtaining means for obtaining an undetermined one by the lottery determination means and the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. When the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the comparison is performed. A second comparison canceling means for canceling the comparison by the step, and among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in an order from the oldest reception order; A gaming machine C4 for comparing with a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result information acquisition means obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. Then, with respect to the obtained determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of the reception order, and In the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is changed to the special game state. When the result indicates the lottery result to be shifted, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. According to the gaming machine C4, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is In the case of indicating the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped even if the determination condition information for comparing the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, the number of comparisons by the comparing means can be suppressed, so that the control load can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the comparing unit receives the condition received by the condition information receiving unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine C5 characterized by comparing a lottery condition indicated by information with a lottery condition indicated by judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparing means can be increased, so that the opportunity to execute the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be increased.

  When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the solicitation information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when predetermined starting conditions are satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine D1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are determined based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit. And the determination condition information are stored in association with the order in which the determination information is received, and the comparing means corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. Determination result information obtaining means for obtaining an undetermined lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means, and a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information; And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state. And a second comparison canceling means for canceling the comparison by the comparing means, wherein the lottery indicated by the judging condition information in order of the reception order from the oldest reception order among the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. And comparing the condition with a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. The notification control means determines a determination result stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information shifts to the special game state. A gaming machine D2 characterized by controlling the notifying means so as to notify the first suggestion information as long as the result indicates a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result information acquisition means obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. Then, with respect to the obtained determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of the reception order, and In the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is changed to the special game state. When the result indicates the lottery result to be shifted, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. According to the gaming machine D2, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit match, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is In the case of indicating the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped even if the determination condition information for comparing the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, the number of comparisons by the comparing means can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D2, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparing unit receives the condition information immediately before the informing by the informing unit. A gaming machine D3 for comparing a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the means with a lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparing means can be increased, so that the opportunity to execute the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be increased.

  Random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment when a predetermined starting condition is established; random number information storing means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means; A storage information acquisition unit for acquiring one random number information stored in the unit, and a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions based on the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. Lottery determination means for determining the lottery condition, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and the lottery determination means after the end of the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means And lottery control means for controlling the determination according to the predetermined lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means. Main control means for controlling, and sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, including notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state. In the gaming machine, the main control means includes: first lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; and a first lottery condition. In the lottery condition acquired by the acquisition means, random number information acquired along with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means, a lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result, the lottery result determination means A determination information transmitting device that transmits determination information including determination result information indicating a determined lottery result and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control unit. A second lottery condition acquiring unit for acquiring a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit; and a condition for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit to the sub control unit. Information transmitting means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means, and by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information in association with each other, and storing in the determination information storage means Comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the judged condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means; Notification setting means for setting the notification information to be notified by the notification means based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the reception means; and the notification information by the notification means in accordance with the setting by the notification setting means. A game machine E1 comprising: notification control means for controlling whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means based on a comparison result by the comparison means when is notified.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when predetermined starting conditions are satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquiring means based on the establishment, and is stored in the random number information storage means. When one of the random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, the lottery in one preset lottery condition among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and the state shifts to the special game state according to the result of the lottery. In addition, the suggestion information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high is notified by the notification means, and when the special game state ends, the determination by the subsequent lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under predetermined conditions. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the information is obtained by the lottery result determination means. The lottery result is determined in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. When the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information is stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the judgment condition information. Is done. Further, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is determined by the notification determination means. The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means are compared by the comparing means. Then, based on the comparison result, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is controlled by the notification control means.

  When the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may change there. If the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit before the change of the lottery condition and the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit after the change of the lottery condition do not match. And the lottery results may not match. Therefore, when the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit up to that time may not be trusted and may not be used. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means. Can be done. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, it is possible to notify the suggestion information to the notification unit using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit from being wasted, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control unit may perform the determination as a result of the comparison by the comparing unit. The gaming machine E2, characterized in that when the lottery condition indicated by the condition information coincides with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, control is performed so that the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match as a result of the comparison by the comparing unit, the notification control unit is configured to notify the suggestion information by the notifying unit. Is controlled by If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine E2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. In this case, the suggestion information can be notified to the notification means by using the reliable lottery result. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, reliable ones can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E2, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means sets a result of the comparison by the comparing means The gaming machine E3, wherein when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, control is performed so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notifying unit.

  According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparing unit, the notification control unit is configured to prevent the notification unit from notifying the suggestion information. Is controlled by If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. In this case, the unreliable lottery result is used so that the suggestion information is not reported by the reporting means. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, the use of unreliable ones can be suppressed, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  Any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5 is identified based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means. A display unit for performing a variable effect including dynamic display of information, wherein the notification setting unit, when receiving the determination information by the determination information receiving unit, based on the determination result information of the determination information, a plurality of In the fluctuating effect, a notification judging means for judging whether or not to inform the suggestion information by the notifying means is provided. In each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the notification is performed. The suggestion information is set to be notified by a step, and the notification control means determines that the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparing means. A gaming machine E4, wherein the suggestion information is controlled so as not to be notified by the notification means in each of the fluctuation effects performed by the display means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the judgment information is received by the judgment information receiving means, based on the judgment result information of the judgment information, it is determined by the notification judging means whether to inform the suggestion information by the notifying means in a plurality of fluctuation effects. Is determined. Here, when it is determined that the suggestion information is to be notified, among the determinations performed by the lottery determination unit, based on the lottery result of the determination accompanying the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit. The setting is performed by the notification setting unit so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit in each of the fluctuation effects to be performed. When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the suggestion information is not reported by the reporting means in each of the variable effects performed by the display means. Then, control is performed by the notification control means. In the comparison by the comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determiner. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, there is a transition to a special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, and the lottery condition is set. There is a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unknown whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are also unclear. If the lottery result determined by the result determination means cannot be trusted, then the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E4, in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and thereafter, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being notified by the notification means in each variation effect. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, the use of unreliable ones can be further suppressed, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5 is identified based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means. Display means for performing a variable effect including dynamic display of information, wherein the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information as the determination information The notification setting means, when the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, based on the determination result information of the determination information, the notification setting means, Means for judging whether or not to inform the suggestion information by means, and when it is judged by the information judgment means to inform the suggestion information, the lottery determination The suggestion information is notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means among the determinations made by the means. The comparison means, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, the condition The notification control means compares the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. Is not the same as the notification in each of the subsequent variable effects including the variable effect performed in response to the mismatched determination result information. Gaming machine E5, wherein the suggesting information is used to control so as not to be notified by.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the judgment result information of the judgment information received by the judgment information receiving means and the judgment condition information are stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the order of receiving the judgment information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determination means determines whether or not to notify the suggestion information in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. Here, when it is determined that the suggestion information is to be notified, among the determinations performed by the lottery determination unit, based on the lottery result of the determination accompanying the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit. The setting is performed by the notification setting unit so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit in each of the fluctuation effects to be performed. The lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared in ascending order of reception order among the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the result of the comparison includes a fluctuating effect performed in response to the mismatched judgment result information. Control is performed by the notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each of the fluctuation effects thereafter. In the comparison by the comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determiner. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, there is a transition to a special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, and the lottery condition is set. There is a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unknown whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are also unclear. If the lottery result determined by the result determination means cannot be trusted, then the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E5, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparing means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means cannot be trusted, In each of the subsequent variable effects including the variable effect performed in response to the determination result information that does not match, the suggestion information can be prevented from being notified by the notification unit. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, those that can be trusted can be used, and those that cannot be trusted can be further suppressed from being used. It can be handled favorably.

  In any one of the gaming machine E5, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means may perform the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison means. A gaming machine E6 comprising: first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means when the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison unit, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the first comparison stop unit. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and thereafter, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, The comparison can be aborted. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E6, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means includes: When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state. For example, in a gaming machine E7, the suggestion information is controlled so as not to be informed by the informing means in each variable effect performed after the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information is changed to the special game. If the lottery result indicates the lottery result to be shifted to the state, control is performed by the notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each variable effect performed after the special game state. When shifting to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, after the special game state ends, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means. Therefore, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unknown whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are also unclear. If the lottery result determined by the determination means cannot be trusted, then the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparing means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information is changed to the special game state. If the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter, the suggestion information can be prevented from being notified by the notification unit in each variable effect. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, the use of unreliable ones can be suppressed, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine E7, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means may perform the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison means. And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result that shifts to the special game state. A gaming machine E8 comprising a second comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means in some cases.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result associated with the judgment condition information that matches the lottery condition When the information indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information shifts to the special game state. If the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter, the comparison by the comparison unit can be stopped. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machine E5, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means may perform the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state. A transition determination unit that determines whether there is a game, and when the determination result information is determined to indicate a lottery result that transitions to the special game state, the transition determination unit determines that the special game state has ended. A lottery condition determining means for determining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means; and the condition information when the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means. Gaming machine E9, characterized in that instead of drawing conditions, the comparison means by lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means comprises a first comparator control means for controlling to continue the comparison shown.

  According to the gaming machine E9, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparing means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is determined. The shift determining means determines whether the result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Here, if it is determined that the result indicates the lottery result to shift to the special game state, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means after the end of the special game state is determined by the lottery condition determination means, Instead of the lottery condition indicated by the information, the first comparison control means controls the comparison means so that the comparison means continues the comparison based on the lottery condition determined by the lottery condition determination means. When shifting to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, after the special game state ends, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means. . Therefore, after the special game state ends, it is unknown whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine E9, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit after the special gaming state ends is determined by the lottery condition determining unit, and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information is replaced by the lottery condition determining unit. Control is performed such that the comparison means continues the comparison according to the lottery conditions thus set. Therefore, even after the special game state is over, it becomes clear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is determined. You can distinguish whether you can trust or not. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, reliable ones can be increased, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the storage information acquisition unit. Indicating the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means according to the random number information obtained by the random number information, the random number information for determining the lottery result to shift to the special game state is different for each lottery condition The comparison means is configured to determine the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means until the result of comparison between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match. Each time, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information that does not match the lottery condition is the special game state. The determination result information determining means for determining whether or not the result indicates the lottery result, and when the determination result information determining means determines that the result indicates the lottery result to shift to the special game state, A gaming machine E10 comprising: second comparison control means for controlling the comparison means to continue the comparison.

  According to the gaming machine E10, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination unit according to the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, and shifts to a special gaming state. The random number information for determining the lottery result is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes inconsistent, the judgment condition information is stored for each judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that the lottery condition does not match is used. It is determined by the determination result information determining means whether the result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Here, when it is determined that the result indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the second comparison control unit controls the comparison unit to continue the comparison. Since the random number information for determining the lottery result to be shifted to the special game state is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is determined to be the lottery result to be shifted to the special game state. In that case, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result does not become a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is changed to the special game state. If the lottery result shifts to, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state. According to the gaming machine E10, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery determination Even if the lottery result determined by the means may be inconsistent with the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, if it can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state, The comparison by the comparing means can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison is simply performed regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Compared to the case where the comparison by the means is terminated, the opportunity for the comparison by the comparison means can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the lottery condition setting means shifts to the special gaming state. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set to a predetermined lottery condition, and the lottery determination unit suspends the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end. And the main control means is configured to determine whether or not the game is in the special game state when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. And a third lottery condition obtaining unit that obtains a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit after the special game state ends, wherein the lottery result determination unit includes: If the special game state is determined by the game state determination means, the random number information acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. A gaming machine E11 for determining a lottery result when determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, when shifting to the special game state, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition by the lottery condition setting means, and the time from the transition to the special game state to the end is determined. , The determination of the random number information by the lottery determination means is suspended. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special game state is determined by the game state determination means, and when the special game state is determined, the lottery is performed after the special game state ends. The lottery condition set by the condition setting means is obtained by the third lottery condition obtaining means. In addition, if the game state determination means determines that the game state is the special game state, the random number information acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. Is determined by lottery result determination means. During the special game state, the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended, so if the predetermined start condition is satisfied during the transition from the transition to the special game state to the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is determined. This is done after the end of the special game state. According to the gaming machine E11, if the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special gaming state to the end, the special gaming condition is not set in the special gaming state but the special lottery condition is set. The lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the end of the state can determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined starting condition. Therefore, even if the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special game state to the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means in accordance with the establishment can be accurately determined. The possibility that the result can be determined can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E11, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison unit is configured to execute the notification immediately before the notification unit performs the notification. Wherein the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. E12.

  According to the gaming machine E12, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled by the comparison means can be increased, and the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  The gaming machine F1, wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  The gaming machine F2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine F3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (notification means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (part of sub control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (random number information storage means)
223a Prefetch information storage area (judgment information storage means)
S206 random number information obtaining means S207 first lottery condition obtaining means S401 storage information obtaining means S402 to S405 lottery determining means S409 to S411, S915, S916 lottery condition setting means, lottery control means S501, S502, S505 to S507 lottery result determining means S511 , S513 judgment information transmitting means S902 second lottery condition obtaining means S903 condition information transmitting means S1209 judgment information receiving means S1211 notification setting means S1212 condition information receiving means S1404 judgment result information obtaining means S1405 first comparing means S1406 first notification control means S1406 : No. 1st comparison stop unit S3704 2nd notification control unit S3802, S4008 2nd comparison unit

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

JP-A-11-333089

When the game ball to the startup port newly prize, the jackpot lottery is pending, then the predicted draw results jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning from the jackpot lottery pending is executed The actual jackpot lottery associated with the new prize is performed. Therefore, the held jackpot lottery is executed, and if any of the lottery results is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that the jackpot is determined. The game state may change before and after.

However , when the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result do not match, when a performance (notification effect) is performed using the predicted result, the actual jackpot lottery lottery is performed. There was a risk that the effects that were unrelated to the result would be more likely to be performed .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle a jackpot lottery prediction result.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, the random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information when a predetermined starting condition is established, stores the random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means and random number information storage means for the storage information acquiring means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storing means, using one of the drawing condition of the plurality of lottery conditions set in advance, A lottery determination unit that determines a lottery result of the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, and a variation type determination unit that determines a type of a variation game to be executed based on the lottery result of the lottery determination unit; a lottery condition setting means special game state to migrate in response to the lottery result lottery determining means sets the drawing condition of the lottery determination means in the case of completion, have a mainly performing main control regarding the game And control means performs a variable display by the variation type determination means determined variation game by type, and controls the variable display means for displaying a predetermined suggestion information for performing a predetermined suggestions to the player, the main control unit a sub-control means controlled by the instruction from, which was equipped with the main control means determines drawing condition that the predetermined starting condition is when a condition is satisfied, and is set by the drawing condition setting means and, using the discriminated lottery condition, the lottery result estimated means to estimate the lottery result when the random number information is determined by the lottery determining means, it is estimated by its lottery result estimation unit the estimation result indicating lottery results using a predetermined drawing condition in order to determine the sub-control means is, the estimated information transmission means for transmitting the estimated information to the sub-control means, set by the drawing condition setting means A condition information transmitting means for transmitting the condition information indicating a drawing condition which is to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means receives the estimate information transmitted by the estimation information transmission means of said main control means and a result information storage means for storing the lottery results are shown result information of the random number information using the predetermined drawing conditions determined from the received estimated Teijoho, it transmits the condition information transmission means of said main control means receive condition information, and the drawing condition information storage means for storing a drawing condition indicated by the received condition information, and drawing conditions used to determine the result information stored in the result information storage means, the lottery If the drawing condition stored in the condition information storage means it becomes different drawing conditions, and a means for the predetermined suggest information for controlling the variable display device so that it does not appear.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means A storage information acquisition unit for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage unit, and one of a plurality of preset lottery conditions, using the storage information acquisition unit. Lottery determination means for determining the lottery result of the random number information to be obtained, based on the lottery result of the lottery determination means, variable type determination means for determining the type of variable game to be executed, and the lottery result of the lottery determination means A lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special game state which is shifted according to the main game state ends, a main control means for performing a main control relating to a game; The fluctuation display is performed by the type of the fluctuation game determined by the type determination means, and the fluctuation display means for displaying predetermined suggestion information for making a predetermined suggestion to the player is controlled, and is controlled by an instruction from the main control means. Sub-control means, and the main control means determines the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determines the determined lottery condition. A lottery result estimating means for estimating a lottery result when the random number information is determined by the lottery determining means using a lottery condition, and a lottery result using a predetermined lottery condition estimated by the lottery result estimating means. In order to cause the sub-control means to determine the estimation result indicating, the estimation information transmitting means for transmitting the estimation information to the sub-control means, and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information to the sub control means, wherein the sub control means receives the estimation information transmitted by the estimation information transmitting means of the main control means, and A result information storage unit that stores result information indicating the lottery result of the random number information using the predetermined lottery condition to be determined, and condition information transmitted by a condition information transmitting unit of the main control unit, A lottery condition information storage unit for storing a lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, a lottery condition used for determining the result information stored in the result information storage unit, and a lottery condition stored in the lottery condition information storage unit. Means for controlling the variable display means so that the predetermined suggestion information is not displayed when the lottery condition is different from the lottery condition. There is an effect that the measurement result can be appropriately handled.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the big hit effect. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters and the holding ball storage area. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating data included in a prefetch command. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating data included in a fanfare command. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the back surface B. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the ending effect determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a fanfare command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 5A is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which arises when determining the display mode of an ending effect only based on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which arises when determining the display mode of an ending effect only based on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which arises when determining the display mode of an ending effect only based on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing of a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing of the sound lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process of the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow which changes a continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to incline downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of a "city stage", an "empty stage", and an "island stage" are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in response to the change, so that the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is formed). (Flowing region).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  Although details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a lottery of the first symbol (special symbol) is performed, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit. Judgment (big hit lottery) is performed. In the jackpot lottery, if it is determined that the jackpot is, the type of the jackpot is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-change jackpot, a 2R certain-change jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

  The “15R probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-probability state when the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds ends, and the “2R probable jackpot” When the maximum number of rounds is two rounds, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state. The “15R normal jackpot” means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-probability state when a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds ends and a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes ) Is a jackpot that reduces time.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, the state shifts to the special jackpot that is a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is not being changed and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of the probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It refers to the state of the game that is easy to ball. While the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased during probable change or during working hours, but instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, the opening time of the motorized accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times the motorized accessory is opened in one big hit may be changed.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not the fluctuation is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64, or a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. The first symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is shown in a lighting state, or a ball whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 (reserved ball). ) Is indicated by the lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (in a high probability state, During a low probability state or during a big hit). In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the stop symbol according to the big hit type is displayed on the LED 37a instead of the stop symbol indicating only the big hit or not.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variation display of a third symbol while synchronizing with a variation display on the first symbol display device 37, using a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning) as a trigger. (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and a second symbol constituted by an LED that variably displays the second symbol when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 as a trigger. A display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 described later, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the game status on the first symbol display device 37. Decorative display according to the display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with attached patterns imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even-numbered symbols are added (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) are arranged.

  More specifically, if the lottery result is “15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot”, a variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers “1,3,5,7,9” are added is aligned. If the lottery result is “15R normal big hit”, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols to which “even numbers“ 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 ”are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, a continuous announcement effect may be performed to suggest (notice) that the possibility of the jackpot is high, In this case, when the variable display is performed, a predetermined combination of main symbols (for example, on the activated line L1, the combinations of main symbols are "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1). , A so-called “chance eye” is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and a lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and are fluctuated by scrolling from top to bottom (Y direction indicated by an arrow) periodically in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Display is performed. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol stops on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance port 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character is displayed. The announcement production is performed.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  Subsequently, the big hit effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5B and 5C show display screens displayed in an ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect. It is the figure which illustrated.

  In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), a jackpot lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and thereafter, the first symbol (special symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device. In response to the variable display of 37, the variable display of the third symbol is performed.

  When the variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). , The display is switched to the medium speed variation display of the third symbol, and further to the low speed variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the variable effect ends, and subsequently, the big hit effect starts. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not displayed, a stop display is performed and the variable effect ends, and if there is a start winning prize held, The next jackpot lottery is performed, and the next variable effect is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is an effect for increasing the player's expectation by notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started while blessing the jackpot. In addition, in the ending effect, when the jackpot is ended and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning, the player is notified that the lottery result is a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries (fixed effect display Or simply informing the player that the jackpot has ended (performing a normal display).

  If the `` determination effect display '' is performed in the ending effect, if the jackpot is determined based on the starting winning prize held after the jackpot has ended, the lottery result will be a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries Expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot is completed, the player can be delighted every time the jackpot lottery based on the starting winning prize held is performed until the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  When a jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in synchronization with the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A fanfare command is transmitted to device 113. Although details will be described later (see FIG. 9), this fanfare command includes information indicating a gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. When the fan lamp command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts the fan game effect following the variable effect.

  Next, the main control device 110 transmits a round number command indicating the first round to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. When the number-of-rounds command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round, following the fanfare effect. In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the jackpot state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated a number of times (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to the jackpot type.

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls win), the specific winning opening 65a is closed. At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the audio ramp controller 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening and closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. Thereafter, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new round number is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round effect from the first round to the round (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to the jackpot type is sequentially executed.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are all completed. When the ending command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the ending effect, when the jackpot is ended and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning, the player is notified that the lottery result is a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries. Is performed (fixed effect display is performed) or simply that the jackpot is finished is notified to the player (normal display is performed). Although the details will be described later, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the “determined effect display” or the “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  When “normal display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “Makeover!” Is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. You. This screen means that the jackpot ends. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot has ended, so that the player can prepare for returning to the normal game.

  On the other hand, when “determined effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, “Super chance!” Is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This screen means that if any of the held jackpot lotteries is performed, the lottery result will always be a jackpot.

  When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the lottery result will be a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit is completed, so It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the player can be depressed. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Here, returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by displaying, by a lighting state, whether or not a lottery of the second symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a second symbol corresponding to a lottery result of the second symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passages through the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more (for example, , 8 times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  Therefore, when the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 increases due to the reduced working hours, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly. As a result, even if a game is played, the number of balls possessed is hard to decrease, Alternatively, the number of possessed balls does not decrease. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state, the player can obtain a feeling of a period in which the jackpot can be obtained in a state where the number of possessed balls is hard to decrease or in a state where the number of possessed balls does not decrease. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and when the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned off so that the jackpot stops symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the big hit. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. When this big hit occurs, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a value in the game (game value). Be done.

  The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the big hit, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of the big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  The jackpot is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is formed as a big hit. You may do it.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and display settings on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and display settings of the second symbol display device 83. used.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter used for selecting the jackpot symbol are set. C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used. The second symbol display device 83 uses the second random number counter C4 to set the display, and the second random number counter C4 uses the second initial value random number counter CINI2 to set the initial value. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time an update is performed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described later in detail, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Is stored in any of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number of the jackpot is set by a jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the value of the random number of the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value (hit value), it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (a period during which the probability is not being changed), and a probability of the jackpot being larger than the low probability. There are two types of high probability probability jackpot random number tables 202a2 used in the high probability state (during probabilistic change), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the big hit, the probability of the big hit is changed between the low probability and the high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit value) that becomes a big hit at the time of low probability is three, and the value “7,307,582” is stored in the low probability big hit random number table 202a1. ing. On the other hand, the number of the random numbers (hit value) which is a big hit at the time of high probability is 30, and the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390” , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 833, 866, 892 "are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. .

  In this embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated. Each hit value is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a hit value regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a big hit may increase. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number of the jackpot according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, according to the low-probability state or the high-probability state), the jackpot Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, Each of the counter values of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired, and thereafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the acquired counter values. The lottery result is predicted prior to the jackpot lottery. Have been. Hereinafter, predicting the lottery result prior to the jackpot lottery is described as reading the lottery result in advance. In this pre-reading, the counter value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are used to predict the success or failure of the big hit lottery and its type. The variation pattern type is predicted using the counter value of the variation type counter CS1. Hereinafter, the result of the prediction of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the type thereof will be described as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the result of predicting the variation pattern type will be described as a prediction result of the variation pattern type.

  When the success or failure of the jackpot lottery is predicted in the pre-reading, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (hit value) Is compared with. Specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of winning is a low-probability state, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to. The jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to. Then, when the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value (winning value) stored in the referenced table, it is predicted (determined) that the lottery result is a big hit. .

  Then, after the pre-reading (possibly after a time interval), the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game of the pachinko machine 10 when the variable effect corresponding to the counter value is started. A jackpot lottery is performed based on the state. In the present embodiment, if a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 during the execution of the fluctuation effect or during the big hit, the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 is held. This reservation is performed up to four times.

  Then, when the running effect and the jackpot are finished, if the starting prize is held, one of the oldest jackpot lotteries associated with the held starting prize is executed. Thereafter, in the same manner, while the start winning prize is being held, each time the variable effect or the big hit during the execution ends, the jackpot lottery accompanying the held starting prize is executed one by one in order.

  Therefore, when the ball newly wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), if the starting winning is already suspended, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is read in advance, By the time the jackpot lottery associated with the new starting prize is performed, the jackpot lottery that has already been held is performed. If the jackpot lottery already held is performed and the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. Sometimes. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery associated with a new starting prize is performed in the changed gaming state, so that the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 referred to at the time of pre-reading and at the time of the lottery are set to one. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the prediction result does not match the actual lottery result.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of the big hit in the case of a big hit, and is added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), The information is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number with a big hit, that is, if it is a random number to be lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of departure. In this case, the stop type at the time of departure is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, and the variation pattern at the time of departure is determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. It is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number with a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the stop type at the time of the big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is the first hit type stored in the same holding area. It is determined based on the values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the maximum round number shifts to the low probability state after the 15 round jackpot. There is a “15R normal big hit” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “2R certain variable big hit” where the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of big hits.

  In the big hit type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. In the present embodiment, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value “40-79” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. The value “80-99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change big hit.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability change big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R regular jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start win), the value of the RAM 203 is updated. The ball is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  A plurality of stop type selection tables (not shown) are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, in which the range of the random number from which the stop type is selected differs for each table. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a table in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as 0 to 89 is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, It is easy to select "completely off". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than front and rear out”. In the case of the low probability state, a table in which the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. It is difficult to select "completely out of order". In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as a so-called normal reach, a super reach, a special reach, etc., based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot variation pattern table used at the time of a jackpot and a detachment variation pattern table used at the time of a detachment are prepared as the variation pattern tables. In addition, as a variation pattern table for deviation, a variation pattern for deviation (probability variation) according to whether the game state is a time reduction state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, or a normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state. A table and a variation pattern table for deviation (normal) are prepared.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and a 2R probability variable jackpot that is referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that is a big hit, the hold area is set according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area. Is determined from the jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in.

  There are various types of normal reach, super reach, and special reach in common for 15R jackpots. Correlation with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is as follows: normal reach various 0-10, super reach various 11-99, special reach various 100 to 198. The various types of super-reach are various types of the no-reach types, which are short-reach-reach variations, in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter-stop symbols are aligned). The first symbol (or the third symbol) is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than the normal reach (e.g., a reach developed from a long reach or a normal reach). A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the time reach (for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach or a special reach whose development destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach). Since a table common to the 15R jackpots is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach can be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there is a large number of productions with different rendering contents in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach displayed suddenly, and in addition, a plurality of reaches with different effect contents are included, such as an effect in which a notice effect before the start of change is added and an effect in which a big hit is added by re-change.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for the 2R probability change jackpot, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is such that the 2R fluctuation A is 0 to 99, the 2R fluctuation B is 100 to 149, and the 2R fluctuation C is 150 to 198. The 2R variation A is, for example, an effect in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol with "chicken", and the 2R variation B does not normally appear. The final 1st symbol (or the 3rd symbol) is an effect in which the final symbol is stopped at a specific symbol with the “girl”. The 2R variation C is the final 1st symbol with the lighting of the one-shot notification lamp. This is an effect in which the symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established, the last The number of symbols to shift the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after, etc.) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  Then, for example, the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) is a complete deviation exclusive reference which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and a case where reach other than front and rear deviation and reach other than front and rear deviation are determined. Are divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a value (hit value) that is a big hit, that is, if it is a value that goes out, when the gaming state is in the normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is: It is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern.

  There are two types of exclusive deviations: short deviations in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time and reach is not established, and long deviations in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short deviation but reach is not established. The association is 0-148 for short deviation and 149-198 for long deviation. In addition, the reach is common, but the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short, the normal reach is different, the super reach is longer than the normal reach, the super reach is different, and the super reach is longer than the various super specials. There are various types of reach, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0-148 for various types of normal reach, 149-190 for various types of super reach, and 191-198 for various types of special reach.

  In the same manner as the variation (normal) variation pattern table, the variation pattern table for the variation is referred to when complete departure is determined as the stop type at the time of the departure. It is referred to when the reach only and the reach other than the front and rear and the reach other than the front and rear are determined.Based on the common reach that includes various types of normal reach, various types of super reach and various types of special reach, and the type of stop at the time of release Are divided into groups (groups), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, and if the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, it is stored in the same holding area. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern.

  The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete departure is 0 to 190 for short departure and 191 to 198 for long departure. In addition, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is 0 to 148 for various normal reach, 149 to 190 for various super reach, and 191 to 198 for various special reach.

  The out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of the probable change. Become. Therefore, when the player is in a time-saving state or a high probability state, if a lot of deviations are performed, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving a waiting state to the player and giving the player discomfort. there is a possibility. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is undesirably reduced because the operating rate is reduced. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of a probability change, the short variation is configured to be more easily selected than in the other cases, and the start of the next fluctuation display is performed early, so that the gaming state is improved. The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice or the like). In addition, the selection of the type of miss is configured to be divided into a variation pattern table for the removal (normal) and a variation pattern table for the removal (probable variation), but even if the game state is normal, a plurality of holding balls (for example, In the case of a maximum of four, three or more), the fluctuation display may be terminated early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table. May be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probable variation corresponding to.

  Further, in the above-described variation pattern tables for deviations, short deviations and long deviations are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, by referring to other tables, the short deviations and the long deviations are determined by a predetermined probability. May be selected. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and setting of display on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Here, returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, and I / Os. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a game state flag 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball number counter 203c, a post-big hit game state flag 203d, a big hit flag 203e, a pre-read execution flag 203f, and a big hit winning flag 203g. At least.

  The gaming state flag 203a is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (probable change). When the gaming state flag 203a is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, and when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. Is shown. The gaming state flag 203a refers to the above-described low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or the high probability jackpot random number table 202a1 when a jackpot lottery is performed or the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read. Used by the MPU 201 to determine whether to do so.

  Specifically, if the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to and the jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to and the jackpot lottery is performed. Although details will be described later, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read, not only the state of the game state flag 203a but also the state of the after-big hit game state flag 203d and the state of the big hit middle prize flag 203g are taken into consideration. It is determined whether to refer to the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2, and the determined tables 202a1 and 202a2 are referred to to determine the jackpot lottery result. Read ahead.

  The game state flag 203a is set to off by the initialization process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S714 in FIG. 25). Also, when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, it is set to off (see S316 in FIG. 21). Then, when a jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON (see S916 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, even if a jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a jackpot, if the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot ends (see FIG. 27). S915: No). In addition, even when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is out of order, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot ends. However, the game state flag 203a may be set to be turned off (overwritten) when the big hit is completed (see S915: No in FIG. 27). That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a may be updated (re-set) every time a jackpot lottery is performed.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7). Each of these areas includes a first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, a first collision type counter storage area 203b2 for storing the value of the first collision type counter C2, and a stoppage. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a prize-winning game state flag 203a stored as a prize-winning game state flag. And a winning game state flag storage area 203b5.

  In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4, and the winning game state flag storage Although the area 203b5 is provided in one reserved ball storage area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided, and each of the five areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4, and 203b5 is stored in one of the reserved ball storage areas. May be provided.

  As described above, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained at the timing when the ball wins, and they are held in the holding ball storage area 203b. Stored in the area. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the gaming state flag 203a is acquired at the winning timing, and the gaming state flag 203a stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as the winning gaming state flag. Stored in the hold area. Here, the value stored in the holding area is used when pre-reading the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and when performing the jackpot lottery. The prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be described later.

  In the reserved ball storage area 203b, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, the winning game state flag) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64 is maximum. It is stored up to four times. In the case where data is stored, the data is sequentially stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). It is memorized. In other words, the data corresponding to the earlier start winning prize is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored even if the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 stores the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the prize-winning game) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. State flag) is shifted (moved) to each of the execution areas 203b1 to 203b5. Then, the data shifted to the execution area is referred to in the change start processing (see FIG. 22), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Here, the details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 shifts the random number value in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the execution area. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the first hold area is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the execution area, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the first hold area is disturbed. The numerical value is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the execution area, and the random number value of the change type counter storage area 203b4 of the hold first area is shifted to the change type counter storage area 203b4 of the execution area. Is shifted to the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 in the execution area.

  When the shift of each data to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the data stored (reserved) in other reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) is deleted. Then, a shift process is performed to fill the reserved areas with the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  For example, when the start of the variable effect is determined, it is assumed that data is stored in all the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in the reserved ball storage area 203b (the reserved ball number counter described later). 203c is "4"). In this case, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) respectively. , And shifts to the reserved area with the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  In addition, for example, when data is stored only in the two reserved areas of the reserved first area and the reserved second area when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined (the value of the retained ball number counter 203c described later). Becomes “2”), the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed on the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control load can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the reserved area (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) may be shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area), so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (a variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) up to four times. The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S613 of FIG. 25). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be displayed on the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S204 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the retained ball counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new variable effect is executed (see S306 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  The sound lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of times of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the variable effect is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a winning start is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball count command from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113. Even if the number of balls to be retained deviates from the actual number of balls reserved for the fluctuation effect held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is a flag that indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state or a high-probability state when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and the big hit ends. When the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when the big hit is completed, and when the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on, the big hit is ended. In this case, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state.

  The post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is used by the MPU 201 when a big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10. Although the details will be described later, when a big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10, a fanfare command for notifying the start of the big hit or the like is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In that case, the MPU 201 generates the fanfare command based on the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d. Further, although the details will be described later, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is also used for pre-reading the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the data stored in the reserved area of the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b. Is used by the MPU 201 when the target data is obtained with the start winning prize during the jackpot.

  Then, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is set to an initial value of off by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S714 of FIG. 25). In addition, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is set to ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a probability change big hit (see S410 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the post-big-hit game state flag 203d is set to OFF when the big hit type is determined to be the normal big hit (see S411 in FIG. 22). When it is determined that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of the range, the state of the flag 203d does not change.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is determined to be the probability change jackpot, or when the jackpot type is determined to be the normal jackpot, the state of the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is set. , The state of the flag 203d may be set before the big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10 after the big hit type is determined.

  The big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit. When the big hit flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit, and when the big hit flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit. The big hit flag 203e is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not the winning has occurred during the big hit or other than the big hit when the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning). Used by

  In the present embodiment, when the ball has won the first ball entry opening 64 (starting winning), if the big hit flag 203e is on, it is assumed that the winning has occurred during the big hit, and the ball is first hit. If the big hit flag 203e is turned off when a win is made to the mouth 64 (start winning), it is assumed that the win has occurred other than during the big hit.

  This big hit flag 203e is set to OFF as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S714 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, the big hit flag 203d is set on when the big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10 (see S315 in FIG. 21), and is set off when the big hit ends (see S914 in FIG. 27).

  The pre-reading execution flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the new ball when the ball newly enters the first ball entrance 64. When the prefetch execution flag 203f is on, it indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is to be prefetched for a new entry, and when the prefetch execution flag 203f is off, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the new entry is displayed. Indicates not to read ahead.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of holdings of the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 reaches the maximum value (four times in the present embodiment), the ball enters the first entrance 64. Even if the ball is newly entered into the ball opening 64, further starting winnings are not suspended. That is, even if the ball enters the first entrance hole 64, the counter value (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a) associated with the entering ball are not obtained, and they are It is not held in the held ball storage area 203b.

  The prefetch execution flag 203f is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether to prefetch the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for a new ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. Then, when the ball enters the first entrance port 64, if the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, if it is not the maximum value) except for the newly entered ball, the look-ahead is performed. The execution flag 203f is set to ON (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, if the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203 c is 4 (that is, if it is the maximum value), the prefetch execution is performed. The flag 203f is kept off (see S203: No in FIG. 20). After the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to OFF when the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery ends (see S516 in FIG. 23).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the state of the prefetch execution flag 203f is set. However, the state of the flag 203f indicates that the ball is in the first entry position. What is necessary is just to set so that it may be set after the ball enters the ball opening 64 and before the prefetch execution process (see S107 in FIG. 19) described later is executed.

  The jackpot-winning prize flag 203g is determined by the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the prize-winning game state flag) acquired with the prize (starting prize) to the first entrance 64. It is a flag indicating whether the game has been acquired by a start winning prize, a prize other than during a jackpot, or obtained.

  When the big hit prize flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the data acquired in accordance with the prize (starting prize) to the first entrance 64 is obtained by the starting prize during the big hit. When the middle prize flag 203g is off, it indicates that the data acquired with the prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 is data obtained by a start prize other than the big hit. The jackpot-winning prize flag 203g indicates whether the prefetching is performed by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability or the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. Used by MPU 201 to determine whether to do so.

  When the jackpot-winning prize flag 203g is off, the MPU 201 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching based on the state of the above-mentioned prize-winning game state flag (that is, the prize-winning game state flag 203a). On the other hand, when the big hit prize flag 203g is ON, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching are determined based on the state of the post-big hit game state flag 203d.

  More specifically, when the big hit prize flag 203g is off and the prize-winning game state flag is off, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is referred to, while the big hit prize flag 203g is turned off. In this case, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read.

  In addition, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on and the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to. On the other hand, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on, If the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is on, the pre-read of the jackpot lottery result is performed by referring to the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  When the ball has newly entered the first entrance opening 64, the above described jackpot winning prize flag 203g indicates that the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 except for the newly entered ball (ie, that If it is not the maximum value, and if the big hit flag 203e is on (that is, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit), it is set to on (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when a ball newly enters the first entrance hole 64, the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, it is not the maximum value) except for the newly entered ball. If the big hit flag 203e is off (that is, the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit), it is set to off (see S211 in FIG. 20). When a ball newly enters the first entrance hole 64, if the number of retained balls counter 203c is 4 (that is, if it is the maximum value), except for the newly entered ball, a big hit occurs. The state of the winning flag 203g is not changed (S203: No in FIG. 20).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the state of the big hit prize flag 203g is set, but the state of the flag 203g is that the ball is in the first position. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be set after the ball enters the entrance 64 and before the prefetch execution process (refer to S107 of FIG. 19) mentioned later is performed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main control device 110 and the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning state gaming state flag) ) Are acquired and stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern type are read in advance.

  When the success or failure of the lottery result is predicted, first, one of the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used for prediction is determined. The value of the random number per hit counter C1 is compared with the value of random numbers (hit value) stored in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prediction, and if any of them matches, it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit. Predicted (determined).

  In the present embodiment, if the data acquired along with the start winning is obtained by starting winning other than during the big hit, whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a low probability state or a high probability state It is determined whether or not there is, and if the gaming state at the time of winning is the low probability state, the success or failure is predicted using the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a high probability state, the success or failure is predicted using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2.

  More specifically, if the big hit prize flag 203g is off, and if the prize-winning game state flag in the data acquired with the prize is off, the low-probability big-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 is used. If the winning gaming state flag is ON, the winning / non-winning is predicted using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the data acquired along with the start winning prize is obtained by the start winning prize during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the end of the jackpot. It is determined whether the gaming state is set to the high probability state or not. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at the end of the big hit, the success or failure is predicted using the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1. Is done. On the other hand, if the gaming state becomes the high probability state at the end of the big hit, the success or failure is predicted using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2.

  More specifically, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on and the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low-probability occasions is used to predict whether or not the jackpot is used. If the state flag 203d is on, the success or failure is predicted using the high-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a2. The reason why the method of determining the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is changed depending on whether the data acquired along with the start winning prize is obtained by the start winning prize during the jackpot or by the prize other than during the jackpot. Will be described later.

  Then, the success or failure of the lottery result is predicted, and as a result, if a jackpot is predicted, the type of the jackpot is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the jackpot type table (not shown). Then, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, if it is predicted that the result of the lottery is out of range, the type of stop at the time of out of range is predicted. Also in the case where the stop type at the time of departure is predicted, similarly to the case of the jackpot lottery, the acquired value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the value of the random number stored in the stop type selection table (not shown) Are compared, and the type of stop corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, when the variation pattern type is predicted, the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the variation pattern table, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, and the variation type is determined. The variation pattern type corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, as described above, when the pre-reading is executed in the main control device 110 and the correctness / non-permission and its type and the variation pattern type are predicted, the pre-read command including the prediction result is transmitted from the main control device 110 by voice. The lamp control device 113 is notified. The prefetch command will be described later. When receiving the pre-read command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect for a series of variable effects suspended at that time. Then, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be performed, the mode of the continuous announcement effect is further set.

  Here, the continuous announcement effect will be described. The continuous announcement effect is a kind of announcement effect that suggests (notices) that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the prize (starting prize) to the first entrance 64 is likely to be a jackpot, An effect in which a chance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variable effect over all the variable effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous announcement effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the suspended fluctuation effect, the player is provided with a feeling of expectation to be a big hit after all of the suspended fluctuation effects are completed. You can have it. In the present embodiment, when a continuous announcement effect is performed over all the variable effects that are suspended at the time of winning, a chance is displayed in each of the variable effects, but the same character or the same character is used in each of the variable effects. You may be comprised so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. Also, the display may be such that the number of the same character or the number of characters related to the same character is increased each time the variable effect is performed. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the variable effect different from the normal effect has been performed, and thus can recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot will be obtained after all of the suspended variable effects have been completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the suspended fluctuation effect, when the fluctuation effect ends on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol (for example, FIG. On the activated line L1 shown in FIG. 4, "3", "4", and "1" are displayed in the main symbol combination in order from the left symbol row Z1. Then, among the series of variable effects in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, for the last variable effect, no chance symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  Usually, the player pays attention to the fluctuating effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game. Therefore, by displaying the chance eyes continuously as a stop symbol appearing after the stop of the fluctuating effect. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been performed. Further, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eyes are displayed, so that the player feels the expectation that the jackpot will be obtained after the end of the continuous announcement effect. You can have.

  Next, referring to FIG. 8, a description will be given of a prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110. The look-ahead command is a prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the look-ahead (whether the jackpot lottery is successful, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the stop type at the time of a miss in the case of a miss, the variation pattern type), and the lottery result in the prefetch When a prediction is made, the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, referred to as a “prediction precondition”) which is a precondition for the prediction. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted on the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Specifically, it means that the main control device 110 has used the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to predict the lottery result. On the other hand, when the prediction precondition is the high probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted on the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Specifically, it means that the main control device 110 has predicted the lottery result using the jackpot random number table for high probability time 202a2.

  FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. In FIG. 8, the left direction is the upper bit direction of data and the right direction is the lower bit direction of data. In this embodiment, each command is composed of 2 bytes regardless of the type of the command. Data indicating the type of the command is stored in the upper 1 byte, and the lower 1 byte is stored in the lower 1 byte. , Data serving as parameters of the command are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, data indicating that the command is a prefetch command is stored in the upper one byte of the prefetch command, and data serving as a parameter of the prefetch command is stored in the lower one byte. Have been.

  Specifically, the prediction prerequisite for the prefetch is indicated by the most significant bit of the eight bits forming the lower one byte. The lower three bits following the most significant bit indicate the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the lower three bits following the three bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lot indicate the prediction result of the variation pattern type. Is shown. Note that other information is indicated for the least significant bit.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the precondition for the prefetching is that if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates a low probability state, and the most significant bit of the lower byte is If “1” is stored, it indicates a high probability state. In other words, if the most significant bit of the lower byte is “0”, it means that the main control device 110 has predicted the lottery result using the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1. When the upper bit is “1”, it means that the main control device 110 has predicted the lottery result by using the high-probability occasional jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command is based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicates that if "000" is stored in the lower three bits following the most significant bit of the lower byte, it will be "completely out of order" that does not become a reach. Show. Similarly, if “001” is stored, it indicates “out-of-front-rear” in which a out-of-front-reach is generated. When "011" is stored, it indicates "15R normal jackpot". When "100" is stored, it indicates "2 probability variable jackpot". If "101" is stored, it indicates "15R probable big hit".

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b3), in the prediction result of the variation pattern type, “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following the 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command. Indicates that it is off (short off). Similarly, if “001” is stored, it indicates a miss (long out), if “010” is stored, it indicates normal reach, and if “011” is stored, it is super reach. , And if “100” is stored, it indicates that it is a special reach.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected, the main control device 110 executes the pre-reading process, and includes the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading in the pre-reading command, and By transmitting the information to the lamp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are configured to include both the case of the jackpot and the case of the miss, but each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of the miss. May be configured so as to be divided. Each reach in the case of a big hit and each reach in the case of a departure are configured separately, and further, the execution judgment of the continuous announcement effect in the sound ramp control device 113 is also taken into consideration in consideration of the prediction result of the variation pattern type. With such a configuration, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be determined under more detailed conditions by increasing the types of the prediction result of the variation pattern type notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, the control requiring pre-reading can be diversified, so that the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be more diversified.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 110 does not notify the audio lamp control device 113 only of whether the game is a jackpot or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the prefetch command. , Or "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out", and in the case of a big hit, notify whether it is "15R normal big hit", "2R probable big hit", or "15R probable big hit" I have. As a result, in comparison with the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is simply a notification of a miss or a jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform execution determination of a continuous announcement effect described later on more detailed conditions. For example, it is possible to diversify the control that requires pre-reading. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed more variously.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the result, divided into a 15R regular jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R probability variable jackpot. Although the prefetch command is configured as described above, it is a matter of course that the prefetch command may simply be configured to notify that a big hit has occurred. In addition, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur during the jackpot, the main control device 110 is divided into “15R jackpot” (corresponding to 15R regular jackpot and 15R probability variable jackpot) and “2R jackpot” (corresponding to 2R probability variable jackpot). The pre-read command may be configured so as to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from the. Alternatively, depending on whether or not the gaming state to be shifted to after the jackpot is a high probability state, the game state is divided into “probable jackpot” (15R certain jackpot and 2R jackpot) and “normal jackpot” (15R jackpot). The pre-read command may be configured so that the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the complete out, the out of front and back reach, and the reach other than the out of front and back. Although the pre-read command is configured as described above, the pre-read command may of course be configured to simply notify that the command is off. Further, the prefetch command may be configured to be separated into a case where a reach is generated or a case where a reach is completely performed. With this configuration, if the information content to be notified to the sound ramp control device 113 is reduced as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result of the present embodiment. It can be more simplified than in the case. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the control related to the pre-reading, suppress an increase in the load of the control related to the pre-reading, and direct the processing capability of the voice lamp control device 113 to other control. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require pre-reading while performing control by pre-reading.

  In addition, in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the pre-reading command, if the information content to be notified to the audio ramp control device 113 is simply reduced to “big hit” or “missing” as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 Then, the process based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared with the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the control related to the pre-reading, suppress an increase in the load of the control related to the pre-reading, and direct the processing capability of the voice lamp control device 113 to other control. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require pre-reading while performing control by pre-reading.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a description will be given of a fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the fanfare command. As in the case of FIG. 8, in FIG. 9, it is assumed that the left direction is the upper bit direction of the data and the right direction is the lower bit direction of the data. Of the two-byte command, data indicating the type of the command is stored in the upper one byte, and data serving as a parameter of the command is stored in the lower one byte.

  As described above, the fanfare command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 of the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. . Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and thereafter, when the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare command is sent from the main controller 110. It is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113.

  In the present embodiment, information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is included in the fanfare command. The game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is acquired. Although the details will be described later, the game state acquired here is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 determines a display mode of performing “fixed effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, data indicating that the command is a fanfare command is stored in the upper one byte of the fanfare command, and data serving as a parameter of the fanfare command is stored in the lower one byte. Have been.

  Specifically, the most significant bit of the eight bits forming the lower one byte indicates the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. That is, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is shown. Other information is indicated in the other lower 7 bits following the uppermost bit. As shown in FIG. 9B, if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “low probability state” at the end of the current big hit. When "1" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "high probability state" at the end of the current big hit.

  When the main control device 110 generates the fanfare command and the above-mentioned post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off, “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, and the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d Is ON, "1" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte.

  In the present embodiment, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a fanfare command. The main control device 110 may notify the sound ramp control device 113 of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, or an ending command. . That is, the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and further determines the type of the jackpot, and then determines whether the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by audio lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a command for notifying the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 by a fanfare command. When the stop type command notified from the control device 110 is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the stop type indicated by the stop type command is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on what the stop type indicates. The game state may be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  That is, in the main control device 110, when a jackpot lottery is performed, a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the determined stop type. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. It is shown whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the stop type command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the stop type indicated by the stop type command. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a continuous announcement determination table 222a. The RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 has a pre-reading information storage area 223a, a reserved ball count counter 223b, a post-big hit game state flag 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and an ending mode counter. 223f, a continuous notice lottery counter 223g, a continuous notice number counter 223h, and a post-notification big hit flag 223i are provided at least. For the sake of convenience, the continuous announcement determination table 222a in the ROM 222 will be described after the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g in the RAM 223.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is an area for storing various information (predictive preconditions, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and prediction results of the variation pattern type) notified from the main control device 110 by the prefetch command described above. is there.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The prefetch information storage area 223a has five areas, one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described jackpot lottery prediction result, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 stores information indicating the above-described fluctuation pattern type prediction result. This is an area for storing. Further, the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described prediction precondition for prefetching. Each area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is initialized in a RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to zero.

  Upon receiving the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 receives various information from the prefetch command (predictive preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and prediction results of the variation pattern type). Is extracted as prefetch information, and the extracted prefetch information is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Although details will be described later, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control device pre-reads the jackpot lottery result, only the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are controlled by the voice ramp control. The device was not notified. However, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result, in addition to the jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, further, a pre-reading prediction precondition Is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and the respective information is stored in the same holding area in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Therefore, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 for each reservation area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same reservation area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type are It is possible to determine what kind of prediction precondition was used for prefetching. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the pre-read was performed in main controller 110.

  In the case where the extracted prefetch information is stored in the reserved area, among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), the area numbers (first to fourth) of the reserved areas are stored. Data is stored in order from the smallest area. In other words, the data corresponding to the earlier start winning prize is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area.

  More specifically, in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the same data (see FIG. 8B2) as the data indicating the big hit lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the pre-read command is completely out of order, “000” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Similarly, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out-of-order reach, “001” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. “010” is stored in the prediction result storage area 223a1. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R normal jackpot, “011” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored. If it is a 2R probability change jackpot, "100" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R probability change jackpot, "101" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Is stored.

  Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b3)) as the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type indicated by the pre-read command is out of range (out of short), “000” is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2. Similarly, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is out of range (out of length), “001” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, “010” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and “011” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is super reach. When the type prediction result is the special reach, “100” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2.

  Similarly, in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b1)) as the data indicating the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the low probability state, “0” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. Similarly, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the high probability state, “1” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In the present embodiment, the same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. The same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type, the same data as the data indicating the precondition for the prefetching, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type, prediction of the prefetching It is stored as information indicating the precondition, but is not necessarily limited to this. Data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command, data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the prediction precondition of the prefetch After converting the data shown to other data, the converted data As the information indicating the prediction result of the lucky lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage It may be stored in the area 223a3.

  Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110, audio ramp controller 113 shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area. . Specifically, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the execution area. Similarly, the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the suspension first area is shifted to the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the execution area, and The prediction precondition stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the area is shifted to the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area.

  When the shift of the data to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and the data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is replaced with the area number. A shift process is performed to fill one reserved area (reserved first area to reserved third area). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed on the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control load can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the reserved area (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) may be shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area), so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the look-ahead information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, as in the case of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110, one execution area and four reserved areas (the reserved first area) To a reserved fourth area). This is because data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. That is, the prefetch information corresponding to the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Similarly, the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a stores the prefetch information corresponding to the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a stores the reserved ball. The look-ahead information corresponding to the reserved second area of the storage area 203b is stored, and the look-ahead information corresponding to the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved third area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a. The prefetch information corresponding to the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved fourth area of the information storage area 223a.

  As will be described in detail later, when the ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance, the main controller 110 acquires data associated with the new starting winning and stores the data in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is newly stored in the holding area, and the pre-reading is performed for the starting prize. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetch and a precondition of the prefetch prediction is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. You. When the pre-read command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, various information and prediction preconditions are extracted as pre-read information from the pre-read command, and the pre-read information is newly stored in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. (See S1210 in FIG. 31). Thus, every time a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance, data accompanying the starting winning is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device, and the like. The pre-read information storage area 223a stores the read-ahead information storage area 223a.

  When the jackpot lottery is newly started in main controller 110, a shift process is performed for each area of reserved ball storage area 203b (see 307 in FIG. 21). Then, when a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, a fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 along with the jackpot lottery. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and performs the setting for the fluctuation display, the shift processing is performed for each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (see S1506 in FIG. 38). As described above, each time a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113 are respectively Shift processing is performed. Accordingly, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio ramp control device 113.

  The above-mentioned prefetch information storage area 223a is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect. When the sound ramp control device 113 stores new look-ahead information in the reserved area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a with the reception of the above-described look-ahead command, the look-ahead information stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223a and the look-ahead information described later will be described. Based on the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b and the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g, it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous announcement effect for a series of variable effects suspended at that time.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit. When performing the ending effect that is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, the sound ramp control device 113 performs, based on the content of the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the state of the after-hit jackpot gaming state flag 223c, It is determined whether to perform “determined effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect.

  The reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect which are suspended in the control device 110. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number by the reserved ball number counter 223b. I have.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added due to the entry into first entrance port 64, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of added reserved ball number counter 203c. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 obtains the value of the reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the counter 223b (see S1208 in FIG. 31).

Further, in the main control device 110, when a new variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and the variable display to be started on the third symbol display device 81 is further performed. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the fluctuation display mode on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b. One is subtracted (see S1505 in FIG. 38).
As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203c.

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223b, and displays the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the control device 114, a display pending ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the display reserved device displays the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c is, like the post-big-hit gaming state flag 203d of the main control device 110, a special jackpot in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state. This is a flag indicating whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. If the post-big hit game state flag 223c is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state when the big hit has ended, and if the post-big hit game state flag 223c is on, the big hit will end. This indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high probability state when the game is performed.

  The post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c is set to an initial value of off by the initial value setting of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (see S1010 in FIG. 28). The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set when a fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1214 in FIG. 31). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and thereafter, when the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare is performed. A command is transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113. In this case, the main control device 110 generates a fanfare command including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, and the generated command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. .

  When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the fanfare command. That is, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted. If the extracted gaming state is the “low probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to off, and if the extracted gaming state is “high probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to on. Is done.

  The post-big hit game state flag 223c is used by the MPU 221 when the ending effect determination process (S1221 in FIG. 31) described later is executed. Although the details will be described later, when performing the ending effect which is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, based on the content of the above-mentioned reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the state of the after-hit jackpot game state flag 223c, It is determined whether to perform “determined effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set based on the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110. However, the main control device 110 The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c may be set based on the stop type command transmitted from the. That is, in the main control device 110, when a jackpot lottery is performed, a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the determined stop type. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. It is shown whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the stop type command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 can set the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c based on the stop type indicated by the stop type command.

  Specifically, if the stop type indicated by the stop type command is a probable change big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit can be determined to be the high probability state, and thus the after-big hit gaming state flag 223c is turned on. Set to. On the other hand, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a normal jackpot, it is possible to determine that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a low probability state, and thus the gaming state flag 223c after the jackpot is set to OFF. I do. When the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set by the stop type command, the fanfare command does not need to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. good.

  In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is newly provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Configure it. Then, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c may be set based on a new command transmitted from the main control device 110. Note that the method of setting the post-big hit game state flag 223c may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described fanfare command, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command does not need to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fanfare command is received, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set, but the state of the flag 223c will be described later after the fanfare command is received. The setting may be made before the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is started. Note that, even when the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set when the stop type command is received, the state of the flag 223c is determined by the ending effect determination process described later after the stop type command is received. It may be configured to set before the start. In addition, even if a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, and the new command is received, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may set before receiving the new command and before the ending effect determination process mentioned later is started.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1202 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1502 in FIG. 38). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1508 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h. It is determined whether the stop type is set to the chance.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “big hit”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1512 in FIG. 38). Also, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is "out of range" and the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38). reference). On the other hand, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out” and the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance type is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type. This is set (see S1513 in FIG. 38).

  The ending mode counter 223f is a counter used to determine the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed, for example, by adding one by one in the range of 0 to 3 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 wins a jackpot and determines the display mode in the ending effect, the value of the ending mode counter 223f and the ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 are used. It is determined whether the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table.

  Although the details will be described later, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and immediately before starting the ending effect described above, the contents of the reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and the contents described above are described. It is determined whether to acquire the value of the ending mode counter 223f based on the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c. Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is not acquired, the display mode is determined so as to perform “normal display” in the ending effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is obtained, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the “determined effect display” is displayed. The display mode of the ending effect is set to be performed (see S1414 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is other than a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that “normal display” is performed. (See S1415 in FIG. 33). That is, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is obtained, the display mode is determined so that the “determined effect display” is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the “normal display” is performed with the remaining 2/3 probability. Is determined in such a manner as to be performed.

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect (“normal display” or “fixed effect display”) is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. . Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that an ending effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous announcement effect, and is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is updated by, for example, adding one by one in the range of 0 to 127 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, based on the prediction result of the current prefetch, the type of the jackpot of the held jackpot, the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g, and the like, The start of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous advance lottery counter 223g is compared with a continuous advance determination table 222a (see FIG. 11) described below, and the value of the continuous advance lottery counter 223g is within a range predetermined in the continuous advance determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see S1315 and S1316 in FIG. 32).

  The continuous notice determination table 222a satisfies a predetermined condition (one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (refer to a continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)) when a prefetch command is received from main controller 110. If so, it is a table for setting the “continuous notice determination probability”. Here, the continuous announcement determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 should start the continuous announcement effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination table 222a has two tables: a large announcement continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and a missed continuous announcement determination table 222a2. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-read command received from the main control device 110 is "big hit", the sound ramp control device 113 selects the continuous jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the big hit lottery prediction result. Is "disconnected", the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection is selected. Thereby, the continuous announcement determination probability can be changed according to the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (whether it is "big hit" or "missing").

  Each of the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure is a value “1” that can be taken by the retained ball counter 223b (the number of times N of the variable display is retained) in the sound lamp control device 113. The range of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g that determines the start of the continuous announcement effect (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous announcement determination range”) is defined in association with “「 4 ”.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit defines “0” as the continuous announcement determination range in association with the value “1” of the retained ball number counter 223b, and the retained ball number counter The continuous notice determination range is defined as “0 to 15” in association with the value “2” of 223b, and the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0 to 39” in association with the value “3” of the reserved ball counter 223b. The continuous announcement determination range is defined as "0 to 63" in association with the value "4" of the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  In addition, the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of departure defines the continuous announcement determination range as "0" in association with the value "1" of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and sets the value "2" of the reserved ball number counter 223b. In association therewith, “0-9” is defined as the continuous announcement determination range, and “0-25” is defined as the continuous advancement determination range in association with the value “3” of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b. "0-39" is defined as the continuous announcement determination range in association with the value "4" of the counter 223b.

  When the pre-read command is received from main controller 110, sound ramp control device 113 satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of condition 1 to condition 3 described later (see continuous announcement determination process in FIG. 32)). If so, as the table for setting the continuous announcement determination probability, one of the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the miss is selected. Then, from the selected continuous announcement determination table, the continuous announcement determination range associated with the value of the number of retained balls counter 223b at that time is specified, and the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g at that time becomes the continuous advance determination range. If it is included, determine the start of the continuous announcement production.

  By the way, in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure are both defined such that the larger the value of the number-of-reserved-ball counter 223b, the wider the continuous announcement determination range. However, if the continuous announcement determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that the continuous announcement effect is to be performed, and the continuous announcement determination probability is increased. Therefore, the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the jackpot and the continuous announcement determination at the time of departure are performed. Both of the tables 222a2 mean that the larger the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b (the number of times N of the variable display is retained), the higher the continuous notice determination probability is defined. Here, since the continuous announcement effect is performed over all the variable effects that are suspended when the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement determination probability is set to be higher as the number of times of suspension is increased. Is likely to increase in the number of variable effects included in the continuous announcement effect of the above. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. Expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of times of suspension of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of times of suspension is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous announcement effect from being performed frequently. When it becomes large, it is possible to make the continuous announcement effect easy to be performed.

  In addition, when comparing the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of departure in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous announcement determination range associated with the same value of the retained ball number counter 223b is: It is defined that the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit is the same as or wider than the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure. That is, the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "out". Is also set to be high. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game state is likely to be "big hit" after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation. In addition, the probability that the gaming state (ie, the result of the lottery performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64) after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “big hit” is usually smaller than the probability of “missing”. Is also set to be small, so that if the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “out of place”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous announcement effect is not frequently performed, while if the game state is “big hit”, Thus, it is possible to easily perform a continuous announcement effect.

  In addition, in the sound ramp control device 113, not only is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-read command received from the main control device 110 "big hit", but the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "out", and Also in the case where the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “reach out of order”, the permission of the continuous announcement effect is determined. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous announcement effect even when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “out-of-front-reach reach”, so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be performed under various conditions. Can be performed. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the lottery continues to be missed as a result of the lottery, the continuous announcement effect is provided, so that the player can have a high sense of expectation and prevent the player from getting bored. be able to.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The continuous notice number counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The initial value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the number of retained balls counter 223b at that time is determined. Is stored (see S1317 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance type is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type (see S1513 in FIG. 38), and the set stop type is determined. Is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. Also, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is reduced by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 38).

  The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. When the chance type is set as the stop type, for example, on the activated line L1 shown in FIG. A symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38), and the set stop is performed. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. Note that the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is kept at 0 (see S1515: No in FIG. 38). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1, since the execution of the continuous notice effect is the last variable effect set, the stop type is set. Like the case where the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 32), and the set stop type is set to the display stop type. The display control device 114 is notified by a command. However, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is decreased by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 32).

  As described above, as long as the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, every time the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, a chance is set as the stop type, and the set stop type is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol serving as a chance is displayed.

  Here, the continuous announcement number counter 223h stores the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b at the time when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined. , If the value is 1 or more, the value is reduced by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, a stop symbol serving as a chance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the variable effects suspended in the main control device 110. That is, the stop symbols serving as chances are continuously displayed.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the variable effect that is most closely watched during the game. Further, even when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eyes are displayed, so that the player has an expectation that the jackpot can be obtained after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Can be made.

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is referred to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect has already been set (FIG. 32). S1305). When the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0 (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 32), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set in all the variable effects suspended in the main control device 110. It is determined that (Condition 1) is satisfied among the above predetermined conditions, and the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the process related to the continuous announcement effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, and wins the first ball entrance 64. The lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the game state flag at the time of the prize) acquired according to the (start winning), and various information ( The prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the prediction precondition of the prefetch are included in the prefetch command, and are notified to the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the prefetch command, stores them as prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223a, and determines the start of the continuous announcement effect according to the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223a. to decide. When the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the setting of the stop type is performed for each of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  The post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is obtained by storing the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b in the continuous announcement number counter 223h, thereby executing all of the continuous announcement effects set for the plurality of variable effects. It is a flag indicating the game state after the fluctuation effect. When the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the game state after the variable effect after all the continuous announcement effects have been executed becomes the "big hit" state, When the value is off, it indicates that the game state after the variable effect after all the continuous notice effects have been executed becomes the "out" state. Note that the variable effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is a variable effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1.

  The post-announcement jackpot flag 223i indicates the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the look-ahead command when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the look-ahead command received from the main control device 110. If it is "big hit", it is set to on (see S1319 in FIG. 32), and if the prediction result of the big hit lottery extracted from the prefetch command is "out", it is set to off (see S1320 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is held until the next start of the continuous announcement effect is determined.

  When it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is being executed when the pre-read command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i (see S1307 in FIG. 32). Then, when the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is on (see S1307: Yes in FIG. 32), the game after the variable announcement after the continuous announcement effect is performed in all the variable announcements for which the continuous announcement effect is set. Since the state is the “big hit” state, furthermore, between the variable effect (reserved ball) corresponding to the received look-ahead command and the last variable effect (reserved ball) for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, 2 It is determined whether or not the above-described fluctuating effect (reserved ball) exists (that is, whether the difference between the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 3 or more), and It is determined whether or not (condition 2) is satisfied among the conditions (see S1309 in FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, when the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is off (see S1307: No in FIG. 32), the game after the variable effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the "out" state, it is further determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery newly notified by the look-ahead command is "big hit", and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3) Is determined (see S1311 in FIG. 32).

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first ball opening 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to be activated at the timing of the new starting winning. And the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning state gaming state flag). Then, when the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern The type is pre-read in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the prediction prerequisites together with the various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device by the pre-reading command described above. 113 is notified. Upon receiving the pre-read command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts various information from the command as pre-read information and stores it in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. The pre-read information stored here is used by the sound lamp control device 113 when the display mode of the ending effect is set or when it is determined whether to start the continuous announcement effect.

  However, as described later, in both the pachinko machine 10 and the conventional pachinko machine, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by prefetching and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are determined by the main controller 110. May differ. This means that when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance opening 64, there is a pending starting winning and a jackpot is drawn with the held starting winning. The lottery result is a big hit, which is caused by a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before and after the big hit.

  In other words, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 is held a plurality of times (up to four times in the present pachinko machine 10). In the main control device 110, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a pending start winning, the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is performed. After the result is read in advance, the jackpot lottery associated with each new start prize that has been held at the time of the new start prize has been completed, and then the big jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed.

  Then, the jackpot lottery associated with each starting prize held at the time of the new starting prize is executed by the main controller 110, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 Is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize. I will.

  In the conventional pachinko machine main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for pre-reading the jackpot lottery result are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning, and further, in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start winning prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting prize, it is used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery lottery result. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the respective comparison results do not match. The main controller 110 may differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning match and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery associated with the new starting winning match, it is used for pre-reading the lottery result of the big hit lottery. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 correspond to the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the prediction results correspond to each other. The main control device 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed. It was not configured so as to be able to determine whether or not it was obtained using 202a2. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113, audio ramp control device 113 also determines which table 202a1, 202a2 the prediction result was obtained from. could not.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, both the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result. The main control device 110 performs the same game state. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are always stored in the main control device 110. Matches. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110. The jackpot lottery results were treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the main controller 110 and before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. It becomes unknown in which gaming state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. Was treated as untrustworthy.

  If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the audio ramp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine refrains from using the prediction result, and performs processing irrelevant to the actual jackpot lottery result (for example, Continuous announcement effects, ending effects, etc.). For this reason, the pre-reading of the jackpot effect lottery results and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery have been wasted.

  On the other hand, for example, if the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to use all the obtained jackpot lottery prediction results so that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained in the main control device 110 is not wasted, As described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, there is a problem that a process unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. In any case, as described above, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a pending start winning, and the starting which has been held is When a jackpot lottery is performed along with a prize, the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes before and after the jackpot.

  Here, with reference to each of FIGS. 53 to 55, a description will be given of a problem that occurs when the display mode of the ending effect that is a part of the big hit effect is determined using the prediction result of the big hit lottery. Note that the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery immediately before the ending effect is started. In addition, to make the explanation easy to understand, here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, “determined effect display” is always selected in the ending effect. Then, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning is selected.

  Each of FIGS. 53 to 55 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the big hit lottery during the big hit effect. First, an example of the problem will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 53 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed, and the variable effect is further performed. Shows a state in which start winning prizes A and B have occurred during the execution of. In addition, in the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize A, it is assumed that the lottery result is lost regardless of the gaming state (low-probability state, high-probability state) of the pachinko machine. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be off.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when the start winning prize A occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the prefetch A of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. When the start winning prize A occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, so the high probability state is selected as the precondition for the prediction of the prefetch A. As a result, when the prefetch A of the lottery result is performed for the start winning A, the prediction result of the prefetch A is out of order. Also, at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize B, similarly to the case of the starting winning prize A, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state. As a result, when the pre-reading B of the lottery result is performed for the start winning B, the predicted result of the pre-reading B becomes a probability change jackpot.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. Since the big hit is usually a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine remains in the low-probability state even after the big hit production ends. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize A is performed, and a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize A is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state.

  Therefore, although the high-probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetch A is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the starting winning A is performed in the low-probability state, so that the prediction result of the prefetch A and the actual lottery result are different. It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for the winning start A, both the prediction result of the pre-reading A and the actual lottery result are accidentally out of alignment, so that the respective lottery results match.

  In addition, as in the case of the start winning A, the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning B is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state. Therefore, also in this case, although the high-probability state is selected and the pre-reading B is performed as the prediction precondition, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize B is performed in the low-probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result will be different. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the prediction result of the pre-reading B is a jackpot, but the actual lottery result is out of order and the respective lottery results do not match.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to simply determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the look-ahead, the prediction result of the look-ahead B is a jackpot. It is determined that some of the lottery results have a big hit, and as a result, “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “confirmed effect display”, it is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery held with the end of the big hit, and thus the “confirmed effect display” is performed. The player has an expectation that if one of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot.

  However, after that, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and even if the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A, B held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out of order. It does not really hit the jackpot. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, Actually, there is a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. In other words, there arises a problem that a process (for example, an effect or the like) irrelevant to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed by giving the player a useless expectation, which lowers the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  Subsequently, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 54 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a probable big hit, and a fluctuating effect corresponding to the probable big hit is executed. Shows the state in which start winning prizes C and D occur during the execution of. In addition, in the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C, the lottery result is assumed to be lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will normally be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the start winning prize C occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the look-ahead C of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. At the time of occurrence of the start winning prize C, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state. As a result, when the pre-reading C of the lottery result is performed for the start winning C, the predicted result of the pre-reading C is out of order. Also, when the start winning D occurs, similarly to the start winning C, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state, and therefore, the low probability state is selected as the precondition for predicting the prefetch D. As a result, when the prefetch D of the lottery result is performed for the start winning D, the prediction result of the prefetch D usually becomes a big hit.

  After that, even if the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low-probability state in the first place, so that the pachinko machine continues to be in a low-probability state. It should be noted that the jackpot this time is a probable jackpot, and when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C is performed, and a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize C is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead C is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize C is performed in the high probability state, so that the prediction result of the look-ahead C and the actual lottery result are different. It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), for the start winning prize C, both the prediction result of the pre-reading C and the actual lottery result are out of alignment, so that the respective lottery results match.

  The jackpot lottery associated with the start winning D is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as in the case of the starting winning D. Therefore, also in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead D is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning D is performed in the high probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result is different. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 54B, the prediction result of the prefetch D is usually a big hit, but the actual lottery result is out of order, and each lottery result does not match.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to simply determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the look-ahead, the predicted result of the look-ahead D is a jackpot. It is determined that some of the lottery results have a big hit, and as a result, “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “confirmed effect display”, it is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery held with the end of the big hit, and thus the “confirmed effect display” is performed. The player has an expectation that if one of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot.

  However, after that, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and even if the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C and D held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out of order. It doesn't really hit the jackpot. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, Actually, there is a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. In other words, there arises a problem that a process (for example, an effect or the like) irrelevant to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed by giving the player a useless expectation, which lowers the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  Next, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which a start winning prize E or F has occurred when the pachinko machine has become a jackpot and a jackpot effect associated with the jackpot has been executed. This shows a state in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine changes from a low probability state to a high probability state. As described above, the jackpot lottery is not performed while the pachinko machine is in the jackpot, but the gaming state is in the low probability state. In addition, in the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize E, it is assumed that the lottery result is lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine. If the gaming state is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the start winning prize E occurs during the execution of the big hit effect, the pre-reading E of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. At the time of occurrence of the start winning prize E, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state. As a result, when the pre-reading E for the start winning prize E is performed, the prediction result of the pre-reading E is incorrect. Also, when the start winning prize F occurs, as in the case of the starting winning prize E, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low-probability state. As a result, when the prefetching F of the lottery result is performed for the start winning F, the prediction result of the prefetching F becomes a probability change jackpot.

  Thereafter, when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. First, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize E is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, a large jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize F is performed, and the variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed. Be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize E is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the pre-reading E is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the starting winning E is performed in the high probability state, so that the prediction result of the pre-reading E and the actual lottery result are It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for the start winning prize E, both the prediction result of the pre-reading E and the actual lottery result are out of alignment, so that the respective lottery results match.

  The jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize F is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as in the case of the starting prize F. Therefore, also in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead F is performed, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the start winning F is performed in the high probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result is different. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the prediction result of the pre-reading F is a probability change jackpot, but the actual lottery result is out of order and the respective lottery results do not match.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to simply determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the look-ahead, the predicted result of the look-ahead F is a jackpot. It is determined that some of the lottery results have a jackpot, and as a result, “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “confirmed effect display”, it is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery held with the end of the big hit, and thus the “confirmed effect display” is performed. The player has an expectation that if one of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot.

  However, after that, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and even if the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prizes E and F held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out of order. It doesn't really hit the jackpot. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, Actually, there is a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. In other words, there arises a problem that a process (for example, an effect or the like) irrelevant to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed by giving the player a useless expectation, which lowers the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use all the prediction results of the jackpot lottery so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery are not wasted, There is a problem that processing unrelated to the lottery result (for example, an effect) is executed. As described above, all of these problems are caused by the fact that when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a pending start winning and a jackpot associated with the pending starting winning. In the lottery, the lottery result is a big hit, which is caused by a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before and after the big hit.

  That is, as described above, in the main control device 110, when a new start winning is made, if there is a pending start winning, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start winning is read in advance, After all the jackpot lotteries associated with each start winning prize held at the time of the new starting prize are completed, the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed. Therefore, the jackpot lottery associated with each starting prize held at the time of the new starting prize is executed in the main control device 110, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. , The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize. I will.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for pre-reading the jackpot lottery result are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning. Further, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize, the pachinko machine is used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead.

  Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the comparison are different, it is highly likely that the respective comparison results do not match. In some cases, the main control device 110 may differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result. Then, such a prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when used in the audio ramp control device 113, a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result. ) Is performed.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 He treated the prediction results of the lottery as unreliable and refrained from using those prediction results. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  In order to solve this, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows, for example, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result corresponding to each of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. It is conceivable that it is possible to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to, and to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the result.

  With such a configuration, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is used in the audio lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can be always treated as being reliable. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit random number table 202a1 and 202a2 are stored as in the case of the jackpot lottery. A process of comparing the hit values with each other one by one is performed. Therefore, every time a new start winning is generated, a process of comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one, It must be repeated up to 33 times. Therefore, each time a new start prize is generated, the comparison process may take a long time every time, and the time may be wasted.

  The main controller 110 uses the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to obtain prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively. In such a case, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, some of the comparison processes that may take time in main controller 110 are wasted. Further, the main control unit 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start prize is won, but the voice lamp control unit 113 uses only one prediction result, so that useless prediction results always occur. Therefore, the number of wasteful prediction results increases as compared with the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, and therefore requires a larger storage area than in the related art. Further, main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio ramp control device 113, respectively, so that data transmitted from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read in the main control device 110, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained by using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to and to notify the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as an increase in processing time and control load occur.

  Alternatively, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main controller 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the end of the current jackpot to pre-read each of the pending start winnings. It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the prediction results obtained by the redoing, respectively.

  With this configuration, in the main control device 110, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed and before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, instead, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 is performed instead. The result can be used as trustworthy.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, the pre-reading for each pending start winning in the main controller 110 is redone, and each prediction result obtained in the redo is the main result. The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 again. Therefore, the look-ahead of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery targeted for re-execution and the prediction results are wasted.

  Therefore, useless processing is performed in main controller 110, and a control burden is imposed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives a useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also performs useless processing, and the control burden is increased. Hangs. Further, the data transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the time of the end of the current big hit to start each of the pending start winnings. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 again of the prediction results obtained by rereading the pre-reading of the Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as increased useless processing and increased control load arise.

  Alternatively, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main control device 110 sets a jackpot random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. It is conceivable that prefetching is performed for each pending start winning using 202a1 and 202a2, and each prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 can perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the pre-reading is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot is completed. . Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the sound lamp controller 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Can be treated as Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed, so that the number of prefetching (frequency) is reduced. Then, the number of prediction results of the jackpot lottery notified from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 also decreases, so that the frequency of using the prediction results of the jackpot lottery in the audio ramp control device 113 decreases, and Opportunities to execute the notice production will be reduced. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting.

  As described above, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the main control device 110 responds to the game state at the end of the big hit only when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize, and to notify each prediction result from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. However, although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results is reduced, and there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting. Occurs.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 stores prediction preconditions, and uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, and The big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 that are to be used in the actual big hit lottery are determined. As a result, it is possible to handle more reliable prediction results without causing a problem that useless processing and control load increase, and a problem that the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result decreases.

  That is, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, when the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. It becomes unknown in which gaming state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. It was not possible to determine whether they matched. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. Was treated as untrustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the voice lamp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the big random number table 202a1, which is used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, is stored. Whether the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead can always be determined by the audio ramp control unit 113. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine as being reliable even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. The jackpot lottery prediction result can be appropriately handled.

  More specifically, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, data accompanying a new starting winning is acquired in main controller 110, and the data is stored in reserved ball storage area 203b. Is newly stored in the holding area, and the pre-reading is performed for the start winning. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetch and a precondition of the prefetch prediction is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. You.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the precondition of the prefetch are extracted as prefetch information from the prefetch command. The prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Thereby, when using the pre-read information in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is obtained by the pre-read based on which game state by referring to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information. Can be determined. That is, the main controller 110 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used to obtain the jackpot lottery prediction result.

  Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot are changed from the main controller 110 by the sound lamp by the fanfarre command. The control device 113 is notified. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change, the newly set gaming state can be notified to the sound lamp control device 113 again by the fanfare command.

  When the fan lamp command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the game state from the fan fare command, and sets the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c according to the game state. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the big hit is completed in the main control device 110 based on the after-big hit game state flag 223c. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current big hit is completed.

  As described above, since the sound premise condition and the post-big-hit game state flag 223c are stored in the sound ramp control device 113, when using the pre-read information in the sound lamp control device 113, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed. The main control device 110 can determine whether the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled in the present embodiment, because the pachinko machine 10 may be able to handle the prediction result that was treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine, as the trusted result. . Therefore, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result becomes higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that, also in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number table 202a1 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching , 202a2 in the main controller 110, and if the tables 202a1, 202a2 do not match, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is the same as the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Since it is likely to be different, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is treated as unreliable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled, and problems such as execution of a process (for example, an effect) unrelated to the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is not necessary to obtain both prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, it is not necessary to reread the look-ahead for each pending start winning. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled without causing a problem such as an increase in processing time or a control load, or a problem such as a useless process or a control load.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like in the prefetch command, the main control device further includes information indicating the precondition of the prefetch prediction. Although the information is transmitted from 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, the information indicating the precondition for the prediction of the prefetch is only one bit. Further, the fan control command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, at the end of the jackpot. The information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the amount of data processed in the MPUs 201 and 221 is almost the same as in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 has the same design as that of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Since there are models, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1601 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 18) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a process of drawing the next one frame of image and a process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used when drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the above, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (the storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 39).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13C, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “「 ”is displayed on the display screen of the main image at power-on at the lower right of the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main controller 110. The result is judged, and when it is “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 13B is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable effect, and when it is “out of place”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Here, returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams illustrating three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 14B is for the back surface B corresponding to the “sky stage”, and FIG. 15 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B among the back surfaces A to C are images each of which is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is provided in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back surface C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating morning dawn is displayed. Then, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white with time, and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 15A, and the back images of FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15A and 15B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a 'or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image between FIGS. 15A and 15B is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed. By using the image data resident in the 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the rear surface B and the rear surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images shown in FIGS. 15A so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b). Thus, while the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B and 15C and FIGS. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear surface image. be able to.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position “b” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b 'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward.

  Here, returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numerals “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. It is. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, image data necessary for drawing an image thereafter, from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a fanfare data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, This is an area in which transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a fluctuation effect, a fanfare effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variable effect is started, if the stop type of the variable effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variable effect is 15R certain variation big hit, 2R If it is one of the probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will congratulate the jackpot. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery (performs a fixed effect display), or simply informs the player that the jackpot ends. This is an effect for notifying (performing normal display).

  By displaying the fixed effect in the ending effect, the player will be able to obtain a jackpot if one of the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot is performed after the jackpot ends. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the jackpot will surely be a big hit, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the player can be depressed. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or a plurality of pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the elapse of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, in the variable display data table, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage where the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variable symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 16) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the operation of the user, and thus the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and, as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the performance specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  The transfer data information includes a start address (storage source start address) and a final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and a start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 18) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Here, returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1605 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3205 in FIG. 50B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1901 in FIG. 41B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 41) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) (see S1909). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are executed.

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3101 in FIG. 50A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describing the contents of the instruction to draw an image with respect to is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 41 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S2805 in FIG. 47) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is stored before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes the transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S2807 in FIG. 47). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite of the transfer target. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3317 in FIG. 51). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3318 in FIG. 51). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3402 in FIG. 52).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 41B) is executed, it is performed (see S3402 of FIG. 52).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing started when the power is turned on, a main processing executed after the start-up processing, and a regular start-up (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, when the external output process of the main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to the maximum value. When they reach (899, 99, 99, 198, 250, respectively) in this embodiment, they are cleared to 0, respectively. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one round), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one round), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as an initial value of the second or random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting the variation pattern type of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the first ball entry is performed. A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the mouth 64 (S105). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a start winning, the amount of the ball is excluded. If the number of reserved balls is less than the maximum value (four balls), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of starting winning, and are stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is stored. Further, based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning) newly stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, a prefetch execution flag is set to prefetch the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. 203f is set to ON.

  After finishing the start winning process, it is next determined whether the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106). If the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106: Yes), the prefetch process is executed (S106: Yes). S107) For the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the prize-winning game state flag) newly stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the above-mentioned start prize processing, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read. . The details of the prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the prefetch execution flag 203f is off (S106: No), the process of S107 is skipped. Next, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Accordingly, when an external output process of a main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball (start win) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a start win, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are set. Is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read for the retained data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning). In order to do so, a process of setting the prefetch execution flag 203f to ON is performed.

  In this start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start win) (S201). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c (reservation of the variable effect suspended in the main control device 110) The number of balls N is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 4 or more. If there is (S203: No), the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (The number of reserved balls N) is incremented by 1 (S204), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value (the number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output processing of the main processing described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the 1st area to the 4th pending area, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the pending ball number counter 203c. And, each is held (stored) in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the reserved first area. . If the value of the added ball count counter 203c is “2”, the stored area of the reserved second area is “2”, and if the value of the added ball counter 203c is “3”, the reserved third area is “3”. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c after addition is "4" in each storage area, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved fourth area.

  Next, the game state flag 203a is set as a winning state game state flag, and corresponds to the value (N) indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203c among the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is stored in the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 of the winning area (S207). That is, in the process of S207, the game state flag at the time of winning is stored in the same holding area as the holding area in which the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the process of S206.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect has come, the MPU 201 sets the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the winning game state flag, It shifts to the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, a jackpot lottery and a determination of a variation pattern type are performed. As described above, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is used in a jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, determination of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  Next, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON (S208). Here, when the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, a prefetch process described later (see FIG. 23) is executed, and as a result, the data stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203b by the processes of S206 and S207 (each The lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read for each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning state gaming state flag). That is, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is also used for prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203e is on (S209). As described above, if the jackpot during flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and if the jackpot during flag 203e is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (during a high probability state or during a jackpot). During the low-probability state). If the big hit flag 203e is on (S209: Yes), it means that the current start winning is a big hit starting win, so the big hit winning flag 203g is set on (S210). The start winning process is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off (S209: No), it means that the current start winning is a win in the normal state, so the big hit winning flag 203g is set to off (S211). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The MPU 201 pre-reads the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S206 and S207. The state of the big hit prize flag 203g is referred to. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. That is, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the big hit. Therefore, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64 during the jackpot, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of starting winning, The state of the gaming state flag 203a is always off (low probability state), and as a result, the winning state gaming state flag is also always off.

  Therefore, if the data to be prefetched is obtained along with the start winning prize during the big hit, if the lottery result is predicted in accordance with the gaming state flag at the time of the prize in the data, the prediction precondition of the prefetching Is always in a low-probability state, the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result deteriorates. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, if the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start winning prize during the jackpot, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot The lottery result is predicted according to the state. In the processing of S209 to S211, it is determined whether or not the data acquired with the start winning prize is obtained with the start winning prize during the big hit, when the prefetching processing described later (see FIG. 23) is executed. The state of the big hit prize flag 203e is set so as to be possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the fluctuation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interruption processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S104). The fluctuation process (S104) controls the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203e is on and a big hit is currently being made (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. The big hit flag 203e is set to ON at the timing when the start of the big hit is set by the process of S315 described later, and thereafter, the timing of ending the big hit by the process of S914 of the big hit control process (see FIG. 27) described later. Is set to off.

  As a result of the determination in S301, if the big hit flag 203e is on and if the big hit is being made (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off and not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the first symbol display is performed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not fluctuating (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuating display on the first symbol display device 37 (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the retained balls of the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is acquired (S304), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the acquired reserved ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S305). As a result, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (reserved ball number N) exceeds 0 (S305: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start the execution of the fluctuation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (Number of reserved balls N) is decremented by 1 (S306). This is because one of the pending fluctuation effects is started to be executed by the later-described fluctuation start process (S308), and as a result, the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S307). The data shift process performed in the process of S307 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the reserved sphere storage area 203b toward the area having the smaller area number. Specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data.

  When the process of S307 is completed, next, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S308), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203c (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S305: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S309). In the process of S309, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the process is performed until the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S309: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S310), and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S310 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and when an external output process of a main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, a sound lamp is output. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demonstration command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect according to the demonstration command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after the elapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S311). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern type selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and the change time elapses. If not (S311: No), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S311: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a change start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the change start process, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The stop symbol (big hit type) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, a stop symbol (jackpot type) that becomes a 15R probable jackpot after a jackpot (the maximum jackpot changes to a high probability state after a 15 round jackpot) (a jackpot type) or a 2R jackpot (a maximum round number of 2 rounds) Stop symbol (jackpot type) that becomes a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot or stop symbol (jackpot type that becomes a 15R regular jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots) ) Is determined.

  Then, in this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hits occurs, and the red LED is turned on when the 15R normal change hits And the blue LED. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the processing of S312 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a big hit (S313). If the lottery result corresponding to the variable display is out of range (S313: No), the variable processing ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a jackpot (S313: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S314). Here, when the start of the jackpot is set, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process branches to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27) to execute the fanfare command. Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  After the processing of S314 is completed, the big hit flag 203e is set to ON (S315), the gaming state flag 203a is set to OFF (low probability state) (S316), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off (low probability state) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit. If the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a probability change jackpot, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON when the big hit ends, while the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a normal jackpot. If there is, even if the big hit ends, the state of the game state flag 203a is kept off.

  In the above-described fluctuation processing, the start of the big hit is set in the processing of S314, and subsequently, the big hit flag 203e is set to ON in the processing of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (see S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, S901: Yes (see FIG. 27) ) Branch. Therefore, in the big hit control process, when branching to S901: Yes, the big hit flag 203e may be set to ON. In other words, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON by the time of the start of the jackpot, any process may be executed.

  Next, a variation start process (S308), which is one of the variation processes performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S308). In the change start process (S308), a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. At the same time, an effect pattern (variable pattern type) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored. It is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 203a is on (high probability state) (S402). If the gaming state flag 203a is on (S402: Yes), two types of jackpot random number tables are prepared. The high probability probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is acquired from the 202a (S403). On the other hand, if the state of the gaming state flag 203a is off (S402: No), the large probability random number table 202a1 for low probability is acquired from the two types of the large number random number tables 202a prepared (S404).

  Then, the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 (S405). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 as random numbers (hit values) that are large hits at low probability. In addition, the random number table 202a2 for high probability at the time of high probability has 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” as random number values (winning value) which are to be a large hit at the time of high probability. , 298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892. In the process of S405, the random number value (winning value) stored in the obtained jackpot random number table is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401. Is determined.

  Then, it is determined whether the result of the comparison in the processing of S405 is a jackpot (S406). If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S406: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S401 is determined. Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the big hit type table described above (S407).

  In the process of S407, in the jackpot type table, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, that is, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. It is determined whether it is a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R regular jackpot whose maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot whose maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (the lighting state of the LED 37a) on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is, The display mode at the time of the big hit in the three symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S401 and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for the big hit, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of the big hit is determined (S408). In the process of S408, the large hit type determined in the process of S407 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 are selected from among various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and 2R variations A to C. The associated fluctuation pattern type at the time of the big hit is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S408, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the variation symbol type stops at the big hit symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  When the processing of S408 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the processing of S407 is a probability change jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, if the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (S409: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot starts, and thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot ends. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the post-big hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state after the big hit is finished is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S414. On the other hand, in the process of S409, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot (S409: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot starts, and thereafter, the jackpot ends. However, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in the low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the post-big hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state after the big hit is completed is set to off (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S406: No), the display mode at the time of departure is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401. The stop type to be displayed is set to any of reach before and after, reach other than before and after, and complete stop. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of departure is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to S414. In the process of S413, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the symbol is stopped and displayed with a missing symbol. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at normal time excluding the time reduction state, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach, various deviations. From the various types of super reach and various types of special reach, the type of stop pattern set in the process of S412 and the type of variation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 are determined.

  Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of a probability change, the short reach, the long release, the various normal reach, and the super reach are based on the variation pattern table for the deviation (probability). From the various types and various types of special reach, the type of variation at the time of disconnection that is associated with the stop type set by the process of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired by the process of S401 is determined. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S414, based on the variation pattern type determined by the processes of S408 and S413, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S414). . Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S412 is set (S415), and the process returns to the fluctuation process. These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and when an external output process of a main process described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is executed, these commands are output. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d (S410 and S411) is set in the change start processing. In step S902, the process is referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, the timing may be set at any timing before the processing of S902 is performed.

  Next, the prefetching process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In this pre-reading process, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a winning game state flag) accompanying the detection of the start winning is newly obtained in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20), and the pre-read execution flag is obtained. This processing is executed when 203f is set to ON, and prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the prize-winning game state flag stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b lastly. Is read (S501). The data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is specified based on the reserved ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the reserved first area is specified as the data finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Similarly, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the reserved second area is 3. When the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b is 3, the data stored in the reserved third area is reserved. When the value of the ball number counter 203b is 4, the data stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the data finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the winning gaming state flag acquired in the processing of S501 is on (high probability state) (S502). In the processing of S502, when the winning gaming state flag is ON (S502: Yes), the precondition for prefetching is set to the high probability state, that is, the premise that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. This is a case where prefetching is performed under a condition. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot random number table for high probability 202a2 is obtained from the jackpot random number tables 202a prepared in two types (S505), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the winning state gaming state flag is off (S502: No), it is determined whether the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on (S503).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, when the data to be prefetched is acquired with the start winning prize during the big hit, the winning gaming state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state. Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted in accordance with the winning game state flag in the data, the prediction precondition for the prefetch is always in a low probability state, and the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result. As a result, the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result becomes poor.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for a winning start during a big hit, the game state at the end of the big hit is pre-read as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is improved. That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main control device 110, the type of the big hit is further determined, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit. Then, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the current big hit type. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined by the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, but when the pachinko machine 10 is performing the jackpot, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot has already been determined. The main control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the big hit.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is completed, if there is a jackpot lottery held in the main controller 110, the held jackpot lottery is performed one by one in the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. It is executed in main controller 110 in order. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when performing a look-ahead for a start winning prize during a jackpot, it is better to set the prediction precondition to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than to always set the prediction precondition to the low probability state. The possibility that the main control device 110 will match the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the predicted result in the main control device 110 can be improved. Therefore, the number of prediction results that can be treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be increased, and in this embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  Specifically, in the processing of S503, if the big hit prize flag 203g is off and a prize is made during the normal state (S503: No), the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the process of S503, if the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is on and a winning is started during the jackpot (S503: Yes), it is determined whether the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is on (high probability state). (S504). As described above, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit, and the above-described fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is Is determined, the state of the flag 203d is set. Therefore, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is already set before the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit. Therefore, when a winning start is made during the big hit, the look-ahead for the start winning can be predicted based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit (the state of the game state after the big hit 203d).

  Then, in the processing of S504, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is ON (S504: Yes), the winning is started during the big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit has a high probability. Since it is in the state, the process proceeds to S505, the jackpot random number table for high probability 202a2 is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S507. In the process of S504, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off (S504: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is in a low probability state, although the start winning is achieved during the big hit. Since this is the case, the process proceeds to S506. In the process of S506, the big random number table 202a1 for low probability is acquired (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, the success or failure is predicted by comparing the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S505 or S506 with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 (S507). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 as random numbers (hit values) that are large hits at low probability. In addition, the random number table 202a2 for high probability at the time of high probability has 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” as random number values (winning value) which are to be a large hit at the time of high probability. , 298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892. In the process of S405, the random number value (winning value) stored in the obtained jackpot random number table is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401. Predict that

  Then, as a result of the comparison in the processing of S507, when it is predicted that the jackpot is a jackpot (S508: Yes), the jackpot type and the variation pattern type are predicted (S509), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S509, first, in the above-described jackpot type table, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 is determined. Predict. Next, in the above-described jackpot variation pattern table, the jackpot variation pattern types (normal reach various types, Predict various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and 2R fluctuations A to C).

  If it is predicted in the processing of S508 that the hit is not a big hit (S508: No), the type of stop at the time of departure and the type of variation pattern are predicted (S510), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S510, first, the type of stop (reach out of front and rear, reach other than out of front and rear, complete out) is predicted based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set to have different ranges.

  Next, when the gaming state flag at the time of the prize acquired in the processing of S501 is ON, or when the big win prize flag 203g is ON and the post-big-hit gaming state flag 203d is ON, the above is described. Based on the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probable variation), from the short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach various, deviation super reach various, deviation special reach various, the previously predicted stop type and the fluctuation acquired in the processing of S501. The variation pattern type at the time of disconnection associated with the type counter CS1 is predicted.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state flag at the time of prize acquired in the processing of S501 is off and the big hit prize flag 203g is off, or if the big hit prize flag 203g is on, and the big hit after-gaming flag is set. When the switch 203d is off, based on the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern table, it is previously predicted from various types of short-reach, long-reach, departure normal reach, departure super reach, and departure special reach. The variation pattern type at the time of disconnection associated with the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501 is predicted.

  In the processing of S511, a prefetch command is generated based on various prediction results predicted in the processing of S507 to S510 (S511). Here, of the pre-read command described with reference to FIG. 8, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and each bit value other than the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. That is, a bit value indicating that the command is a pre-read command, a bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and a bit value indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type are set.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit prize flag 203g is on (S512). In the process of S512, when the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is ON (S512: Yes), it is a case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read with the game state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, a bit value indicating a prediction precondition for a pre-read command is set according to the state of the post-big-hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state at the end of the big hit, and the pre-read command is further transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113. In order to transmit the prefetch command, the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S513).

  Specifically, if the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, a bit value “0” is set to a bit (the most significant bit of the lower one byte) indicating a prediction precondition of a prefetch command, and the post-jackpot gaming state flag is set. If 203d is ON, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set to the bit value “1”. Then, when the process of S513 ends, next, the big hit prize flag 203g is set to OFF (S514), and the process shifts to S516.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control unit 110, only the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is notified from the main control unit 110 to the audio ramp control unit 113 by a pre-read command. It had been. That is, the prediction precondition has not been notified. Therefore, even when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is extracted from the pre-read command, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 has obtained the prediction result.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main controller 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-fetching is read-ahead. The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a command.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is in the high-probability state. Is prefetched using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, based on the prediction precondition indicated by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command.

  In the process of S512, when the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is off (S512: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read with the gaming state at the time of winning as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, a bit value indicating a precondition for prediction of a prefetch command is set in accordance with the state of the game state flag at the time of winning acquired in the processing of S501, which indicates the game state at the time of winning. In order to transmit the prefetch command to the lamp control device 113, the prefetch command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S515).

  Specifically, if the prize-winning game state flag is off, a bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower one byte) is set to a bit value “0”, and the prize-winning game state flag is set. If on, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set to the bit value “1”. When the processing of S513 or S515 described above is executed and the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, the external output processing of the main processing described later (see S801 in FIG. 26) is performed. When executed, a look-ahead command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. Then, when the processing in S515 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S516. In the process of S516, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to off (S516), the prefetch execution process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  When the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result by the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23, the prediction precondition that can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-reading is determined by the pre-reading. Along with the obtained prediction result, the result can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in a pre-read command. Therefore, based on the prediction precondition indicated by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main controller 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed. However, it was not configured to be able to determine whether or not it was obtained. That is, the prediction precondition was not stored. For this reason, after the prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 obtains the prediction result using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Could not be determined.

  However, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, even if the prediction prerequisites are not stored, the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery lottery results, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Both the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed in the same game state in the main controller 110. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are always stored in the main control device 110. Matches. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110. Therefore, in the audio ramp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction results of this jackpot lottery were treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, the main control device 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unknown in which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different from each other in the main control device 110. Had treated the prediction results of the jackpot as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the big random number table 202a1 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is stored. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching can be always determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine as being reliable even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. The jackpot lottery prediction result can be appropriately handled.

  In addition, by the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23, the pre-reading is performed for the start winning during the big hit with the game state at the end of the big hit as a prediction precondition, so that the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result can be improved. . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, when the data to be prefetched is acquired with the start winning prize during the big hit, the winning gaming state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, the prediction precondition for the prefetching is always in a low probability state, so that the prediction result is unlikely to match the actual lottery result. As a result, the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is deteriorated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. Is determined, the main control device 110 can determine the game state at the end of the big hit. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery held in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery held is one in the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. It is sequentially executed in main controller 110 in order.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a starting prize during a jackpot, and when performing pre-reading for the starting prize, it is better to set the prediction precondition to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than to always set the prediction precondition to the low probability state. The possibility that the prediction result of the lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110 can be improved. Therefore, the number of prediction results that can be treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be increased, and in this embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  In the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23 described above, pre-reading is performed on a winning prize during a big hit with the game state at the end of the big hit as a prediction precondition, thereby improving the accuracy of the lottery result prediction. I have. As described above, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, so that after the determination, the game state at the end of the jackpot can be prefetched as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning prize during the jackpot, in addition to the winning prize from the determination of the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery to the start of the jackpot, the game state at the end of the jackpot is to be read as a precondition for prediction. It may be performed. Thereby, the chance that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result coincide with each other in the main control device 110 can be increased. Therefore, the number of prediction results treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be further increased, so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In the above-described pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23, the big hit prize flag 203g is provided. May be. When the big hit prize flag 203g is not provided, the big hit prize flag 203e is referred to instead of the big hit prize flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data obtained with the start winning is obtained with the big win.

  In the above-described pre-reading process, the game state flag at the time of a prize is provided. However, when the main control device 110 executes each process in a single task system, the game state flag at the time of a prize may not be provided. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the game state flag at the time of winning. As described above, the prize-winning game state flag is a flag indicating the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the start winning prize. When a ball starts to win in the first ball opening 64, each of the counters C1 to C1 is started at the timing of winning. The values of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are obtained. Then, the gaming state flag 203a obtained here is set as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start prize is a high probability state, and if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko machine at the time of the start prize is provided. This indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in the low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetch processing. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the gaming state 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described starting winning processing (see FIG. 20), so that the load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the game state at the time of prize winning storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the sub-control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S704). If it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S712 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S712 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S813 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (sub-control device) (S712). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S713, S714).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S713, S714) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S713, S714) is executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S713, S714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S713), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S714). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S704: Yes), S707: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (sub-control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S709), and the process proceeds to S710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the processing of S710, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S710), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S711), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main processing, pre-reading processing, counter updating processing, and power-off processing are roughly performed. As an outline, each process of S801 to S807 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S809 and S810 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (sub-device). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S801). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the pre-read command set in the pre-read process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, in the previous 4 ms period, the fanfare command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set by the jackpot control process described later are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S802). Next, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the big hit state, the execution of the big hit effect and the variable winning device 65 are performed. A big hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S803). Although the details of the jackpot control process will be described later, in the jackpot control process, the special winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a It is determined whether or not the ball has won a specified number. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the jackpot control process ends, next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric auditors accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S804). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening time of the electric accessory is set as a hit of the second symbol, or the lottery result of the jackpot lottery usually becomes a jackpot, the opening time and the opening of the electric accessory are set. When the number of times is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S805). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern type is set by the process of S408 or S413 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22), the variation display according to the variation pattern type is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the change time corresponding to the change pattern type set by the process of S408 or S413 of the change start process (see FIG. 22) ends, and as a result, the change process (FIG. 21) When the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S312 in the reference symbol display device 37, the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and S407 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22). The stop symbol (first symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up display) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of step S412 or the process of step S412.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S806). In the second symbol display update process, when the lottery of the second symbol is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is started. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the second symbol ends, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 83.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S807). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S807: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S808). If the predetermined time has already passed (S808: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described processes after S801 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S808: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S809, S810).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S809). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S810). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S801 to S807 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S807, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S807: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at S811 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S811), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S812). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S813), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S814), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S807 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S801 to S806 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S809 and S810 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S801, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S701). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S801. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, in the main processing, the prize ball counting signal, the abnormal payout signal reading processing (S802), the big hit control processing (S803), the electric accessory opening / closing processing (S804), the first symbol control processing (S805), the second processing Although the symbol control process (S806) is executed, a part or all of these processes may be executed not in the main process but in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S803) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S803). The jackpot control process (S803) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed, or a specific winning opening (large jackpot) is executed. This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot is started (S901). Specifically, the process of S314 of the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S901, when the big hit is started (S901: Yes), the game state at the end of the big hit in the fanfare command is set based on the state of the post-big hit game state flag 203d (S902).

  In the process of S902, of the fanfare command described with reference to FIG. 9, the upper one byte indicating the command type and the uppermost bit in the lower one byte are set. Specifically, first, a bit value indicating that the command is a fanfare command is set, and then, if the post-big hit game state flag 203d is off, the game state at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command is set. Is set to the bit value "0" (the most significant bit of the lower one byte), and if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on, the bit indicating the gaming state at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command Is set to the bit value "1". Then, a fanfare command is set (S903), and the process ends.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. When receiving the fanfare command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the big hit is not started in the process of S901 (S901: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203e is on and the current big hit is made (S904). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. As described above, the big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and the start of the big hit is set by the processing of S315 of the above-described variation processing (see FIG. 21). While it is set to ON at the timing, it is set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot ends by the process of S914 of the jackpot control process.

  In the processing of S904, if the big hit flag 203e is off and it is not a big hit (904: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S904, if the big hit flag 203e is on and the big hit is being made (S904: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S905). If it is the start timing of a new round (S905: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S906), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S907). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S905, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S905: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been released after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S908, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S909), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S908: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S910).

  In the processing of S910, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S910: Yes), the ending command is set (S911), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a display mode of the ending effect based on the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S910 (S910: No), it is determined whether the current big hit is to be ended (S912).

  In the process of S912, when ending the current big hit (S912: Yes), the big hit end is set (S913), and the big hit flag 203e is set to off (S914). Next, it is determined whether the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S915). As described above, the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit and ends. It is a flag. If the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the end of the current big hit, and if the flag 203d is off, the current big jackpot is ended. It sometimes indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state.

  In the processing of S915, when the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is off (S915: No), this processing is ended without doing anything, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is kept in the low probability state. As described above, during the big hit, since the gaming state flag 203a is off, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the flag 203a does not need to be set to off again at the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S915, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d is on (S915: Yes), the gaming state flag 203a is set to on (high probability state) (S916), and this processing ends. Here, by turning on the gaming state flag 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state at the end of the big hit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the post-big-hit gaming state flag 203d is off in the processing of S915 (S915: No), the processing ends without performing any processing. 203a may be set to off (low probability state), and the present process may be terminated.

  When the fanfare command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 by the jackpot control process shown in FIG. 27, information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is included in the fanfare command. It can be sent including it. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current jackpot is completed based on the received fanfare command. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command. If the lottery result is a jackpot, the main control unit 110 notifies the audio ramp control unit 113 of whether the current jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by the fanfare command. The main controller 110 notifies the sound ramp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, or an ending command. You may. That is, the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and further determines the type of the jackpot, and then determines whether the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by audio lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided. The game state may be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command need not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1116 in FIG. 29), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1119 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1119 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006 described below. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1119 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1119, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1119 (see S1118 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1119 is executed, the process of S1008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1008 is performed via the processes of steps S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), the process skips S1009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1011), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is that when the process from S1004 to the process in S1008 is performed via the process in S1006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101). If the above has not elapsed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1112 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1111. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. In steps S1102 to S1111, the processing related to display (effect) is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1112 and the command determination process in S1113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform setting relating to the variable effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. Further, by executing the process of S1113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from main controller 110.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), first, in the previous 1-msec cycle, various commands set by the processing of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1109 described later (S1103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1104). . The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of turning on the pending lamp 285 according to the value of the pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is completed, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1108). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (S1108), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1151), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1152). As a result, if the vibration level is lower than the predetermined level (S1152: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process ends, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1152: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and the sound output device 226 is set to output an alarm sound (S1153) and displayed. An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1154), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29). Thus, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 29, description of the main processing will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1109), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1110). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illuminations 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. When the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (see FIG. 30) (see S1153), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 226.

  After the processing of S1110, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1111), and the process shifts to S1112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1109 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1110 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1112, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1113 is completed, the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is updated (S1114), and the ending mode counter 223f is updated (S1115). The update of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is performed such that each time the update process is performed, one is added in order within the range of 0 to 127, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed in such a manner that each time the updating process is performed, one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 2 and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 2). The value of the continuous preview lottery counter 223g updated by the update process of S1114 is referred to by the continuous preview determination process (see FIG. 32) described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous preview effect. The value of the ending style counter 223f is referred to in the ending effect determination processing (see FIG. 33) described later, and is used to determine whether the display mode of the ending effect is normal display or fixed effect display.

  When the process of S1115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1116). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1116 (S1116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1118), and the power-off processing is executed (S1119). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S1120), and thereafter, the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1117: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1117: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a store clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1113). This command determination processing (S1113) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In this processing, when a prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, the start of a continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and when an ending command is received from the main control device 110, the ending The display mode in the effect is set.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it is (S1201). When the variation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1203). Return to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). When the stop type command is received (S1204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1206). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (variable display suspension) The number of times N) is extracted, and this is stored in the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1208). In the process of S1208, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the end of the process in S1208, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, so that every time a starting winning is detected, a voice is executed by the processing of S1208. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 detects Can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.

  In the process of S1207, if the pending ball count command has not been received (S1207: No), then it is determined whether a prefetch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1209). Then, when the prefetch command is received (S1209: Yes), the prefetch prediction precondition, the jackpot lottery prediction result, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result are extracted from the received prefetch command, and these are prefetched. The information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S1210). Then, a continuous announcement determination process is executed (S1211), and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control device 110 changes the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a. The acquired values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the acquired game state flag 203a is set as a winning state game state flag. C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the same reserved area as the stored reserved area. Then, when data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the prize-winning game state flag) is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110, separately from the original jackpot lottery, From the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding area and the gaming state flag at the time of winning, various types of information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained when the original jackpot lottery is performed. Is read ahead (predicted).

  When the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a pre-read command indicating various information (acceptance / non-permission, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-read and a pre-condition for pre-reading is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp. Sent to control device 113. Upon receiving the prefetch command, the voice ramp control device 113 extracts a prefetch prediction precondition, a jackpot lottery prediction result, and a fluctuation pattern type prediction result from the prefetch command, and uses them as prefetch information as prefetch information. The information is stored in the reservation area of the information storage area 223a.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is in the high-probability state. Is prefetched using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 has used the prediction result of the prefetch information based on the precondition of the prediction of the prefetch information.

  In the continuous preview determination process, the fluctuation that is suspended at that time is determined based on the prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous preliminary lottery counter 223g. It is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous announcement effects for the effect.

  In the process of S1209, if the prefetch command has not been received (S1209: No), then it is determined whether a fanfare command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). When the fanfare command is received (S1212: Yes), the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the received fanfare command (S1213), and the extracted game state is set. Based on this, the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set (S1214). In the processing of S1214, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is “low probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to off, and the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is set. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state”, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set to ON.

  Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the big hit in the main control device 110 based on the after-big hit game state flag 223c.

  Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the jackpot ends, and when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 thereafter, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the new jackpot lottery are based on the gaming state set at the time of jackpot termination. Is determined. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 refers to the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, and after the current big hit ends, the big random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110. Can be determined.

  Next, a display fanfare command for starting the big hit effect on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1215), and the process returns to the main process. The display fanfare command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display fanfare command, the display control device 114 starts a fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if a fanfare command has not been received (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1216). When the round number command is received (S1216: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1217), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S1217). S1218), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1216 (S1216: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1219). If an ending command has been received (S1219: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S1221), and this process ends. In the ending setting process, it is determined based on the look-ahead information stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223a whether the display mode of the ending effect is the normal display or the fixed effect display, and the display for the display corresponding to the determination is performed. An ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect of a display mode corresponding to the display ending command.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the processing of S1219 (S1219: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1220). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  As described above, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, when the fan fare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fan fare command is received. Is extracted, and the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set in accordance with the gaming state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the main controller 110 determines whether the current jackpot is a variable jackpot or a regular jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, if the stop type command indicates the big hit type, the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. May be. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is not always necessary to include information indicating a game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the continuous announcement determination process (S1211). This continuous announcement determination processing (S1211) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and receives the prefetch command as described above. In this case, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect.

  In this continuous announcement determination process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of predetermined conditions (condition 1) to (condition 3) described later is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, next, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect. Here, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is started, the continuous announcement effect is started. S1302 to S1310 to be described later are processes for determining whether any one of (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and S1311 to S1316 to be described later start a continuous announcement effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to perform.

  (Condition 1) is that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set, and (Condition 2) is “big hit” when all of the set continuous announcement effects are completed, and further, a new jackpot is set. Two or more variable effects (holding balls) exist between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received look-ahead command and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set (holding ball) ( That is, the difference between the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b and the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 3 or more. (Condition 3) is that when all the set continuous announcement effects have been completed, "Large" in the lottery result of the jackpot lottery among the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command.

  In the continuous announcement determination processing, first, the prefetch information (that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of the prefetch) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is read (S1301). . The prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is specified based on the reserved ball number counter 223b. That is, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 1, the prefetch information stored in the reserved first area is specified as the prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Similarly, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 2, the look-ahead information stored in the reserved second area is, and when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 3, the look-ahead information stored in the reserved third area is. When the value of the reserved ball count counter 223b is 4, the prefetch information stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the prefetch information last stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Next, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is “big hit” (S1302). (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1302: No), it is determined whether the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the processing of S1301 is “reach out of front and rear” (S1303). ). In the process of S1303, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “reach out of order” (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the variation pattern type is not “reach out of order” but is another variation pattern type (S1303: No), the process ends.

  In the processing of S1304, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b is substituted for the variable A (S1304), and then the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is substituted for the variable B (S1305). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous announcement number counter 223h) is 0 (S1306). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1306: Yes), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed. Since it is not set and the above (condition 1) is satisfied, the process shifts to the process of S1311, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect by the process of S1311 and thereafter.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if the value of the variable B (that is, the number of continuous announcements counter 223h) is not 0, that is, if it is 1 or more (S1306: No), the execution of the continuous announcement effect has already been set Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is ON (S1307). As described above, when the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is ON, the game state after the variable production after the continuous announcement production has been performed in all the variable productions in which the continuous announcement production is set is “big hit”. And the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is off, the game state after the variable announcement after the continuous announcement effect has been performed in all the variable announcements for which the continuous announcement effect has been set. Indicates that the state is “off”.

  Then, in the process of S1307, if the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is on (S1307: Yes), it becomes “big hit” when all the set continuous notice effects have been completed, so the variable The difference between the value of A (that is, the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (that is, the number of continuous announcements counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted for the variable C (S1308). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1309). As a result, if the variable C is 3 or more (S1309: Yes), the variable effect (hold) corresponding to the received prefetch command is received. It can be determined that two or more variable effects (reserved balls) exist between the ball (ball) and the last variable effect (reserved ball) for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set. Therefore, it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309 that the above-described (condition 2) is satisfied, and the process shifts to the processing of S1311. Decide whether to do it.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1309, when the variable C is not equal to or more than 3 (that is, less than 3) (S1309: No), the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuously Since there is no more than one variable effect (reserved ball) between the last variable effect (reserved ball) for which the execution of the notice effect is set, the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309 are not performed. From the result, it can be determined that none of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous announcement effect.

  In the process of S1307, if the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i is ON (S1307: Yes), it becomes a "big hit" when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed. As a result, the player's expectation due to the continuous announcement performance is temporarily interrupted. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set If two or more variable effects (reserved balls) exist, a determination is made as to whether or not to start a continuous announcement effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined with a predetermined probability, in the two or more variable effects performed after the "big hit", the chance eyes can be always displayed as the stop symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous announcement effect, and to enhance the expectation that the player feels for the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1307, if the value of the post-announcement jackpot flag 223i is off (S1307: No), it becomes “out” when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed, so that In the pre-read information read in the process of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is “big hit” (S1310). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” (S1310: Yes), the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301. From the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309, it can be determined that the above (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S1311, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect by the processes after S1311.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1310, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out of place” (S1310: No), the above-described processing is performed based on the results of the processing of S1307, the processing of S1308, and the processing of S1311 ( It can be determined that none of the conditions 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous announcement effect. Here, when the value of the post-announcement big hit flag 223i is off (S1307: No), it becomes "out" when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed. In such a situation, the start of the continuous announcement effect with a predetermined probability is determined only when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” among the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect that is being executed from being completed and “being out”, and the continuous announcement effect being continuously performed and becoming “out” again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state of “disengagement” continuously after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, when the continuous preview production ends, it will be “off”, and if the continuous preview production is continued, the player can have a strong sense of expectation to be a “big hit” and continue playing the game for the player Can be motivated to do so.

  As described above, in the processing of S1302 to S1310, it is determined whether any one of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and any of (condition 1) to (condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous announcement determination processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing. As a result, when none of (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, the process from S1311 for determining the start of the continuous announcement effect is not executed, so that the determination of the start of the continuous announcement effect can be performed reliably and easily. Can be prevented. Further, since the processing after S1311 is omitted, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S1311 to S1313, it is used to determine the start of the continuous announcement effect from the two continuous announcement determination tables 222a (the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit, or the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the departure). Is selected (see FIG. 10).

  First, in the process of S1311, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” in the pre-read information read in the process of S1301 (S1311). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" (S1311: Yes), the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit is selected as the continuous announcement determination table used to determine the start of the continuous announcement production (S1312). ). On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1311: No), the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of the outage is selected as the continuous announcement determination table used to determine the start of the continuous announcement production (S1313). ).

  After the continuous announcement determination table is selected by the processing of S1311 to S1313, the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is obtained (S1314). Then, the continuous announcement determination table selected in the process of S1312 or S1313 (the continuous announcement determination table 222a1 at the time of a big hit, or the continuous announcement determination table 222a2 at the time of a loss), and the value of the retained ball counter 223b (variation display) The continuous notice determination range is specified based on the number N of times of suspension, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice lottery counter 223g (S1315).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous announcement determination range, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect (S1316). In the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous announcement determination range and the continuous announcement effect is not started (S1316: No), the process of S1317 and thereafter is skipped, and the command determination process is performed. Return to That is, the setting of the continuous notice number counter 223h is kept as it is. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball set to perform a variable production announcement, a continuous announcement effect is performed on the retained ball, and if there is no such retained ball, a continuous announcement effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1316, when the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous announcement determination range and it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started (S1316: Yes), the continuous announcement number counter 223h and the reserved ball number counter 223b are set. Is set (S1317). Here, by setting the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223h in the processing of S1317, all the variable effects suspended before the variable effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously processed. Execution of a notice effect is set. In other words, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a chance eye over all the variable effects corresponding to the reserved ball retained before the reserved ball corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, among the pre-read information read in the processing of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is “big hit” (S1318). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” (S1318: Yes), the post-notification big hit flag 223i is set to ON (S1319), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1318: No), the post-notification big hit flag 223i is set to off (S1320), and this processing ends.

  By the processing of S1319 or the processing of S1320, when all the set continuous announcement effects have been completed, it is possible to set the after-announcement jackpot flag 223i as to whether it is a "big hit" or "missing". . Thereby, the continuous notice determination processing is executed again, and when the processing of S1307 is executed, the above-mentioned (condition 2) or (condition 3) is used by using the value of the post-notification big hit flag 223i set here. Can be determined.

  Next, the ending setting process (S1221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1221). The ending setting process (S1221) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1221 in FIG. 31). This is a process for determining the display mode of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result is determined to be "big hit" in the big hit lottery in the main control device 110, when the variable effect corresponding to the "big hit" ends, the pachinko machine 10 moves to the big hit. At the same time, a big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, first, a fanfare effect is performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot. Next, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a jackpot, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the number of rounds is notified to the player. Then, when the big hit (2 rounds or 15 rounds) ends, an ending effect is finally performed, and the end of the big hit is notified to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, a fixed effect display that informs the player that the jackpot ends and the lottery result becomes a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery, or simply a jackpot. Or a normal display notifying the player of the end of the game.

  In the ending setting process, first, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is obtained (S1401), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1401). S1402). In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b is 0 (S1402: No), it is the timing to start the ending effect, but no major jackpot has been suspended in the main controller 110. If not, the process proceeds to S1415.

  In the processing of S1402, if the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1402: Yes), one or more jackpot lotteries are reserved in the main control device 110. The prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one, starting from the jackpot lottery in the order of suspension.

  Specifically, among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the reserved area having the smaller area number. Check one by one. It should be noted that data corresponding to a start winning a prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number in time.

  Therefore, first, the variable i is set to 1 (S1403), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S1404). Then, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserved i-th area is compared with the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c (S1405). As a result of the comparison, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition is compared with the game state indicated by the prediction precondition. Then, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c indicates the same gaming state (S1406).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-read is determined by the main control command. The device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113. If the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, it means that the main controller 110 has used the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching. Means that the pre-reading has been performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, from the prefetch command, prediction preconditions for prefetch, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and the like are extracted as prefetch information, and are stored in the reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Is stored. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information, and the main control device 110 obtains the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Can be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main controller 110, and thereafter, when the timing of starting the big hit comes, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113. . In this case, the main control device 110 generates a fanfare command including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, and the generated command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. . Upon receiving the fanfare command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command, and sets the post-big hit game state flag 223c according to the game state. The state is set. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the big hit is completed in the main control device 110 based on the after-big hit game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. At the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the big hit type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 after the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the game state set at the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the main control device 110 newly executes the game state after the current big hit ends. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery can also be determined based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c.

  Therefore, in the above-described processing of S1405, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot, the jackpot used in the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is compared. The main controller 110 can compare whether the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead.

  Then, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), the jackpot lottery is performed. This is a case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-reading of the lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result The corresponding actual jackpot lottery results match in main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, when the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery results is performed. The main control device 110 does not match the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It is unclear whether they match in main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S1406, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), as described above, This is the case where the predicted result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S1404 and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1407).

  In the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out of order (S1407: No), 1 is added to the variable i (S1409), and the value of the variable i becomes It is determined whether the value is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S1410). In the process of S1410, if the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b (S1410: Yes), the prefetch information is also stored in another reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Since this is the case, the process returns to S1404, and the prefetch information stored in another holding area is confirmed.

  After returning to the process of S1404, the above-described processes of S1404 to S1410 are repeated, and the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in another holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area). Is compared with the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c in ascending order of the area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the reserved ball count counter 223b (S1410: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is read. This is a case in which all the prediction results in all the pre-read information are out of check. In this case, there is no pre-reading information to be confirmed, so the flow shifts to the processing of S1415.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1407: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S1411 to display the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect. A process is performed to determine whether to set. In the present embodiment, a plurality of prefetch information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and even if each processing of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the processing of S1407 is a big hit, For example, the configuration is such that the repetition of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, the process does not return to each process of S1404 to S1410, and does not check the remaining prefetch information.

  This is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery. If there is at least one jackpot, the result of the other jackpot lottery may be any, and it is not necessary to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  Also, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery held is executed and the jackpot is again obtained, the ending effect determination process is executed during the second jackpot, Thus, no problem arises because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is a jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in which the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery held is terminated after the running jackpot is completed. If it is executed one by one, the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big hit lotteries, and the big hit will be made again. Then, when the jackpot again occurs, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by a fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fan fare command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fan fare command. The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110, there is a jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, the gaming state after the jackpot The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main control device 110, for the jackpot lottery executed after the jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the post jackpot game state flag 223c. But I can't trust the result of that comparison. Therefore, it is meaningless to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is not necessary to check the pre-read information, the check is not performed, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), as described above. The main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Is the case. Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, as will be described later, the jackpot lottery prediction result may be exceptionally treated as being trustworthy, so it is determined whether the jackpot lottery prediction result in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1408). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c indicate different game states in the processing of S1406. (S1406: No), the process proceeds to S1408 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot. In the case of S1406: No, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is determined. May be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S1415 without performing the process in S1408.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the large random number table 202a2 for high probability do not overlap. Thus, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the gaming state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c. Even when the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the corresponding actual jackpot lottery do not match in the main control device 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is the jackpot, the prediction result corresponds to the prediction result. In the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are not determined by the main controller 110 as to whether they match or not. Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value that is a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value indicated by becomes a hit value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a big hit or a miss in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S1408, when the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1408: Yes), as described above, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally out of order and can be trusted. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1409. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled. In that case, the process returns to the process of S1409, and the repetitive processes of S1404 to S1410 can be continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that the display mode of the ending effect can be set to “determined effect display”.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out of order (S1408: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c. This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the state. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unknown whether the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is a jackpot or a loss.

  Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S1415 without returning to the processes of S1404 to S1410, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect determination process, if it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot or a loss, the process will not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410 and the remaining prefetch information will be checked. It is configured not to.

  This is because when one of the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery is checked one by one from the jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in the order of the reserved lottery, the prediction result becomes one of the prediction results. If it becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. In addition, the result of the lottery is also unknown for the subsequent jackpot.

  As described above, the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, so if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result will be Becomes unknown. Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the process of S1411, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is obtained (S1411), and the obtained counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1412). If the acquired counter value is included in the range in which the execution of the fixed effect display is selected, and it is determined that the fixed effect display is to be executed (S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to S1414. In the process of S1414, the fixed effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1414), and the process shifts to the process of S1416. In the process of S1413, if the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the normal display, and it is determined that the normal display is to be executed (S1413: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1415. In the process of S1415, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1415), and the process shifts to the process of S1416.

  In the process of S1416, a display ending command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display mode of the ending effect is generated based on the display mode set by the process of S1414 or the process of S1415, and the command is displayed. The setting is made for transmission to the control device 114 (S1416). Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 controls the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 33, in the process of S1405, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the big hit flag 223c, so that the big hit lottery is performed. The main control device 110 compares whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. In 113, the jackpot lottery prediction result was treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the jackpot random number used in prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is stored. It can always be determined whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  When the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same. And the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, a plurality of prefetch information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and even when each of the processes of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the big hit lottery is performed in the process of S1407. If the prediction result is a big hit, the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 can be stopped there. In other words, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and if the prediction result becomes a jackpot, the process does not return to each of the processes of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery held at the same time as the "confirmed effect display". This is because if there is at least one of the jackpot lotteries performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  Also, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery held is executed and the jackpot is again obtained, the ending effect determination process is executed during the second jackpot, Thus, no problem arises because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is a jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in which the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery held is terminated after the running jackpot is completed. If it is executed one by one, the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big hit lotteries, and the big hit will be made again. Then, when the jackpot again occurs, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by a fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fan fare command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fan fare command. The state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110, there is a jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, when the jackpot becomes the jackpot again, the gaming state after the jackpot The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main control device 110, for the jackpot lottery executed after the jackpot lottery in which the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the post jackpot game state flag 223c. But I can't trust the result of that comparison. Therefore, it is meaningless to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is not necessary to confirm the prefetch information, the confirmation is not performed, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, when a plurality of prefetch information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and when each of the processes of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the prefetch information is determined in the process of S1406. Is different from the gaming state indicated by the prediction prerequisite in step S1406 and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot (S1406: No), and in the processing of S1408, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot. If it is (S1408: Yes), the process returns to S1409, and the repetition process of S1404 to S1410 can be continuously executed.

  As described above, in the process of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. This is a case where the main controller 110 does not match the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch do not match in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information in the process of S1408 is the jackpot. Then, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are not determined by the main controller 110 as to whether they match or not. In other words, in the sound lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery results and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Even if the main controller 110 does not match, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result is deemed to be out of order, the process returns to S1409, and the processes of S1404 to S1410 can be repeatedly executed. .

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the gaming state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S1408. If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot lottery lottery results Is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. In addition, the result of the lottery is also unknown for the subsequent jackpot.

  As described above, the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, so if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result also becomes Becomes unknown. Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  More specifically, in the above-described ending effect determination process, when a plurality of pieces of prefetch information are stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the processes of S1404 to S1410 are repeatedly performed, the process of S1406 is performed. The game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the game state indicated by the post-big-hit game state flag 223c (S1406: No). If it is determined that there is (S1408: No), the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown and the prediction result cannot be trusted, the process does not return to the processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information cannot be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the ending effect determination process, when it is not clear whether the actual jackpot lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect. . With this, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  The ending effect determination process described above is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. The ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is time to start the ending effect. You. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the big hit effect is started, but is executed after waiting until just before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times). If the prefetch information is acquired from the prefetch information storage area 223a after waiting just before the start of the ending effect to be performed, four prefetch information can be acquired in most cases.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the ending effect determination process is executed immediately after the big hit effect is started, the possibility of obtaining a larger amount of prefetch information is increased, and the possibility of branching to Yes in the process of S1407 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, and if any of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result is It is possible to increase opportunities for giving the player a sense of expectation that the game will be performed. In addition, each time a jackpot lottery is held, it is possible to increase opportunities to make the player feel delighted, and to increase opportunities for the player to increase expectation that the next hit will be a big hit. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the above-described ending effect determination process is configured to be executed when an ending command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, but the ending effect determination process is for determining the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, it is sufficient that the processing is executed and ended before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed at any time as long as the process ends after the fanfare command transmitted from main controller 110 is received and before the ending effect is started.

  In addition, in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment, every time the jackpot lottery associated with the ball entry into the first entrance 64 is held, the lottery result is pre-read, and the lottery result obtained by the pre-reading ( The process of notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the prediction result) is performed. Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, when it is immediately before the ending effect starts, based on the prediction result obtained by the pre-reading in the main control device 110, the ending effect displays “determined effect display” or “ A complicated process such as a process of determining a display mode for performing “normal display” is performed. Thereby, the processing in main controller 110 can be concentrated on the jackpot lottery (that is, the jackpot lottery associated with the entry into first entrance 64), which is the most important processing of pachinko machine 10, while the audio If the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used for the lamp control device 113, the display mode determination conditions in the ending effect can be easily set to various modes.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process will be described. Each of FIGS. 34 to 37 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the description starts assuming that the start winning is not suspended in the pachinko machine 10.

  In FIG. 34 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which start winnings G, H, and I have occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize G, it is assumed that the lottery result will be lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize H, the pachinko machine If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be a big hit. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize I, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot. Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the start winning prize G occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, but is not in the jackpot, so the prefetching of the starting winning prize G is performed. If performed, the low-probability state, which is the gaming state at the time of the start winning, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize G is incorrect. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize G is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize H, similarly to the start winning prize G, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit state and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, when the prefetching is performed for the start winning prize H, The low-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize H is a probability change jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the starting prize H is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command is performed. The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning prize I occurs, similarly to the start winning prize G, there is no big hit, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state. The low-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize I is usually a jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the starting prize I is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command is performed. The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when it is time to start the jackpot effect, the main control device 110 transmits a fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot has been completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low-probability state in the first place, so that even if a jackpot effect is started, the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low-probability state. In addition, since the current jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the low probability state even when the jackpot effect ends. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize G is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize H is performed, and the jackpot is determined. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. After that, a jackpot lottery according to the start winning prize I is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since the information is acquired from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the storing order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning G is determined. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize G matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot prize corresponding to the start winning prize G matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot prize. .

  However, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize G is out of order. , The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the big hit. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize H matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize H matches the actual jackpot lottery result. . Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize H is a probability change jackpot this time.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a big hit. In addition, it is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. Further, it is configured not to check other prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. This is because the `` confirmed effect display '' informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery, so at least among the held jackpot lotteries This is because if there is one big hit, it is not necessary to check the lottery result for other prefetch information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing proceeds to S1411, and the processing of determining whether to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. Done. That is, in the present ending effect determination process, the look-ahead information corresponding to the start winning prize I is not referred to, so that “determined effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the fixed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially performed. If done, you will win a jackpot in one of the lotteries. Therefore, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player will end up with a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be delighted every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 35 will be described. In FIG. 35 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which start winning prizes J, K, and L occur during the execution of the fluctuation effect. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize J, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result will be off. In the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize K, the lottery result is assumed to be off regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize L, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result will be out. Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the start winning prize J occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a jackpot, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. In, a high probability state, which is a game state at the time of starting winning, is selected as a prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize J is usually a jackpot. When the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize J is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, and the prediction preconditions indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are obtained. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning K is generated, as in the case of the starting winning J, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a big hit, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. The high-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning K is out of order, and a prefetch command corresponding to the starting winning K is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command is obtained. The conditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning L is generated, as in the case of the starting winning J, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. The high-probability state, which is the game state at the time of the start winning, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize L is a probability change jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize L is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command is performed. The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when it is time to start the jackpot effect, the main control device 110 transmits a fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot has been completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a high probability state to a low probability state when a jackpot effect is started. In addition, since the current jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the low probability state even when the jackpot effect ends. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize J is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize K is performed, and the jackpot is determined. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize L is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since the information is obtained from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the storing order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning J is determined. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize J is different from the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot prize corresponding to the start winning prize J does not coincide with the actual lottery result of the jackpot prize.

  However, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), even if the predicted precondition does not match the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning prize J is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition of the prefetch does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result will be off.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state. Similarly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read information does not become unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out of order.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning K and the prediction precondition are obtained in the second process of S1404, and the prediction result is obtained in the second process of S1405. The predicted precondition thus set is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the big hit. However, even in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning K does not match the gaming state at the end of the big hit. Furthermore, this time, as shown in FIG. 35B, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning K is out of order.

  As described above, in the case where the prediction precondition of the pre-reading does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order, the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery It is unclear whether it will be a jackpot or a miss.

  In the ending effect determination process described above, if it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot or a loss, the process will not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410 and the remaining prediction result will be unknown. It is configured not to check the pre-read information. Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S1415 without returning to the processes of S1404 to S1410, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. That is, in the present ending effect determination process, the prefetch information corresponding to the start winning prize L is not referred to, so that execution of unnecessary processes can be suppressed.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. In FIG. 36 (a), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a probability variable jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, and further, during the execution of the jackpot effect according to the jackpot, start winning M, N, O occurs. FIG. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize M, the lottery result is determined to be off regardless of the gaming state (low-probability state, high-probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be out of order, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize O, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability variable jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be out. Shall be As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the start winning prize M occurs during the execution of the big hit effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since the big hit is being performed, the prefetching is performed for the start winning prize M. In this case, a high-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the big hit, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning M is incorrect. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize M is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are obtained. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning N is generated, similarly to the start winning M, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but it is a big hit. , A high-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the jackpot, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N is out of order, a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize N is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command is indicated. The conditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning prize O occurs, as in the case of the start winning prize M, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but it is in a big hit. , A high-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the jackpot, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O is a probability change jackpot, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize O is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command The preconditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot effect has already been executed. However, before the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the jackpot of this time is a probable jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high-probability state at the end of the jackpot, and is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. . Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state, although no jackpot lottery is performed during the jackpot effect. In addition, since the current jackpot is a probable jackpot, at the end of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a low probability state to a high probability state. Then, when the jackpot effect is completed, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize M is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize N is performed, and the jackpot is performed. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize O is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since it is obtained from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the stored order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning M is determined. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize M matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize M matches the actual jackpot lottery result. .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize M is out of order, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize N is next processed in the second processing of S1404. , The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize N matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize N matches the actual jackpot lottery result. .

  However, also in this case, as shown in FIG. 36B, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N is out of order. The prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the third process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the predicted precondition corresponding to the start winning prize O matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize O matches the actual jackpot lottery result. . Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O becomes a probability change big hit.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a big hit. In addition, it is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing proceeds to S1411, and the processing of determining whether to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. Done.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the fixed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially performed. If done, you will win a jackpot in one of the lotteries. Therefore, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player will end up with a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be delighted every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is out of order, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 37 will be described. In FIG. 37 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which the start winning prize P has occurred during the execution of the variable effect. Further, a state in which the variable effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is completed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, and further, during the execution of the jackpot effect accompanying the jackpot, start winning prizes Q and R are shown. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize P, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result will be a normal jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the lottery result will be off. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize Q, the lottery result is lost if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, while the lottery result is lost if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. Will be a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize R, the lottery result is assumed to be lost regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning prize P occurs during the execution of the variable effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. A high-probability state is selected as a condition and its look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize P is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize P is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are obtained. It is stored in the first reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when it is time to start the jackpot effect, the main control device 110 transmits a fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot has been completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a high probability state to a low probability state when a jackpot effect is started. In addition, since the current jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the low probability state even when the jackpot effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning prize Q occurs during the execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, but since the jackpot is during the jackpot, the prefetching is performed on the starting prize Q. In this case, a low-probability state, which is a gaming state at the end of the big hit, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q is a probability change jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning prize Q is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning prize R occurs, similarly to the start winning prize Q, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state, but is in a big hit. , A low-probability state, which is a game state at the end of the big hit, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize R is out of order, a look-ahead command corresponding to the start winning prize R is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the look-ahead command is obtained. The conditions, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize P is performed, a variable effect associated with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize Q is performed, and the jackpot is determined. A variable effect accompanying the lottery is executed. After that, a jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize R is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination processing, since it is obtained from the prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which is stored earlier in the stored order, first, in the first processing of S1404, the start winning prize P is obtained. A corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and a prediction precondition are obtained. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize P is different from the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting prize P does not match the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), even if the predicted precondition does not match the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the start winning prize P is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition of the prefetch does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result will be off. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read information does not become unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out of order.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q and the prediction precondition are acquired in the second process of S1404, and the prediction result is acquired in the second process of S1405. The predicted precondition thus set is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the big hit. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize Q matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the predicted result of the jackpot prize corresponding to the start winning prize Q matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot prize. . Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q becomes a probability change big hit.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result, and the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the big hit lottery. , It is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. In this case, it is configured not to check the remaining prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. This is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the held jackpot lottery. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 If there is at least one jackpot, any other jackpot lottery result may be used, and it is not necessary to check the lottery result for the remaining prefetch information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing proceeds to S1411, and the processing of determining whether to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. Done. That is, in the present ending effect determination process, since the look-ahead information corresponding to the start winning prize R is not referred to, the “ending effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and the execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the fixed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially performed. If done, you will win a jackpot in one of the lotteries. Therefore, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player will end up with a big hit if any of the held big hit lotteries is performed after the big hit ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be delighted every time the held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes the jackpot. Further, even if the lottery result is off, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the sense of expectation that the next big hit will increase, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1311). The variable display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707). Then, in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1708 is a stop type corresponding to "big hit" (S1709). If the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, when the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “out” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, so that the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1712), the process proceeds to S1713. By the processing in S1712, the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the symbol on the chance line (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, as a continuous announcement effect, when the variable effect is stopped on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol serving as a chance can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (the continuous notice number counter 223h). Since the value is 1) or when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set (the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0), the flow shifts to the processing of S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1713.

  If the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 1 as a result of the process in S1711, the stop type is not set as the chance type as the stop type because the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set is performed. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1713, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1713). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice number counter is determined. The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112). This variable display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1507. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then, in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). Upon receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 performs the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command. , The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1505), and the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is shifted (S1506). In the process of S1506, a process of sequentially shifting the prefetch information stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift the look-ahead information. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1507.

  In the process of S1507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1507). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1507: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1508). Then, in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1509).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1509 is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1510). If the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to "big hit" (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “out” (S1510: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, so that the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1513), the process proceeds to S1514. By the process of S1513, the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the chance (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, as a continuous announcement effect, when the variable effect is stopped on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol serving as a chance can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1511, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1511: No), when the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (the continuous notice number counter 223h). If the value is 1) or if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set (the value of the continuous announcement counter 223h is 0), the flow shifts to the processing of S1512. In the process of S1512, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1512), and the process proceeds to S1514.

  If the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 1 as a result of the process in S1512, this is the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, and therefore the chance type is not set as the stop type. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1514, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1514). . When the display stop type command is received, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515: Yes), the continuous notice number counter is determined. The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1516), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous announcement number counter 223h is 0 (S1515: No), the process of S1516 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception process is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1702, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 39). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S1602 in FIG. 39) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1601) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot processing shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1702. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1701. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1702, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, then the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1604, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 50A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3102 in FIG. 50A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B), a simple command is displayed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. A determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and a simple display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64, and the main control device 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. If the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low readout speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data, so that after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on also becomes longer. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1605, interruption permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1606, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1902), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S1903), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S1902) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S1904). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S1903) or the simple display setting processing (S1909). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S1905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1906). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1904), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S1905) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing processing according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15 probable big hit, 2R probable big hit, 15R normal big hit, out-of-front reach, out-of-front reach) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete departure, chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S1908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S1909) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46, details of the above-described command determination processing (S1902), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2001: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2005), and returns to the process of S2001.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2101, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2101 is turned on, and other variation table data is determined. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2103, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2106), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2105, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2102. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2006). If there is a display stop type command (S2006: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2007), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any one of 15R certain jackpot, 2R certain jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out, complete out of chance, chance) Is determined (S2201), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2203).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2202. In the above-described task process (S1904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set in the process of S2202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2203, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the process of S2203, next, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of 15 probable jackpot, 2R probable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, reach out of front and back, reach other than back and forth, reach out, complete out, and chance) Is determined to be a jackpot stop type (S2204), and if it is a jackpot stop type (S2204: Yes), if it is in the on state, the transfer start of the image data used in the fanfare effect is set to the normal image The fanfare data transfer flag 223i to be notified to the transfer setting process (S3103) is set to ON (S2205), the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, when the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2204: No), the process of S2205 is skipped, the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the fanfare data transfer flag 223i, the image data to be used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the variable effect of the jackpot is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display fanfare command instructing the start of the fanfare effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the display fanfare command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time occurs between the end of the variable effect and the start of the fanfare effect. There was a possibility that the user might feel uneasy or uncomfortable about stopping.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device is started. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in 81. With this, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 ends, the fanfare effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is concerned about whether the operation is stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the character ROM 234 is read from the normal ROM. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2201, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is set, even if it is actually "miss", the stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 may be mistaken for a “big hit” by the player, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure is set, and in fact, if it is a "big hit", the completely departure stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even so, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit", which can delight the player.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2006, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fanfare command for display among unprocessed commands (S2008). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2008: Yes), fanfare command processing is executed (S2009), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command processing (S2009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the fanfare command processing. This fanfare command process executes a process corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2303). S2304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2305), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fanfare command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2304, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set fanfare display data table is stored in the character ROM 2 in advance. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the fanfare command processing is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the third symbol display device 81 is performing the fanfare effect, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a jackpot effect (a fanfare effect, a round effect, an ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which the fanfare effect on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the fanfare effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated, and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give a sense of incongruity.

  The display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (15 rounds or 2 rounds) are completed. Since it is transmitted, after receiving the display ending command, the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the ending effect starts after the round effect ends. By this time, a lot of waiting time occurs, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display fanfare command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , And the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the fanfare effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). Or two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. With this, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 ends, the fanfare effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is concerned about whether the operation is stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2008, if it is determined that there is no display fanfare command (S2008: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2010), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S2010: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2011), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the round number command processing (S2011) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2402).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2401, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2405), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2010, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2010: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S2012). If there is an ending command for use (S2012: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2013), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the other ending display data tables are set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d refers to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2503. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). S2405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2406), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2012, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2014). If there is a change command (S2014: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2015), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2015) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103) of the rear image change associated with the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2601). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A to C), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2602), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S2601 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S2602. . If the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2602 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2014, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2014: No), it is next determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2016). If (S2016: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2017), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2017) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2702). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2701, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S2702, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2016 (S2016: No), processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2018), and the processing returns to S2001.

  In the processing of S2001, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2002 to S2018 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2001 to S2018 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 43 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 43 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2102, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S1903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2801). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2801: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S2802 to S2804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S2802), and then S2803 to S2804. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed. In the processing of S2803, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2804).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2901).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters. Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2804) or in the process of S2803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805. In S2805, a pointer update process is performed (S2805).

  Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3001). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3002). As a result, if it is End information (S3002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3003). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3003: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3005), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3006), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3002: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2806). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content acquired in the processing of step S2806 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2808). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S2808: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S2808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S2809).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S2809: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. The setting is made (S2810), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2811). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2813). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2814), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S2815), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set in the process of S2815 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S1904), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2815 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2809, if the confirmed display flag is on rather than on (S2809: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2816). If the demonstration display flag is off (S2816: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S2817), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2818). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2820), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2821), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command or the fanfare command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S2816, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2816: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and it means that the demonstration effect has been completed. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 13 (b) and 13 (c) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S1905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3102), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3101, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3103), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3102), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3201). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3201: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3202). In the process of S3202, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3202 (S3202: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to S3203. Also, as a result of the process of S3201, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3203.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3203). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3204), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3203, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3205), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S1908 in FIG. 41 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S1909 in FIG. 41 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are performed, the normal drawing of the image is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3101: No in FIG. 50A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3103), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S2805) of the previously executed display setting process (S1903). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3302). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S3302: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3303) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3304), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3305.

  In the process of S3302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3302: No), the process of S3303 and S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. In the process of S3305, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3305), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S3305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3306).

  In the process of S3306, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3306 (S3306: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to S3307. Also, as a result of the process of S3305, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3305: No), the process proceeds to S3307.

  In the process of S3307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3307). If the transfer start flag is on (S3307: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3303 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3317. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3307: No), then it is determined whether the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309).

  If the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. This means that the type of stop has been determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set off (S3310), and the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3311). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the fanfare effect, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained. Then (S3312), the flow shifts to the process of S3317.

  In the process of S3309, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but off (S3309: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3313). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3313: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3313: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S3314), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3315). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3316), and the process moves to S3317.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3315, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S3317, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317). The determination in the process of S3317 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S3317, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3317, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3318). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3318, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3319), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub-state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the above-described drawing process (S1906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3401). That is, in the process of S3401, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3402). Here, when the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image rendered in the first frame buffer 236b as the rendering target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3402, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the main control device 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1, and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning gaming state flag). Then, when the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern The type is pre-read in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the main control device 110 transmits the various information (prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the predicted result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading and the pre-condition of the pre-reading from the main control device 110 by the pre-reading command. The device 113 is notified.

  As described above, the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 which is a precondition for the prediction when predicting a lottery result or the like in the prefetch. If this prediction precondition is in the low probability state, it means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and if the prediction precondition is in the high probability state, Means that the pre-reading has been performed by using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, various information (predictive preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of the jackpot lottery, prediction results of the variation pattern type) are extracted from the prefetch command as prefetch information. The prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. As described above, in the sound ramp control device 113, the prediction precondition is stored as the pre-read information together with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when using the pre-read information in the sound ramp control device 113, the prediction pre-condition in the pre-read information is determined. By referring to, it is possible to determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main controller 110, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type. Then, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. When a jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot random determination tables 202a1 and 202a2 according to the game state newly set at the end of the jackpot are used to perform the jackpot lottery.

  Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main control device 110, the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are sounded from the main control device 110 by the fanfare command. The lamp control device 113 is notified. When the fan lamp command is received, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the game state from the fan fare command, and sets the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c according to the game state. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the big hit in the main control device 110 based on the post-big hit game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. At the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the big hit type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 after the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the game state set at the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the main control device 110 newly executes the game state after the current big hit ends. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery can also be determined based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the case of using the look-ahead information, in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. It is possible to determine whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the above.

  However, since the conventional pachinko machine does not store the prediction preconditions, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching will be used. The main control device 110 cannot determine whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 of the main controller 110 coincide with each other, and in some cases, are unknown.

  In other words, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 is held a plurality of times (up to four times in the present pachinko machine 10). In the main control device 110, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a pending start winning, the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is performed. After the result is read in advance, the jackpot lottery associated with each new start prize that has been held at the time of the new start prize has been completed, and then the big jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed.

  Then, the jackpot lottery associated with each starting prize held at the time of the new starting prize is executed by the main controller 110, and if any of the lottery results becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 Is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new starting prize is performed in the changed gaming state. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery according to the start winning prize does not match.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in prefetching the jackpot lottery results are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start winning, Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning prize and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting prize do not match, it is used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery lottery result. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 no longer match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is simply performed. It was not configured to be able to determine whether or not it was obtained by use. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113, audio ramp control device 113 also determines which table 202a1, 202a2 the prediction result was obtained from. could not.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, both the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the main controller 110 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result. The main control device 110 performs the same game state. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are always stored in the main control device 110. Matches. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110. The jackpot lottery results were treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result from the pre-reading to the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unknown in which gaming state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead match. I do not know what to do.

  Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. In 113, the jackpot lottery prediction result was treated as unreliable. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the audio ramp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine refrains from using the prediction result, and performs processing irrelevant to the actual jackpot lottery result (for example, Continuous announcement effects, ending effects, etc.). For this reason, the pre-reading of the jackpot effect lottery results and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery have been wasted.

  In contrast to such a conventional pachinko machine, the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, uses the jackpot random number table 202a1, The main control device 110 can determine whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are: In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the main control device 110.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. it is conceivable that. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat the predicted result that was treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine as being credible in the present pachinko machine 10. it can. As a result, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result becomes higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device At 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable, and the prediction result was not used. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  When this is solved by a method different from the present embodiment, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound ramp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results.

  That is, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result corresponding to each of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. It is conceivable that it is possible to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to, and to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the result.

  With such a configuration, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is used in the audio lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can be always treated as being reliable. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, as described above, when the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read in the main control device 110, they are stored in the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, as in the case of the jackpot lottery. A process of comparing the hit value with each other is performed. Therefore, every time a new start winning is generated, the process of comparing the first random number counter C1 and the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one is performed up to 33 times. It must be done repeatedly. Therefore, each time a new start prize is generated, the comparison process may take a long time every time, and the time may be wasted.

  In addition, the main controller 110 uses the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to obtain prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively. If used, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, the comparison process that may take time in main controller 110 is wasted. Further, the main control unit 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start prize is won, but the voice lamp control unit 113 uses only one prediction result, so that useless prediction results always occur. Therefore, the number of wasteful prediction results increases as compared with the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, and therefore requires a larger storage area than in the related art. Further, main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio ramp control device 113, respectively, so that data transmitted from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are pre-read in the main control device 110, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained by using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to and to notify the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as an increase in processing time and control load occur.

  Further, when solving by another method, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound ramp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main controller 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the end of the current jackpot to pre-read each of the pending start winnings. It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the prediction results obtained by the redoing, respectively.

  With this configuration, in the main control device 110, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed and before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, instead, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 is performed instead. The result can be used as trustworthy.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, the pre-reading for each pending start winning in the main controller 110 is redone, and each prediction result obtained in the redo is the main result. The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 again. Therefore, the look-ahead of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery targeted for re-execution and the prediction results are wasted.

  Therefore, useless processing is performed in main controller 110, and a control burden is imposed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives a useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also performs useless processing, and the control burden is increased. Hangs. Further, the data transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that data or the like to be transmitted preferentially may not be transmitted, and the control load of main controller 110 may be increased. In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 also receives more data, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the game state at the time of the end of the current big hit to start each of the pending start winnings. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 again of the prediction results obtained by rereading the pre-reading of the Although more possible prediction results can be handled, other problems such as increased useless processing and increased control load arise.

  Further, when solving by another method, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound ramp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot, the main control device 110 sets a jackpot random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. It is conceivable that prefetching is performed for each pending start winning using 202a1 and 202a2, and each prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 can perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the pre-reading is obtained in the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot is completed. . Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the sound lamp controller 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Can be treated as Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using the reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress a problem such as execution of a process (for example, an effect or the like) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result.

  However, only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed, so that the number of prefetching (frequency) is reduced. Then, the number of prediction results of the jackpot lottery notified from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 also decreases, so that the frequency of using the prediction results of the jackpot lottery in the audio ramp control device 113 decreases, and Opportunities to execute the notice production will be reduced. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting.

  As described above, the main control device 110 does not normally pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the main control device 110 responds to the game state at the end of the big hit only when the pachinko machine 10 has a big hit. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to perform a look-ahead for each pending start winning prize, and to notify each prediction result from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. However, although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results is reduced, and there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting. Occurs.

  As described above, in the three other solutions different from the above-described embodiment, although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Another problem arises in that the processing time, useless processing, and control load increase, and that the pachinko machine 10 may be less interesting.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, in addition to the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch, Although transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, the information indicating the precondition for the pre-reading prediction is only one bit. Further, the fan control command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, at the end of the jackpot. The information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the amount of data processed in the MPUs 201 and 221 is almost the same as in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is calculated based on the result of the conventional pachinko machine that may be regarded as unreliable even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 because the prediction result may be regarded as reliable. It can be handled favorably. Therefore, the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result becomes higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is appropriately handled without causing a problem such as an increase in processing time and a control load and a problem such as a useless process and an increase in a control load. In addition, it is possible to increase opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball newly wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1, and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning gaming state flag). Then, when the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110, prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern The type is pre-read in main controller 110.

  Then, when prefetching is performed in the main control device 110, if the data to be prefetched is obtained along with the start winning prize other than during the jackpot, the winning game state flag in the data is set to Based on this, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used for prefetching are determined. On the other hand, if the data to be prefetched is data that is acquired with the start winning prize during the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used for the prefetch are determined based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d. . When the prize-winning game state flag or the post-big-hit game state flag 203d is off (indicating a low-probability state), the low-probability-use big-hit random number table 202a1 is selected, and the prize-winning game state flag or When the gaming state flag 203d is ON (indicating the high probability state), the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the big hit, and when the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start winning during the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data is always off. . Therefore, when the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are determined based on the winning-state gaming state flags in the data, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is always selected. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is less likely to coincide with the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result deteriorates.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the data to be prefetched is data acquired with the start winning during the jackpot, the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 is determined. Thereby, the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result can be improved.

  That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of the jackpot, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot has already been determined. The control device 110 can determine the game state at the end of the big hit. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery held is one in the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. It is sequentially executed in main controller 110 in order.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a starting prize during a jackpot, and when performing pre-reading for the starting prize, it is better to set the prediction precondition to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than to always set the prediction precondition to the low probability state. The possibility that the prediction result of the lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110 can be improved. Therefore, the number of prediction results that can be treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be increased, and in this embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, a stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot, The big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. When the big hit effect ends, an ending effect that is a part of the big hit effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this ending effect, when the jackpot is ended and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning, whether the lottery result is a jackpot in any of the jackpot lotteries is notified to the player ( The fixed effect display is performed) or the player is notified that the big hit is finished (normal display is performed). Whether the “final effect display” or the “normal display” is performed in the ending effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Specifically, immediately before the ending effect is started, the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, and the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the ending mode counter are determined. Based on the value of 223f or the like, it is determined whether the display mode of the ending effect is “confirmed effect display” or “normal display”. The read-ahead information storage area 223a is provided with one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The smaller the area number, the older the starting time. The prefetch information corresponding to the winning is stored.

  When the ending effect deciding process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the sound ramp control device 113, of the reserved areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a, the reserved areas are stored in the reserved area in ascending order of area number. The pre-reading information is obtained one by one and is compared with the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c (see S1401 to S1410).

  Then, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the prediction precondition in the pre-read information matches the game state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c, as described above, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed. In this case, the main control device 110 matches the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the voice lamp controller 113 determines the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, in this case, in the process of S1407, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot.

  Then, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of place, another look-ahead information stored in the reserved area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is confirmed. Specifically, each processing of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to the process of S1411 without checking the remaining prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, A process for determining whether to set the display mode of the ending effect to “determined effect display” is executed. In other words, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and if the prediction result becomes a jackpot, the process does not return to each of the processes of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the jackpot has ended and the lottery result will be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery held at the same time as the "confirmed effect display". This is because if there is at least one of the jackpot lotteries performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is not necessary to check the pre-read information, the check is not performed, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and in the process of S1406, it is determined that the prediction precondition in the prefetch information does not match the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c. In this case, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead are drawn. And the main controller 110 does not match. Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information may be treated as reliable. Next, the processing in S1408 determines whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot. Is determined. Then, in the processing of S1408, if it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result can be trusted and considered to be out of range. Let it run.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap each other. You have set the hit value. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch do not match in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information in the process of S1408 is the jackpot. Then, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are not determined by the main controller 110 as to whether they match or not. Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the process of S1408, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result can be considered to be out of order. can do. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information differs from the gaming state indicated by the post-big-hit gaming state flag 223c, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S1408. If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  Then, according to the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33), when the processes of S1404 to S1410 are executed, in the process of S1406, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the after-big hit If the game state indicated by the game state flag 223c is different (S1406: No), and it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of place (S1408: No), S1404 to S1410 Can be stopped there. That is, it is unclear whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result corresponding to the predicted result match, and if the predicted result cannot be trusted, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410 and the remaining processes are not performed. Do not check for prefetch information. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information cannot be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33), when it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the normal display is set as the ending effect display mode. It is configured so that: With this, even though the “determination effect display” was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is thereafter terminated, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  The above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113. When the start timing is reached, it is transmitted from main controller 110. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the big hit effect is started, but is executed after waiting until just before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times). If the prefetch information is acquired from the prefetch information storage area 223a after waiting just before the start of the ending effect to be performed, four prefetch information can be acquired in most cases.

  Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is more likely that a larger amount of prefetch information can be obtained than in the case where the ending effect determination process is performed immediately after the big hit effect is started. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, and if any of the held jackpot lotteries is performed after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result is It is possible to increase opportunities for giving the player a sense of expectation that the game will be performed. In addition, each time a jackpot lottery is held, it is possible to increase opportunities to make the player feel delighted, and to increase opportunities for the player to increase expectation that the next hit will be a big hit. Can be enhanced.

  The above is the description of the first embodiment. As described above, in the first embodiment, as an example in which the sound lamp control device 113 can appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, in the ending effect determination process executed during the jackpot (see FIG. 33), the jackpot is determined. The example has been described in which the prediction result of the lottery is appropriately handled and the display mode of the ending effect is determined to be “determined effect display” or “normal display”.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the determination of the display mode of the ending effect, and the processing of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled as long as the process handles the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. For example, as one of the processes for handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, there is a process for a continuous announcement effect. The present invention can also be applied to the process related to the continuous announcement effect, and naturally, it is possible to appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  Next, as a second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a process related to a continuous announcement effect will be described. In the second embodiment, only the portions different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to the above-described counters 223b and 223f to 223h, and the flags 223c to 223e and 223i, a prefetch information storage area in which a part of the configuration is added compared to the first embodiment. 223a, a newly added game state flag 223j, and a newly added effect execution time game state flag 223k.

  Here, details of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment.

  The difference between the look-ahead information storage area 223a in the second embodiment and the look-ahead information storage area 223a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is that each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area has The difference is whether or not the notice execution status area 223a4 exists. As in the first embodiment, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment also stores various types of information (prefetch preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, and fluctuations) notified from the main controller 110 by a prefetch command. This is an area for storing pattern type prediction results).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the look-ahead information storage area 223a in the second embodiment includes, as in the first embodiment, one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, a continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is provided in each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area. The continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is an area for storing the continuous notice execution status. This indicates whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect in the variable effect when the variable effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, 13 types of continuous notice execution statuses are provided, and different status values are assigned to each status. Although details will be described later, there are six types of status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect, and six types of status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. In addition, there are provided 13 types of statuses, ie, one type indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed in the variable effect.

  For the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable production, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect out of the probability change jackpot, the normal jackpot, and the deviation, and the prediction that triggered the continuous announcement effect Status values of “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” are assigned so that it is possible to determine whether the result is a result. In addition, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is the type of the prediction result used for the determination when the continuous announcement effect is determined to be executed.

  The status value “1” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is the probability change jackpot, but the prediction result is not the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “2” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is usually a jackpot, and the status value “3” indicates that the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is , Which indicates that each prediction result is not a trigger for a continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, the status value “11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is the probability change jackpot, and that the prediction result is the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “12” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a normal jackpot, and the status value “13” indicates the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect. This indicates that the type is out of range, and that each prediction result is a trigger for a continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, for the status indicating that the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed in the variable production but was canceled, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement production out of the probability variable jackpot, the normal jackpot, and the miss Also, status values of "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" are assigned so that it is possible to determine whether or not the prediction result is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect.

  In the present embodiment, the status values are positive status values “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” and negative status values “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12”. , -13 ", but the status values may be distinguished by other methods. For example, if the status value is managed by 1 byte or 2 bytes, the status value may be distinguished by changing the most significant bit to 0 or 1. Specifically, when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates the above-described positive status value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the above-described negative status value. Note that other bits may be changed instead of the most significant bit. In addition, the status value may be only one of a positive status value and a negative status value, and the status values may be distinguished by assigning each status value so that each status value is different.

  The status value “−1” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect was the probability change jackpot, but the prediction result was not the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “−2” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous preview effect was a normal jackpot, and the status value “−3” indicates the prediction that triggered the continuous preview effect. Although the result indicates that it was out of order, it indicates that each prediction result was not a trigger for the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, the status value “−11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect was the probability change jackpot, and that the prediction result was the opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. Similarly, the status value “−12” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous preview effect was a normal jackpot, and the status value “−13” triggered the continuous preview effect. This indicates that the type of the prediction result is out of range, and that each prediction result is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect. Then, a status value of “0” is assigned to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed in the variable effect.

  Any one of these 13 types of status values is stored in the above-described continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4. As described in the first embodiment, the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area in the prefetch information storage area 223a are used in the RAM initial value setting processing (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Initialization is performed, and the inside of each of the five read-ahead information storage areas 223a is cleared to zero. That is, the status value of the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is set to “0” when the power is turned on.

  Also, the status value of the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 is determined when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command and determines to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch information extracted from the prefetch command. Be changed. As described above, the pre-read command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, and various information (pre-reading preconditions, prediction results of the jackpot lottery, prediction results of the fluctuation pattern type) are extracted from the pre-read command as pre-read information. Then, the prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area (one of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Then, a continuous announcement determination process described later (see FIG. 59) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the pre-read information newly stored in the reserved area. Here, if it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the continuous announcement effect is displayed in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 of the holding area where the prefetch information is newly stored, and the new announcement is executed in the variable effect. A status value (one of 11, 12, and 13) indicating that the prediction result of the pre-reading information is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect is set to one according to the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect. Is done.

  For example, if the prediction result of the new look-ahead information is a probability change jackpot, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the probability change jackpot becomes the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect, and as a result, the continuous announcement execution A status value “11” is set in the status storage area 223a4.

  Further, for all the reserved areas whose area numbers are smaller than the reserved area in which the prefetch information is newly stored, that is, for all the reserved areas in which the prefetch information is already stored, the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 stores the status. The value is set. Although the status value set here indicates that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect, the pre-reading information in the hold area where the status value is set is not a trigger for the continuous announcement effect. One of the indicated values (one of 1, 2, and 3) is set according to the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect.

  For example, when the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a probability change jackpot, the status value “1” is stored in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 for all the reserved areas in which the prefetch information is already stored. Is set.

  Then, the continuous notice status stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the reserved area is stored in the execution area and is referred to by the MPU 221 when the variable effect corresponding to the reserved area is started. Although the details will be described later, when the variable effect is started, if the continuous announcement execution status of the execution area is any of “1, 2, 3”, the continuous announcement is performed in the variable effect to be started. An effect is performed, and if the status value is “0”, “11, 12, 13”, or “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12, −13”, the fluctuating effect to be started. In, a notice effect is not performed, and a normal variable effect is performed.

  Further, although details will be described later, it is determined that the prediction result of the look-ahead information stored in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a cannot be trusted when the variable effect scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect is started. Then, a status value indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed but has been canceled is set in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. Specifically, a positive sign status value stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is assigned a minus sign and set to a negative sign.

  For example, when the variable effect is started, the status value in the continuous announcement execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area is “1”, and it is determined that the prediction result of the prefetch information stored in the execution area cannot be trusted. Then, the status value “−1” is set in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. As a result, even if the variable effect scheduled to execute the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect is not performed, and the normal variable effect is performed.

  In the present embodiment, in order to easily show the continuous notice execution status in the referenced drawings (FIGS. 62, 64, 66, and 68), not the status value but the presence / absence of a flag, the shape of the flag, and Indicate whether the flag is standing or falling. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, no flag is described. When the status value is a positive number, a flag is set up, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is set down. When the status value is “1”, it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, when the status value is “11”, the flag is a black triangle flag, when the status value is “2”, it is a white square flag, and when the status value is “12”, it is a black square flag. A value of “3” is a white flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square. Show.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The game state flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state (probable change), similarly to the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110. When the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, and when the gaming state flag 223j is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. Is shown.

  This game state flag 223j is set to off in the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. When the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 and the jackpot ends (that is, when the ending effect ends), the setting is made according to the jackpot type. Specifically, if the jackpot type is the probability change jackpot, the gaming state flag 223j is set to ON at the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is the probability change jackpot, the game state flag 223j is set to off at the end of the jackpot.

  Note that the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is set to off before the start of the jackpot, and is set to on or off after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. 223j is set to ON or OFF only after the end of the big hit. This is because the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to set the game state flag 223j because it does not refer to the game state flag 223j during the big hit. Note that the game state flag 223j may be set to off before the start of the big hit, similarly to the game state flag 203a.

  The gaming state flag 223j is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is credible or unreliable. If the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. If the flag 223j is off and the main controller 110 performs a jackpot lottery, the main controller At 110, it means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. Therefore, when the main controller 110 performs a jackpot lottery when the flag 223j is on, the main controller 110 Means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Then, as described above, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the pre-read information corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a in the sound lamp controller 113. You.

  In addition, as described above, the execution area and the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a include the jackpot lottery prediction result and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result. In addition, prediction preconditions for prefetching are also stored. Therefore, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area and the reserved area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type are determined. It is possible to determine whether the data is pre-read based on such a prediction precondition. That is, it is possible to determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used in the pre-reading performed by the main control device 110.

  Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the gaming state flag 223j is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, and is used in the current jackpot lottery. The main controller 110 can determine whether the large hit random number tables 202a1, 202 scheduled to be performed and the big hit random number tables 202a1, 202 used in the pre-reading of the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110.

  As a result of the comparison, when the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the predicted result of the current big hit lottery and the current lottery result of the big hit lottery match in the main control device 110, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 determines that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. On the other hand, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, the predicted result of the current jackpot lottery and the result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110. At 113, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is unreliable.

  The game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (when one target variable effect among the suspended variable effects is executed). (Probably changing).

  If the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is off, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state when one target variable effect is executed. As described above, since the variable effect is executed in accordance with the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is always performed before the variable effect. Therefore, if the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is off, the main control device 110 refers to the low-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a1 to execute the jackpot lottery when the target variable effect is executed. Means to be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect state game state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state when one target variable effect is executed. That is, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is ON, when one target variable effect is executed, the main control device 110 refers to the high probability time jackpot random number table 202a2 to execute the jackpot lottery. Means to be done.

  The game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to off in the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Further, although details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223j is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 actually used in the jackpot lottery are compared. In the case where it is determined that the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result match in the main controller 110, and that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area can be trusted. If the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set based on the predicted result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area. .

  Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, the above-described post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c is set. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the state of the gaming state flag 223j is set. Note that, in the case of setting the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution during the big hit, the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set without checking the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area. Is also good.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type. In other words, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes according to the jackpot type, the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to the game after the jackpot. The state of the state flag 223c is set, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is set. Thereby, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery.

  On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is out of order and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, the state of the gaming state flag 223j is set in the effect state gaming state flag 223k. Then, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Thereby, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery. As described above, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (that is, when the next variable effect is executed) is set to the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. You.

  The game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is credible or unreliable. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution Is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved first area can be trusted.

  Here, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 is set in the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Therefore, by comparing the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution with the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the jackpot lottery result, The audio ramp control device 113 can determine whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  If the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 can determine that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is reliable.

  Here, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the effect execution state gaming state flag 223k is set, and further, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is set. While it is determined to be reliable, the comparison is repeated in the order of the reserved second area, the reserved third area, and the reserved fourth area. In the present embodiment, among the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, data corresponding to a start winning prize that is earlier in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, In the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest start winning is stored. Therefore, the main control is performed by setting the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution while determining the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area. In the order in which the jackpot lottery is performed in the device 110, it can be determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps for executing the same processing as in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the second embodiment. In the main process, after the process of S1111 is executed and the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501). In the processing of S3501, if it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501: Yes), the state of the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set in the game state flag 223j of the RAM 223 (S3502).

  Specifically, when the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is off and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state when the big hit ends, the gaming state flag 223j is also set to off. On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 223c is on and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 223j is also set on. In the process of S3501, if it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1112.

  Further, in the processing of S1101, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or the previous execution of the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), S1102 to S1111 , And the processing of S3501 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the start of the main processing or the processing of S1101 last time (S1101: No), S1102 to S1111 and S3501 are performed. The processing shifts to the processing of S1112 without performing the processing of.

  According to the main process shown in FIG. 58, when the ending effect ends (that is, when the big hit ends), the gaming state flag 223j is set to indicate the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit. You can set the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) in the second embodiment. This continuous announcement determination processing (S1211) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and, like the first embodiment, is read ahead. When the command is received, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect.

  In the continuous announcement determination process, in the process of S1302, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information read in the process of S1301 is “big hit” (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1312. . On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301 is “out” (S1302: No), the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the process of S1301 is “Super”. (S3601).

  In the process of S3601, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “super reach” (S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is not “super reach” and is another variation pattern type (S3601: No), the process ends.

  Further, in the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous announcement determination range and the continuous announcement effect is not started (S1316: No), the process of S3602 and thereafter is skipped. The process ends, and returns to the command determination process. That is, a continuous announcement effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous announcement determination range and the continuous announcement effect is started (S1316: Yes), among the prefetch information read out in the process of S1301 It is determined what the success or failure is in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (S3602). When the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “probably variable jackpot” (S3602: probability variable jackpot), the prediction of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a is performed. The continuous notice execution status of all the holding areas storing the results is set to "1" (S3603). In other words, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a jackpot is set.

  In addition, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “normal jackpot” (S3602: normal jackpot), the jackpot lottery in the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Is set to "2" for the continuous notice execution status of all the reserved areas in which the prediction result is stored (S3604). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is a normal jackpot is set.

  In addition, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S3602: out), the prediction of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous notice execution status of all the holding areas storing the results is set to “3” (S3605). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is out of range is set.

Next, of the reserved areas of the read-ahead information storage area 223a, continuous notice of the reserved area in which the read-ahead information (that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of the pre-read) is stored last. “10” is added to the execution status (S3606)
In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the holding area where the pre-reading information is stored last. Is started, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area in which the pre-read information is stored last is triggered. Therefore, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started, by adding "10" to the continuous announcement execution status of the reserved area where the prefetch information is stored last, the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect is stored. The continuous notice status of the reserved area that has been set can be set to any of "11, 12, 13". Therefore, when referring to the continuous announcement status of each reservation area, it is determined based on the status value whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the reservation area is the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect or is different. it can.

  According to the continuous announcement determination process shown in FIG. 59 described above, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started, the jackpot lottery in the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Can be set to the status value "1, 2, 3" indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect.

  Also, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be started, the status value is increased by “10” for the hold area storing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery which triggered the determination, and the continuous announcement status is increased. It can be set to any of "11, 12, 13". Therefore, when referring to the continuous announcement status of each reservation area, it is determined based on the status value whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the reservation area is the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement effect or is different. it can.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112) in the second embodiment.

  The variable display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. In addition, in order to execute the continuous announcement effect in the variable effect, a stop type command for display is set based on the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the variable display setting process, the process of S1506 is executed to shift the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, and then the prefetch information of the prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223a by the process of S1506 is shifted. The reserved area that has become empty due to the shift is cleared (S3701). Then, the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is acquired (S3702), and the acquired continuous notice execution status indicates that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect. 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 "(S3703).

  In the process of S3703, when the acquired continuous notice execution status is the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3703: Yes), the continuous notice is executed. The notice execution status confirmation processing A is executed (S3702). Although details will be described later, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the continuous notice effect is set to be executed in the variable effect. By comparing the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is credible. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect.

  Further, in the process of S3703, when the acquired continuous notice execution status is other than the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3703: No). , Skip the processing of S3704, and proceed to the processing of S1507. Then, the process of S1509 is executed, and in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), if the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223, then the prefetch information storage area 223a Then, the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area is acquired (S3705).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect (S3706). In the process of S3706, if the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect (S3706: Yes), A chance is set as the stop type (S3707), and the flow shifts to the process of S1514.

  By the process of S3707, the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the chance eye (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, as a continuous announcement effect, when the variable effect is stopped on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol serving as a chance can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3706, if the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is other than the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3706: No), The stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S3708), and the process shifts to S1514.

  By the process of S3708, the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect, and the last time the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Is not set as the stop type. Also, a status "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect, but was canceled, or a continuous effect in the variable effect. Similarly, in the case of the status “0” indicating that the notice effect is not executed, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 60, when the stop type of the current fluctuation effect is set, the stop type is determined based on the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Can be set, or the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be set as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704).

  This continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) is executed in the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and newly changed in the third symbol display device 113. When the effect is started, it is executed if the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed in the variable effect. Then, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a is reliable or not, and if it is not reliable, the continuous announcement effect is executed for the variable effect executed this time. Set to abort.

  In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A, first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S3801). Then, the prediction precondition acquired in the processing of S3801 is compared with the gaming state flag 223j (S3802). Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-read is determined by the main control command. The device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113. If the prediction precondition is in the low-probability state, it means that the main controller 110 has used the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching. Means that the pre-reading has been performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information, and the main control device 110 obtains the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Can be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the pre-read information corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a in the sound lamp controller 113. You. Therefore, by referring to the prediction precondition of the prefetch information stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, in the prefetch performed in response to the jackpot lottery performed by the main controller 110, which of the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 can be used to determine whether a prediction result has been obtained.

  Further, as described above, the gaming state flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (probable change), and the gaming state flag 223j is off. The case indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. Therefore, when the main control device 110 performs the jackpot lottery, it means that the main control device 110 refers to the low-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a1 and performs the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 223j is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. This means that the jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can determine the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current big hit lottery performed by the main control device 110 based on the state of the game state flag 223j.

  Therefore, in the above-described processing of S3803, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, the jackpot random number used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is compared. The main controller 110 can compare whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery.

  Then, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), the current big hit lottery is performed. This is a case where the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the corresponding prefetch and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery match. Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the current big hit lottery and the current In the main control device 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery matches. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, when the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate a different game state (S3803: No), the pre-condition is used in the pre-read corresponding to the current jackpot lottery. In this case, the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It is unclear whether they match in main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), as described above, the processing of S3801 is performed. This is a prediction result obtained in the process, in which the main controller 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed this time with the current lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, the current setting is maintained and the present process is ended so that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the current variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), as described above, The main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current lottery result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment also uses the jackpot lottery. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, as described in the first embodiment, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery may be exceptionally handled as a reliable one. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not It is determined whether it is a jackpot (S3804).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the large random number table 202a2 for high probability do not overlap. Thus, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the look-ahead information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the current jackpot lottery Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the lottery result will be out of the present jackpot lottery. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are not determined by the main controller 110 to be consistent or undetermined, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value that is a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value indicated by becomes a hit value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a big hit or a miss in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally excluded. In this case, the current setting is maintained so that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the current variable effect, and the process ends.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled. In this case, the setting is maintained so that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the current fluctuation effect, so that the opportunity to execute the continuous announcement effect can be increased.

  Also, in the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out of order (S3804: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state flag 223j are displayed. This is a case where the predicted gaming state differs from the indicated gaming state and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not.

  Therefore, in this case, a minus sign is given to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect. But change to a status indicating that it has been aborted. As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Execution can be stopped.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A shown in FIG. 61 described above, in the processing of S3803, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, The main control device 110 can compare whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Become. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110. The results of the lottery were treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223j are stored in the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is stored. It can always be determined whether or not 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, whether the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main In the present embodiment, the discrimination can be performed even in the case where the information is unknown for the pachinko machine.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same. And the predicted result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, the game state is used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot random determination. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current lottery result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment also uses the jackpot lottery. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information differs from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the current jackpot lottery are displayed. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot in the processing of S3804, the prediction result In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S3804. For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed to a variable effect. Is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed but was canceled. As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped.

  That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation change executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A described above, in the processing of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states. (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, and it is determined whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted. As a matter of course, the processing may proceed to S3805 without performing the processing in S3804.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and the fluctuation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. However, in this embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed at the end of the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. May be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the fluctuation effect is a continuous announcement effect, but a different image is displayed during the fluctuation effect, or a sound different from the normal sound is displayed. The effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A may be executed when the variable effect is started, as in the present embodiment.

  Next, an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A.

  In FIG. 62, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, a floating effect is newly executed based on the reserved starting winning, and two starting winnings are provided separately from the starting winning. This indicates that the status is suspended. In addition, in each of the variable effects that are newly performed and the variable effects corresponding to the two pending start winnings, the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a has the prefetch information The prediction result of the jackpot lottery deviates, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the data of the status value “1” is stored as the continuous announcement execution status.

  In addition, in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “1” is a continuous announcement execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the probability change jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “11” is the continuous announcement execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to easily show the continuous notice execution status in the drawings (FIGS. 62, 64, 66, and 68), the presence / absence of a flag, the shape of the flag, The flag indicates whether the flag is standing or falling. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, no flag is described. When the status value is a positive number, a flag is set up, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is set down. When the status value is “1”, it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, when the status value is “11”, the flag is a black triangle flag, when the status value is “2”, it is a white square flag, and when the status value is “12”, it is a black square flag. A value of “3” is a white flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square. Show.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction are calculated from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired jackpot lottery result is out of order. In the main control device 110, it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result matches the lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired, that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery executed this time.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the process of S3805, where a minus sign is given to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area, and as a result, the status value is changed to “−1”, and the continuous notice effect is produced in the variable effect. Was changed to a status indicating that it was scheduled to be executed but was canceled. Then, the current continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A ends.

  Then, after the current continuous announcement execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the continuous announcement execution status is displayed. Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. As a result, in the present variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  As described above, when the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect executed this time can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Then, when the current variable effect ends and the next variable effect is executed, as described above, the information is stored in each area (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A shift process is performed to shift the data that has been shifted to the execution area side. Specifically, the prefetch information in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area → the first reserved area, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-2) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are firstly executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, as in the previous case. In the processing of S3802, the obtained prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, although the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot. As described above, even if the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the actual jackpot lottery indicates the lottery result. Comes off.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state. Similarly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit is lost when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read information does not become unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out of order. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can regard the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery as being out of order.

  As described above, in the case of the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine, it is unclear whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result treated as unreliable However, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be able to handle the result as a reliable one, and thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  Then, in this case, the flow shifts to the processing of S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the second continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A ends. Then, after the second continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is completed, in the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the second variable effect to be executed is set, the continuous notice Since the status value of the execution status is "1", the flow branches to S3706: Yes, and "chance chance" is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous announcement effect is performed in the present fluctuation effect, and a “chance eye” is displayed in the fluctuation effect.

  As described above, with the conventional audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted and the continuous announcement effect in the variable effect is stopped, the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment At 113, the setting to execute the continuous announcement effect can be maintained, and the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to execute the continuous announcement effect.

  Then, when the second variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is executed, similarly to the previous time, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area). Are shifted to the execution area side, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-3) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are firstly executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, as in the previous case. In the processing of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j match, so that the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are determined by the main controller 110. Matches. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the flow shifts to S3804: Yes processing, the current state is maintained, and the third continuous preview execution status confirmation processing A ends.

  However, the continuous announcement execution status has a status value of “11”, indicating that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a trigger for the continuous announcement effect. That is, the third variable effect is the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, after the third consecutive notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the third variation effect to be executed is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process proceeds to S3706: No. Then, the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the present variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a trigger of the continuous announcement effect, and the variable effect to be executed is the last variable effect to execute the continuous announcement effect, the main control device The stop type instructed by the stop type command from 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, it is suggested to the player that the continuous announcement effect is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a continuous announcement execution status confirmation process B which is a modification of the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process B which is a modified example of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. It is set so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect is stopped. On the other hand, in the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process B, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed from the variation effect to be executed this time to the last variation effect that was to execute the continuous announcement effect. Set to abort.

  This continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B is executed in place of the continuous notice execution status A described above. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, when a new variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 113, continuous notice is given in the variable effect. It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B, the following processing is executed instead of the processing of S3805 described above. That is, in the prefetch information storage area 223a, a minus sign is given to the continuous announcement execution status of all the areas (execution area, the first to fourth areas of the suspension) in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (that is, the prefetch information) is stored. (S3901), and changes each continuous notice execution status to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled.

  As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), every time the stop type of each variable effect that was to execute the continuous announcement effect is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Can be stopped for all the variable effects that were scheduled to be executed.

  According to the continuous notice execution status B shown in FIG. 63 described above, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the processing of S3804, When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out of order and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown, not only the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also the A minus sign can also be given to the continuous notice execution status of all the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in which the prefetch information is stored.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown. That is, if it is not clear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not, the lottery results of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries will also be unknown.

  Therefore, in the continuous announcement execution status processing B, not only the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also the continuous announcement execution status stored in all the reserved areas is fluctuated. Has been changed to a status indicating that a continuous announcement effect was to be executed but was canceled. As a result, the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and every time the stop type is set for the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped in each of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after this time is unknown, a continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud, and a problem that a continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states in the processing of S3803, (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, and it is determined whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted. As a matter of course, the processing may proceed to S3901 without performing the processing in S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B, as in the case of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B is performed between the start of the variable effect and immediately before the end of the variable effect. May be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the fluctuation effect is a continuous announcement effect, but a different image is displayed during the fluctuation effect, or a sound different from the normal sound is displayed. The effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Here, referring to FIG. 64, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the continuous announcement execution status is changed by the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B.

  In FIG. 64, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the reserved starting winning, and two starting winnings are provided separately from the starting winning. This indicates that the status is suspended. In addition, in each of the variable effects that are newly performed and the variable effects corresponding to the two pending start winnings, the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is ON, and as shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a has the prefetch information The prediction result of the jackpot lottery deviates, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the data of the status value “1” is stored as the continuous announcement execution status.

  Also, in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is deviated long, the prediction precondition is low probability, and the status value “1” is set as the continuous announcement execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probable jackpot, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value "11 Is stored.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B (see FIG. 63) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction are calculated from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired jackpot lottery result is out of order. In the main control device 110, it is unclear whether the actual jackpot lottery result matches the lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired, that is, the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the processing of S3901, and in the prefetch information storage area 223a, all the areas where the jackpot lottery prediction results (that is, the prefetch information) are stored (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area). A minus sign is attached to the continuous notice execution status of ()). As a result, the status values of the execution area and the first hold area are both changed to “−1”, and the status value of the second hold area is changed to “−11”, and the continuous announcement effect is executed in the variable effect. The status is changed to indicate that it was scheduled but was canceled. Then, the present continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B ends.

  Then, after the current continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B is completed, in the variation display setting processing (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set, the continuous announcement execution status is displayed. Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. As a result, in the present variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  Then, in both the case where the second variable effect is executed after the current variable effect is completed and the case where the third variable effect is executed, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is performed. When the stop type of each variable effect is set, the status of the continuous notice execution status is “−11”, and the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the stop specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is performed. The type is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is suspended over each variation effect from the current variation effect to the last variation effect in which the continuous announcement effect was to be executed, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  In this way, if the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the continuous announcement production is performed from the current variation production to the last variation production that was to execute the continuous announcement production. Can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modified example of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A and B described above, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in only the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C, whether the lottery results of the jackpot lottery stored in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) as well as the execution area can be trusted for all the holding areas Determine whether or not.

  Further, in the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C, if it is determined that the prediction result stored in any of the areas is unreliable, the continuous announcement production is performed from the variable effect corresponding to the prediction result determined to be unreliable. The setting is made so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is suspended over each of the variable effects up to the last variable effect that was scheduled to be executed.

  This continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is executed instead of the continuous notice execution statuses A and B described above. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, when a new variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 113, continuous notice is given in the variable effect. It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, the processing of S3801 to S3803 is executed, and in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are the same. If it indicates (S3803: Yes), it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S4001).

  Here, if it is determined as S4001: Yes, the prediction precondition acquired in the processing of S3801 matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction of the jackpot lottery acquired in the processing of S3801. Since the result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted. Furthermore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the processing of S3801 is a jackpot, after the current variable effect ends, the jackpot always becomes the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result.

  Then, as described above, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly changed according to the jackpot type. Is set to Therefore, after the jackpot that is the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type that is the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined from the jackpot type indicated by the prediction result. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the process of S4001, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S4001: Yes), the effect execution game state flag 223k of the RAM 223 is set to the pachinko machine at the end of the jackpot. A game state set to 10 is set (S4002). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set. Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S4004.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is not correct (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003. In the processing of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate a different game state (S3803: No), the pre-read information storage area 223a is stored in the pre-read information storage area 223a. It is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S3804).

  In the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally excluded. Since it can be handled as trustworthy, the processing shifts to S4003. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  In the processing of S4003, the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, that is, the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the effect execution state game state flag 223k of the RAM 223 (S4003). Specifically, when the game state flag 223j is on, the effect state game state flag 223k is also set to on, and when the game state flag 223j is off, the effect state game state flag 223k is also off. Set.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type. In other words, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off. Therefore, if the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery is out of order, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the effect state gaming state flag 223k, so that the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the next jackpot lottery is set. 202a2 can be indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S4004.

  In the processing of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out of order (S3804: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j. This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the state. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not. Therefore, in this case, the process of S3901 is executed, and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, if the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states in the processing of S3803 (S3803: No), The process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is regarded as unreliable and the process of S3804 is performed. May be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  In the process of S4004, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is obtained (S4004), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005). . In the process of S4005, if the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b is 0 (S4005: No), the main controller 110 finishes this process because no jackpot lottery has been suspended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005: Yes), it means that one or more jackpot lotteries are suspended in the main control device 110. The prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are confirmed one by one from the held jackpot lottery in the order of the held jackpot lottery. Specifically, among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the reserved area having the smaller area number. Check one by one. It should be noted that data corresponding to a start winning a prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number in time.

  First, the variable i is set to 1 (S4006), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S4007). Then, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserved i-th area is compared with the game state indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k (S4008). As a result of the comparison, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the same game state (S4009).

  Here, by the processing of S4002 or the processing of S4003, the state of the flag 223k is changed so that the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery. Is set. Specifically, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is off, the main control device 110 refers to the low-probability-time jackpot random number table 202a1 to indicate that the next jackpot lottery will be performed. On the other hand, when the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is on, the main control device 110 refers to the high probability time jackpot random number table 202a2 to indicate that the next jackpot lottery will be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the data corresponding to the earlier start winning prize is stored as the area number is smaller as the area number is smaller. Therefore, at this point, the prefetch information corresponding to the next jackpot lottery is stored in the reserved first area.

  Therefore, in the process of S4007 described above, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the game state indicated by the effect state game state flag 223k, so that the game state is used in the prefetch corresponding to the next jackpot lottery. The main controller 110 can compare whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next jackpot lottery.

  Then, in the process of S4009, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the next time This is a case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, so that the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the next In the main control device 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery matches. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the next big hit lottery as reliable.

  Therefore, in the processing of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the jackpot lottery Then, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4010).

  In the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4010: Yes), the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. The game state to be set is set (S4011). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set. Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Then, control goes to a step S4014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is not correct (S4010: No), the process of S4011 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4014. As described above, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 does not change the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, so that the jackpot to be used in the jackpot lottery The random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not change. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of order, by maintaining the state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are updated. It can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  In the case of S4010: No, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, may be set in the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Specifically, when the game state flag 223j is on, the effect state game state flag 223k is also set to on, and when the game state flag 223j is off, the effect state game state flag 223k is also off. Set.

  Then, in the processing of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k indicate different gaming states (S4009: No), as described above. The main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next jackpot lottery. .

  Therefore, it is unknown whether the predicted result of the next big hit lottery and the lottery result of the next big hit lottery match in the main control device 110. In this case, even in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the big hit is determined. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be exceptionally treated as being credible. Therefore, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4012). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the large random number table 202a2 for high probability do not overlap. Thus, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the look-ahead information is different from the game state indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next jackpot lottery, Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 that are scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery do not match in the main control device 110, if the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the lottery result will be It will be off. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value that is a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but is an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value indicated by becomes a hit value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a big hit or a miss in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S4012, when the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4012: Yes), as described above, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally out of order and can be trusted. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4014. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as unreliable by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment even if the prediction result is treated as unreliable. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled. In that case, as will be described later, the process returns to step S4014, and the repetition process of steps S4007 to S4015 can be continuously performed. If an unreliable one of the jackpot lottery prediction results is found, By the processing of S4013 to be described later, the continuous notice effect can be stopped from the variable effect to the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the processing of S4014, 1 is added to the variable i (S4014), and it is determined whether or not the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015). In the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b (S4015: Yes), the prefetch information is also stored in another reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Since this is the case, the process returns to S4007, and the prefetch information stored in another reserved area is confirmed. After returning to the process of S4007, the processes of S4007 to S4015 described above are repeated, and the game state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in another reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area). Is compared with the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the reserved ball count counter 223b (S4015: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is deleted. This is the case when all are confirmed. In this case, there is no more pre-reading information to be confirmed, so this processing ends.

  Further, in the processing of S4012, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out of order (S4012: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state flag 223k for effect execution are indicated. This is a case where the predicted state of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state, and the prediction result is out of order. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unknown whether the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is a jackpot or a loss.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to each of the processes of S4007 to S4015, and shifts to the process of S4013. In the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the reserved i-th area is stored. A minus sign is given to the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the area to the reserved M-th area (S4013), and the process ends.

  That is, in the process of S4013, the continuous announcement execution status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect is changed to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. . As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process branches to S3706: No every time the variable effect stop type corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area is set. Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped over each variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area.

  In other words, if an unreliable thing is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, from the variable production corresponding to the prediction result to the last variable production that was to execute the continuous announcement production, You can cancel the continuous announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Also, as described above, in the continuous run execution status confirmation processing C, if it is not clear whether the actual jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot or a loss, it will not return to the processing of S4007 to S4015, and the remaining It is configured not to check the pre-read information. This is because when one of the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery is checked one by one from the jackpot lottery held in the main control device 110 in the order of the reserved lottery, the prediction result becomes one of the prediction results. If it becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  And since the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result becomes unknown. . Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C shown in FIG. 65, in the processing of S4008, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is compared with the game state indicated by the effect execution state game state flag 223k. The main controller 110 compares whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries match. it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery results of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are different in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the lottery of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries Since there is a possibility that the result is different from the result, the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats not only the current time but also the predicted result of the next big hit lottery as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries are controlled by the main control. In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the device 110.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k, the prefetch corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In this case, the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, the prediction result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery are unknown in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th one cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery. Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery in the i-th jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information does not match in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different in the processing of S4012. If not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery is also unknown.

  Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the status, and the continuous announcement execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed in the variable production but was canceled.

  As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the present embodiment, if the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states in the processing of S3803 (S3803: No), The process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is regarded as unreliable and the process of S3804 is performed. May be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  Also, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, in the processing of S4009, a game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and a game state indicated by the effect execution state flag 223k are different. In this case (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, but in the case of S4009: No, the jackpot lottery The prediction result may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S4013 without performing the process in S4012.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and the fluctuation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed at the end of the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. May be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the fluctuation effect is a continuous announcement effect, but a different image is displayed during the fluctuation effect, or a sound different from the normal sound is displayed. The effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C may be executed when the variable effect is started, as in the present embodiment.

  Further, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is executed when the variable effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, but is executed during the big hit instead of when the variable effect is started. You may comprise so that it may be. By configuring so as to be executed during the big hit, the number of times of execution of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, of the repeated processing of S4007 to S4015, the processing of S4010 is used to check whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the i-th area is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the repetitive processing may be interrupted there.

  Here, referring to FIG. 66, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, first hold area to fourth hold area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C.

  In FIG. 66, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, a floating effect is newly executed based on the reserved starting winning, and three starting winnings are provided separately from the starting winning. This indicates that the status is suspended. In addition, in each of the variable effects that are newly performed and the variable effects corresponding to the three pending start winnings, the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a has prefetch information as The prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the data of status value “3” is stored as the continuous announcement execution status.

  In addition, in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probable change jackpot, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the status value “3” is a continuous notice execution status as the prefetch information. Is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, and the status value “3” is set as the continuous announcement execution status. Is stored. In the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, and the status value “13” is set as the continuous announcement execution status. Is stored.

  When the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C (see FIG. 65) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Are acquired, and in the processing of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j match, so that the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are determined by the main controller 110. Matches. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4001 is executed, the process branches to S4001: No, and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, that is, the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 Is set.

  In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out. Therefore, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to the game state flag at the time of effect execution 223k, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are indicated by the game state flag at the time of effect execution 223k. Can be.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the processing of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution match, so that the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined by the main control. In device 110 they match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process branches to S4009: Yes, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the probability change jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and the game state at the time of the end of the jackpot, ie, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the probability change jackpot, is set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Is set. Specifically, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are obtained from the reserved second area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the process of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the effect state gaming state flag 223k, and the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result is out of order. It is unclear whether the predicted result matches the actual jackpot lottery result in main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4013, in which the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved second area to the reserved third area in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is indicated by a minus sign. Then, the continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. Specifically, the status value of the reserved second area is changed to “−3”, and the status value of the reserved third area is changed to “−13”. Is changed to a status indicating that Then, the present continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C ends.

  Then, after the current continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing C is completed, in the variation display setting processing (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the variation effect to be executed this time is set, the status of the continuous announcement status is set. Since the value is "3", the flow branches to S3706: Yes, and "chance eyes" is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous announcement effect is performed in the present fluctuation effect, and a “chance eye” is displayed in the fluctuation effect.

  Then, even when the stop type of the variable effect executed for the second time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “3”, so the process branches to S3706: Yes, and the variation in the third symbol display device 81. “Chance eyes” is set as the effect stop type. As a result, a continuous announcement effect is performed in the present fluctuation effect, and a “chance eye” is displayed in the fluctuation effect.

  However, when the stop type of the variable effect executed for the third time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−3”, so the process branches to S3706: No, and the main control device 110 stops. The stop type specified by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the third variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  When the stop type of the variable effect performed for the fourth time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−13”, so the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop from the main control device 110 is performed. The stop type specified by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the fourth variable effect, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the stop display is performed as usual.

  In this way, when an unreliable thing is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the variable production corresponding to the prediction result to the last variable production scheduled to execute the continuous announcement production is performed in each variable production. You can cancel the continuous announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a continuous announcement execution status confirmation process D which is a modification of the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process D which is a modified example of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C has been executed when the variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. However, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D is performed as described above. It is executed when it is determined in the determination process (see FIG. 59) that a continuous announcement effect is to be performed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D, processing similar to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is performed. The difference from the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C is that steps S4004 and S4005 are not provided, and steps S4101 to S4104 are added.

  In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S4101). If the big hit is not being made (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S3801 and the processing of S3801 to S3804 is performed. The processing, the processing of S3901, and the processing of S4001 to S4003 are executed. Then, when the processing of S4002 or the processing of S4003 is completed, the processing shifts to the processing of S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if the jackpot is during the big hit (S4101: Yes), the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the gaming state indicated by the after-big hit gaming state flag 223c, that is, the pachinko machine at the time when the current big hit is ended. Ten game states are set (S4102). The process moves to S4006. In the process of S4102, specifically, if the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is on, the effect state gaming state flag 223k is also set to on, and if the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is off, The game state flag 223k is also set to off.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the post-big hit game state flag 223c. Therefore, after the current big hit is completed, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c. Therefore, by setting the gaming state indicated by the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c in the rendering execution gaming state flag 223k, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the rendering execution gaming state flag 223k. Can be shown.

  Then, the processing of S4006 to S4015 is executed, and in the processing of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), or when the processing of S4013 ends Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103). In the process of S4103, if the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: Yes), the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed There are few, and the continuous announcement performance does not last long. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the continuous announcement effect does not last for a long time, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped. Thus, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term sense of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Specifically, in the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103: Yes), the correct one of the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is assigned to all the continuous announcement execution statuses (S4104), and the process ends. That is, in the process of S4104, the continuous announcement execution status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect is changed to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. .

  As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), if the stop type of the variable effect corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped over each variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area. As a result, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, if the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped, and this process ends.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D shown in FIG. 67, when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination processing (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the execution area It can be determined whether the prefetch information stored in the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) is reliable. Then, when an unreliable one of the prefetch information is found, a continuous production is performed from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prefetch information to the last fluctuation production in which the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed. You can cancel the notice production.

  Further, when the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is 2 or less, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is small. Then, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term feeling of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player. In the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D, if the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, but the number is not limited to 2 and may be set arbitrarily. .

  In the present embodiment, when the above-described continuous advance execution status confirmation processing D is determined to be performed in the above-described continuous advance determination processing (see FIG. 59), the above-described continuous advance execution status confirmation processing is performed. Similar to A, B, and C, the third symbol display device 81 may be executed when a variable effect is started. Further, it may be executed any time during the period from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. It may be performed during the fluctuation effect, during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation, or during the big hit.

  Here, referring to FIG. 68, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the continuous announcement execution status is changed by the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D.

  FIG. 68 shows a state in which four start winnings are suspended when the gaming state is in the low-probability state because the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability of a big hit. In addition, a state in which a continuous announcement effect is scheduled to be executed for each of the variable effects corresponding to the four start winning prizes on hold is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the game state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and the post-big hit game state flag 223c is on. As shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), in the execution area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, as the look-ahead information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the probability change jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, and the prediction precondition. Is a low probability state, and data of a status value “0” is stored as a continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the pre-read information in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value is “2” as a continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “2” is a continuous announcement execution status. Is stored.

  In the reserved third area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value is “2” as the continuous announcement execution status. Data is stored. In the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value "12 Is stored.

  When the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D (see FIG. 67) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), first, in the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not a big hit is present. Here, since it is during the probability change big hit, the process branches to S4101: Yes, and the state of the post-big hit game state 223c is set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. More specifically, since the current jackpot type is the probability change jackpot, the post-jackpot gaming state 223c is set to ON, and similarly to the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to ON. You.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the processing of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution match, so that the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined by the main control. In device 110 they match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the big hit lottery is out of order, the process branches to S4010: No, and the state of the effect execution state gaming state flag 223k is maintained as it is. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off, the state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is maintained, so that the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are displayed. It can be indicated by the gaming state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are obtained from the reserved second area of the look-ahead information storage area 223a, and in the process of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k are obtained. Is compared with In this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution match, so that the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined by the main control. In device 110 they match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and the game state at the time of the end of the jackpot, that is, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the normal jackpot is set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Is set. Specifically, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set to off. As a result, the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the second jackpot lottery.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and in the process of S4008, the obtained prediction precondition and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are obtained. Is compared with However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the effect state gaming state flag 223k, and the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result is out of order. It is unclear whether the predicted result matches the actual jackpot lottery result in main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4013, in which the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is indicated by a minus sign. Then, the continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. More specifically, the status value of the reserved third area is changed to “−2”, and the status value of the reserved fourth area is changed to “−12”. Is changed to a status indicating that

  Here, the continuous notice execution status, which is a positive number, among the consecutive notice execution statuses stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, is stored in the reserved first area and the reserved second area. There are two. Therefore, in the process of S4103, the process branches to S4103: Yes, and the minus notice is also given to the continuous notice execution status stored in the first reserved area and the second reserved area.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-2), the status values of the first to third areas are changed to "-2", and the status values of the fourth area are changed to "-12". Thus, the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the variable effect is all changed to the status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been cancelled. Then, the present continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D ends.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D is completed, that is, after the currently-determined large-variable jackpot is completed, the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 60) is executed up to the first to fourth times. Every time the stop type of the variable effect is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−2” or “−12”, so the process branches to S3706: No, and is instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110. The performed stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, in each of the first to fourth variable effects, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed. That is, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed is two or less, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the continuous announcement effect is set. Is performed a small number of times, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term feeling of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  The above is the description of the second embodiment. As described above, in the second embodiment, as an example in which the predicted result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled in the audio lamp control device 113, in the process regarding the continuous announcement effect, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is appropriately handled, The example of executing the continuous announcement effect has been described.

  That is, according to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A to D (see FIGS. 61, 63, 65, and 66), in the processing of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state By comparing the gaming state indicated by the flag 223j, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery are obtained. , Can be compared in main controller 110.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Become. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110. The results of the lottery were treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223j are stored in the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is stored. It can always be determined whether or not 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unclear whether to perform the determination.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same. And the predicted result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, the game state is used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery. The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot random determination. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current lottery result match in the main control device 110. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment also uses the jackpot lottery. You cannot trust the prediction result of the lottery and will refrain from using that prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information differs from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the current jackpot lottery are displayed. Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot in the processing of S3804, the prediction result In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of order in the processing of S3804. For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A processing, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed. The status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the effect, but was canceled. As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped. That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation change executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in the dark cloud, and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  On the other hand, in such a case, in the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing B, C, and D, not only the continuous announcement execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also all the reserved areas. The continuous notice execution status is also changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. As a result, the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and every time the stop type is set for the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the continuous announcement effect can be stopped in each of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is to be executed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after this time is unknown, a continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud, and a problem that a continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), in the processing of S4008, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are determined. By comparing the gaming state with the indicated gaming state, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries are controlled by the main control. The device 110 can compare for a match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the main controller 110 performs the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery result until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading is performed. When the game state of the game 10 changes, it becomes unknown which game state the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery results of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. It should be noted that the lottery results for the next and subsequent jackpots are also unknown.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are different in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the lottery of the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries Since there is a possibility that the result is different from the result, the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats not only the current time but also the predicted result of the next big hit lottery as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotteries are controlled by the main control. In the present embodiment, the determination can be made even when it is unknown whether or not they match in the device 110.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable. As described above, even if the prediction result which the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine treats as being unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present pachinko machine 10 may be able to treat it as reliable, the present embodiment In the mode, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect state gaming state flag 223k, the prefetch corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In this case, the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, the prediction result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th and subsequent jackpot lottery are unknown in the main control device 110. In this case, the voice lamp control device of the present embodiment is used. Even at 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th one cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the large-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability and the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability time do not become duplicate values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the jackpot random number table used in the look-ahead corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery. Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery in the i-th jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information does not match in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out of order. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery do not match or become unclear in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be able to treat the prediction result that was treated as unreliable by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment as being reputable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be more appropriately handled.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different in the processing of S4012. If not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main control device 110 of the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit, at the end of the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the type of the big hit.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery is also unknown.

  Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results become unknown, so the remaining prediction results are checked. It doesn't make sense. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C, the continuous notice execution status stored in each of the reserved areas from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the status, and the continuous announcement execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed in the variable production but was canceled.

  As a result, when the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the variable effect to be executed this time is set, the process can branch to S3706: No. The execution of the notice effect can be stopped. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous announcement effect is executed in a dark cloud and the continuous announcement effect unrelated to the actual lottery result is executed.

  According to the continuous announcement execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), when it is determined in the above-described continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is determined. Alternatively, it can be determined whether the prefetch information stored in the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) is reliable. Then, when an unreliable one of the prefetch information is found, a continuous production is performed from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prefetch information to the last fluctuation production in which the continuous announcement production was scheduled to be executed. You can cancel the notice production.

  Further, when the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is 2 or less, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times the continuous announcement effect is performed is small. Then, the continuous announcement effect itself is stopped, and the continuous announcement effect is never executed. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the continuous announcement effect lasts for a long time, so that the player can have a long-term feeling of expectation that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  It should be noted that the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims, and the "chance chance" described in the above embodiment is "indicative information" described in the claims. Corresponding to The “high-probability state or high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “an example of a plurality of lottery conditions” described in the claims. The probability state or the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 "corresponds to" an example of a plurality of lottery conditions "described in the claims. Further, the “bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “judgment result information” described in the claims, and the “prefetch command” described in the embodiment. The bit value indicating the prediction precondition included in the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the “judgment information” described in the claims, and is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit included in the fanfare command described in the embodiment. The "bit value indicating the game state" corresponds to "condition information" described in the claims.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eyes” at the end of the variable effect is a continuous announcement effect, but during the variable effect, a different image is displayed or a different sound is displayed. The effect of emitting a sound may be used as a continuous announcement effect. According to this configuration, the stop type of each variable effect for executing the continuous announcement effect does not need to be changed to the “chance eye”, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is. it can. In addition, since the continuous announcement effect can also be performed in the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is executed, the number of times of the continuous announcement effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for giving the player a sense of expectation that the game state will be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, when performing a continuous announcement effect over a plurality of variable effects, the effect contents may be changed for each variable effect, or the effect contents may be changed only for a part of the variable effects. In addition, if the prediction result that triggered the continuous announcement production is a jackpot and the prediction result is reliable, the continuous announcement indicating the jackpot determination with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability). You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Further, the continuous announcement effect may be performed during the fluctuation effect, or may be performed during the fluctuation effect and at the end of the fluctuation effect, respectively. When the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, and D may be executed when the variable effect is started, as in the present embodiment.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61), in the processing of S3803, a game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and a game state indicated by the game state flag 223j are different. If (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the predicted result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. The prediction result may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S3805 without performing the process in S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B, C, and D (see FIGS. 63, 65, and 67), in the processing of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state flag 223j are set. If the indicated gaming state indicates a different gaming state (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. : In the case of No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may proceed to S3901 without performing the process of S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C (see FIGS. 61, 63, and 656), the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, This is executed when the variable effect is started in the three symbol display device 81. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed at the end of the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. , B and C may be executed at any time. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67) described above, in the processing of S4009, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are determined. If the state indicates a gaming state different from the state (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot. : In the case of No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the process may shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), among the repetition processing of S4007 to S4015, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a large jackpot due to the processing of S4010. Although it is confirmed that there is a jackpot lottery prediction result in the reserved i-th area, if the jackpot lottery prediction result is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is regarded as unreliable and the processing may be repeatedly interrupted there. good.

  In addition, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C (see FIG. 65) is executed when the variable effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, but instead of when the variable effect is started, a big hit is performed. It may be configured to be executed during execution. By configuring so as to be executed during the big hit, the number of times of execution of the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C can be suppressed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D (see FIG. 67), if the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is two or less, the continuous notice effect itself is stopped, but the number is not limited to two. May be set arbitrarily.

  Also, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, and D (see FIGS. 61, 63, 65, and 67), if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, the prediction result corresponding to the unreliable prediction result is handled. Is changed to a status indicating that the continuous announcement effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, the continuous announcement effect will be executed in the variable effect not only for the unreliable prediction result but also for the continuous announcement execution status corresponding to the reliable estimation result. However, the status may be changed to a status indicating that the cancellation has been made.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D (see FIG. 67) is executed when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination processing (see FIG. 59) that a continuous notice effect is to be executed. The apparatus 81 may be configured to be executed when a variable effect is started. Further, it may be executed any time during the period from the start of the variable effect to immediately before the end of the variable effect. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may be performed during a big hit. By configuring so as to be executed during the big hit, the number of times of the continuous announcement execution status confirmation processing D can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, when it is determined in the above-described continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a is determined. ), The continuous announcement execution status of each holding area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored is changed to the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 12,” indicating that the continuous announcement production is once executed in the variable production. 13 ". Then, after that, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, D is to execute the continuous notice effect in the variable effect based on the continuous notice execution status of each holding area storing the unreliable prediction result. However, the status has been changed to "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that the operation has been stopped. On the other hand, in the above-described continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 59), among the respective reserved areas in which the predicted results of the jackpot lottery are stored, only the reserved areas in which the reliable predicted results are stored are changed. May be configured to set a status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" indicating that a continuous announcement effect is to be executed.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment, a game state flag 223j configured similarly to the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is provided. As described above, in the main control device 110, when the gaming state flag 203a is off and the prefetching of the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is referred to. Read ahead. On the other hand, if the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read by referring to the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Then, when the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, immediately, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a pre-read command. Therefore, when the pre-read command is received in the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are used by referring to the state of the game state flag 223j configured similarly to the game state flag 203a. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not pre-reading has been performed in main controller 110, and it is possible to determine a precondition for prediction. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the prefetch information storage area 223a, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is included therein. You do not need to include it. As described above, in the main control device 110, when the pre-reading of the jackpot lottery is performed during the jackpot, based on the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d indicating the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the low-probability jackpot. It is determined whether to refer to the random number table 202a1 or the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Then, the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with a post-big hit game state flag 223c configured similarly to the post-big hit game state flag 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, when the pre-reading command is received during the jackpot, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the state of the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c configured in the same manner as the post-jackpot gaming state flag 203d to determine which of the following. Using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, it is possible to determine whether the main controller 110 has performed prefetching during a jackpot. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is included in the notification. You don't have to. That is, with such a configuration, the conventional main control device 110 can be used as it is. Therefore, the development cost of the gaming machine and the burden on the designer can be reduced.

  In the variation process (see FIG. 21) of the above embodiment, the start of the big hit is set in the process of S314, and the big hit flag 203e is subsequently turned on in the process of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, S901: Yes (see FIG. 27). Branch. Therefore, in the big hit control process, when branching to S901: Yes, the big hit flag 203e may be set to ON. In other words, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON before the start of the jackpot, any process may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the state of the post-big hit gaming state flag 203d (S410 and S411 in FIG. 22) is set in the change start process (see FIG. 22). In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) described later, the process of S902 is executed, and is referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, the timing may be set at any timing before the processing of S902 is performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the big hit prize flag 203g is provided. However, when the main control device 110 executes each process in the single task system, the big hit prize flag 203g may not be provided. When the big hit prize flag 203g is not provided, the big hit prize flag 203e is referred to instead of the big hit prize flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data obtained with the start winning is obtained with the big win.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning game state flag is provided, but when the main control device 110 executes each process in a single task system, the winning game state flag may not be provided. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the game state flag at the time of winning. As described above, the prize-winning game state flag is a flag indicating the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the start winning prize. When a ball starts to win in the first ball opening 64, each of the counters C1 to C1 is started at the timing of winning. The values of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are obtained. Then, the gaming state flag 203a obtained here is set as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start prize is a high probability state, and if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko machine at the time of the start prize is provided. This indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in the low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetch processing. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the gaming state 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described starting winning processing (see FIG. 20), so that the load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the game state at the time of prize winning storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, for a player who wins during a big hit, the game state at the end of the big hit is pre-read as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is improved. Have improved. As described above, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, so that after the determination, the game state at the end of the jackpot can be prefetched as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning prize during the jackpot, in addition to the winning prize from the determination of the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery to the start of the jackpot, the game state at the end of the jackpot is to be read as a precondition for prediction. It may be performed. Thereby, the chance that the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result coincide with each other in the main control device 110 can be increased. Therefore, the number of prediction results treated as reliable in the sound lamp control device 113 can be further increased, so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In addition, in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above-described embodiment, the jackpot winning prize flag 203g is provided. Need not be provided. When the big hit prize flag 203g is not provided, the big hit prize flag 203e is referred to instead of the big hit prize flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data obtained with the start winning is obtained with the big win.

  In the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above-described embodiment, a prize-winning game state flag is provided. However, when each process is executed by the main controller 110 in a single task system, a prize-winning game state flag is set. Need not be provided. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the game state flag at the time of winning. As described above, the prize-winning game state flag is a flag indicating the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the start winning prize. When a ball starts to win in the first ball opening 64, each of the counters C1 to C1 is started at the timing of winning. The values of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are obtained. The gaming state flag 203a obtained here is used as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start prize is a high probability state, and if the prize-winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko machine at the time of the start prize is provided. This indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in the low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started to be executed in the single task system, another process (a main process, another interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process ends. Since there is no game, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) to the end of the prefetch processing. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the gaming state 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined. When the game state flag at the time of winning is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described starting winning processing (see FIG. 20), so that the load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the game state at the time of prize winning storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command. In this case, the main control unit 110 notifies the audio ramp control unit 113 whether the current jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command. The main controller 110 notifies the audio ramp controller 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, and an ending command. You may. That is, the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and further determines the type of the jackpot, and then determines whether the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by audio lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided. The game state may be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command need not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, in the case of receiving the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment extracts the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command. Then, the post-big hit gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the main controller 110 determines whether the current jackpot is a variable jackpot or a regular jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, if the stop type command indicates the big hit type, the post-big hit game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. May be. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is not always necessary to include information indicating a game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command.

  The ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) of the above embodiment is configured to be executed when an ending command transmitted from main controller 110 is received. Is a process for determining the display mode, so that it is sufficient that the process is executed and ended before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed at any time as long as the process ends after the fanfare command transmitted from main controller 110 is received and before the ending effect is started.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the information indicating the prediction precondition is further included in the prefetch command. However, the information included in the pre-read command is not limited to the information indicating the prediction precondition, and the audio lamp control device 113 can determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 has used the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Any information may be used as long as it is information. For example, information indicating which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is obtained may be included in the prefetch command.

  In the above-described embodiment, the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect has been described as an example in which the voice lamp control device 113 can appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. If it is a process to be used, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled, similarly to the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect. For example, even when the display mode of the continuous announcement effect is set, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be appropriately handled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the fanfare command includes information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, other commands may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, including information indicating the skill state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. For example, the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the round number command or the ending command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the ending effect determination processing is executed in the sound ramp control device 113. The ending effect determination process may be executed at any time as long as it is in the middle and before the ending effect is performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits the fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113 in the fanfare command, including information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state at the end of the big hit from the received fanfare command. On the other hand, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of the big hit) extracted from the stop type command. You may. That is, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a probable jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is determined to be a high probability state, and the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is determined. Is a normal jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a low probability state. In this case, the main control device 110 does not need to include, in the fanfare command, information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, so that the main control device 110 is not required. It is possible to reduce the control burden of the 110.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits the prefetch command to the sound ramp control device 113 including the prefetch prediction precondition in the prefetch command. It may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by being included in the hold number command. In this case, after the pre-reading is completed, a configuration is made such that the hold number command is generated.

  In the ending effect determination process of the above-described embodiment, the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of the stored order, and the prerequisite precondition for the prefetch information is obtained. Is compared with the game state indicated by the post-big hit game state flag 223c, and when the same game state is indicated, it is checked whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is a big hit, First, it is checked whether there is any pre-reading information stored in the reserved area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. When there is, the prediction precondition of the pre-reading information may be compared with the game state indicated by the post-big-hit game state flag 223c. .

  In the ending effect determination process of the above-described embodiment, while prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of storage order, the preconditions for predicting the prefetch information and , Comparing the gaming state indicated by the gaming state after the jackpot with the gaming state indicated by the flag 223c, and displaying the ending effect if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the look-ahead information indicates the jackpot if the same gaming state is indicated. It is configured to determine whether to set “determined effect display” as an aspect. On the other hand, while acquiring the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a one by one irrespective of the order in which the prefetch information is stored, the prediction precondition of the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223c after the jackpot. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the look-ahead information indicates a jackpot when the same gaming state is indicated, "determined effect display" is displayed as the display mode of the ending effect. May be determined. As described above, when the prediction precondition of the look-ahead information matches the gaming state indicated by the post-jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the prediction result corresponding to the prediction precondition is the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Likely to match. Therefore, even though the "determination effect display" was performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) was thereafter terminated, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect were performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress disappointment of the player by giving the player a useless expectation, and it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the main control device 110 of the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading for the starting winning is performed, the information indicating the precondition for the pre-reading, the information indicating the predicted result of the jackpot lottery, and the predicted result of the variation pattern type Is included in the pre-read command, and the pre-read command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the pre-read command is not transmitted, and the information indicating the precondition of the pre-read prediction and the jackpot lottery The information indicating the prediction result and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type may be included in the pending ball count command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the reserved ball count command includes both the reserved ball count and the prediction result of pre-reading (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern type). Therefore, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, the correspondence between the reserved ball count and the prediction result of the prefetching becomes clear. That is, the correspondence between the number of reserved balls and the prediction result of the pre-reading is always accurate without paying attention to the timing of receiving the command and the timing of obtaining the number of reserved balls and the predicted result of the pre-reading from the RAM. And the like can be executed accurately. In addition, when the prefetching for the start winning is performed, a part of the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is partially replaced. It may be included in the pre-read command and the remainder may be included in the reserved ball count command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information indicates the jackpot. In this case, it is configured such that “determined effect display” is set as the display mode of the ending effect with a probability of 1/3, but the probability of setting the determined effect display may be determined as appropriate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation symbol command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. , A fluctuation effect according to the fluctuation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when the execution time of the fluctuation effect comes to an end, the stop symbol of the stop type corresponding to the stop type command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing the stop display of the stop symbol is newly provided. It may be configured so that the fluctuation effect is continued even after the end.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the prefetching for the start winning is performed in the main control device 110, but the prefetching for the starting winning may be performed in the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, when the main control device 110 detects a winning start, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 and the pachinko machine at the time of winning are determined. The gaming state of the machine 10 (if a jackpot is in progress, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot) is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the sound ramp control device 113, the large-hit-value jackpot random number table 202a2, the low-probability-hit jackpot random number table 202a1 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in advance. Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the sound lamp control device ROM 222. The prefetching process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main controller 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that the audio lamp controller 113 can execute it. With this configuration, when a pre-read command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts various counter values from the pre-read command and performs a jackpot lottery. You can look ahead the results. As a result, the main control device 110 does not need to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, so that the control load on the main control device 110 can be further reduced, and the transition should be made based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. It is possible to concentrate on a lottery process for selecting a gaming state. However, since there is a possibility that an important random number value such as a jackpot random value may be found illegally, it is necessary to include the lottery result (whether or not), the stop type, and the variation pattern in the pre-read command and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the result. Is preferred. For example, it is possible to prevent a signal output from the main control device 110 from being illegally stolen and analyzing each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Further, it is possible to prevent an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is to be analyzed from a signal output from the main control device 110 from being analyzed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect (the continuous announcement determination process in FIG. 32), and determines the display mode of the ending effect (FIG. 33). Ending setting process), the display control device 114 may execute these processes. In this case, a program for executing each process so that the continuous announcement determination process shown in FIG. 32 and the ending setting process shown in FIG. 33 can be executed by the display control device 114, and the continuous announcement determination table 222a It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). Also, in the work RAM 233, the above-mentioned pre-reading information storage area 223a, the number of retained balls counter 223b, the after-big hit gaming state flag 223c, the ending mode counter 223f, the continuous announcement lottery counter 223g, the continuous announcement number counter 223h, the after-announcement big hit flag 223i, and the like. Are provided in advance. Then, when receiving the prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the prefetch command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect (the continuous announcement determination process of FIG. 32). Further, when receiving the ending command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114 as it is. Upon receiving the ending command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining the display mode of the ending effect (the ending setting process of FIG. 33).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above-described embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Accordingly, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, a process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  The process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Also, since the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify the address set in the common address system. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is by the NAND flash memory 234a. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage unit such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but by using the configuration described in the above embodiment of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored as part of the boot program to be executed. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory constituted by a nonvolatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a may be stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", it reads out the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address from the buffer RAM 234c, and reads the data from the buffer RAM 234c. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the setting is in progress, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects the address. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The area may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored at least for the resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 may be used. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer data). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, the image data can be prevented from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 needlessly, and the time required to recover from the power failure can be reduced. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. Note that the RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned, the buffer is scanned. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a are stored in the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. A case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Also, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super-reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 47). The warning image setting process (refer to FIG. 48) may be executed when it is determined that the warning symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display control device 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Thereby, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image of the frame is displayed is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information specified by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, the various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed and drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing an image in accordance with the drawing content defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing data corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player is defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. In addition, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be specified. In comparison with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “variation start-up”, “high-speed fluctuation”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display contents and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f in the display data table and the transfer data table. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the drawing process is completed (every 20 ms in the above embodiment). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed such that the image of one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image of one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is expanded May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 sends the finalized display effect through the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d. Further, in this case, until one of the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first stores the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. Transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the display contents are defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233j. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in a part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the sprite type required in the table, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a rear image. It may move or change.

  In the embodiment described above, the case where the continuous announcement effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, even if the continuous announcement effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory in the pachinko machine 10 that operates according to various effects, and operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. In addition, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  Thus, each time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode. By playing the sound, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illuminations 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player usually continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, but the display of symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since the continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, an unusual effect is performed on the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if a continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 performs the lottery process at the time of the start / stop judgment and the variation start, the continuous announcement effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation control is performed by the display control device 114. When performing a notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33) , Or a combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous announcement production modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous announcement production (15R probable big hit, 2R probable big hit, time saving big hit, departure) are prepared. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, an image for a continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the continuous announcement effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and the other stop symbol determination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination processing, the continuous notice command processing is executed after the stop identification command processing. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, the chance is set as the stop symbol, so the fluctuation stop. Occasionally, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eyes. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays a chance symbol as a stop symbol for each variable effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to finally obtain a big hit.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the continuous announcement determination process (S1211) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous announcement effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the continuous announcement effect execution decision and the continuous announcement effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. Is also good. Thus, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started before the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type is used in the continuous preview effect, the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub-area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data used in the continuous preview effect can be prevented from being overwritten by other image data, and the image data corresponding to the desired continuous preview image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous announcement effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  In addition, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous announcement effect. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous preview effect is the last display. Therefore, while the continuous preview effect is being performed, the display control device 114 is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous preview effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the information on the execution of the continuous preview effect and the continuous preview image type is included in the display variation pattern command, a display data table that does not correspond to the continuous preview image for each variation pattern, A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 stores the corresponding display data table in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type in the display data table buffer. 233d. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous preview effect corresponding to the continuous preview image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. Thus, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, so that an increase in the number of data tables can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out completely) determined by the main control device 110. Although the case of setting by 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuating effect that has been held is not changed. If it is not a jackpot, the stop symbol of the last variable effect may be replaced with the stop symbol in the front-rear reach mode instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 and set. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is not a stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 but always reaches the front and rear, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, when performing a continuous announcement effect together with all of the suspended variable effects, each variable effect is performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each change. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the variable effect other than the last variable effect that has been suspended is changed to the variable effect. Then, the process of generating a display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1504 in FIG. 38) allows the variation pattern to be changed according to the setting state of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect. You may. When the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is displayed as it is based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control device 110. You may. Here, even if the continuous announcement effect is performed continuously, if a situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result despite the corresponding variable effect mode being, for example, a super-reach variable effect, the player's expectation May be retreated, but the continuous notice effect is performed continuously, and the variable effects other than the last performed variable effect are continuously performed in the variable effect, so that the final effect is performed last. It is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation for the variable performance.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where the continuous announcement effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the player has pressed the frame button 22 in a situation where the execution of the effect has been determined, a continuous announcement effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the pattern is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entry port 64 for starting a jackpot lottery when a ball is entered is provided in the game board 13; however, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrance ports from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, the reserved ball number command transmitted from main control device 110 to voice lamp control device 113 when a reservation is made at each first entrance indicates which one of the first entrances is being retained. Information may be included. Also, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when starting the fluctuation may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the fluctuation effect held by the first entrance. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each of the first entrance ports, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the number of retained balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by one, and the first entrance is obtained. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous announcement effect when receiving the reserved number-of-balls command. A continuous announcement effect may be executed over a variable effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. In addition, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and in a pachinko machine that preferentially executes a variable effect held at one first entrance, the variable effect is preferentially executed. Only when the ball is entered in the first entrance, the start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined. As a result, the continuous announcement effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, so the continuous announcement effect is provided for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority. Is started, and when the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the continuous announcement effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is sent to the main controller 110. Has been described above, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the number-of-retained-balls counter 203c in the main control device 110 increases, the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-remaining-balls command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp controller 113 receives the number-of-remaining-ball command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden on the 110 and the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the sound lamp control device 113 when the pre-read command is received, the continuous announcement effect is executed for all the variable effects suspended at that time. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each individual variable effect. As a result, a continuous announcement effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous announcement effect, and perform an effect that does not tire the player. Can be. In this case, the counter is updated each time the continuous announcement determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each of the variable effects is set. It may be provided. Then, in the continuous announcement determination process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S1316: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect in each of the variable effects is limited to a predetermined value. Alternatively, a continuous announcement effect may be started. Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous announcement effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223b at the time of determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous announcement effect, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be determined, , The game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (15 probable jackpot, 2R probable jackpot, 15 regular jackpot, missed), or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, the probability that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance effect in each variable effect. .

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to perform display. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the audio lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence command is generated instead of a command generated by the audio lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 such as an error occurrence command. Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning images are generated. Alternatively, a necessary image data transfer instruction may be set.

  In the above embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is equal to the number of the reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as a variety of gaming machines such as a game machine such as an arepachi, a sparrow ball, and a so-called pachinko machine combined with a slot machine.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols is provided, and is not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described. When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A game machine A1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means so as to notify one of the solicitation information.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine A1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are set based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In the gaming machine A1, the notification control means may determine a result of the comparison by the comparison means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and a condition information received by the condition information receiving means. The gaming machine A2, wherein the notifying unit is controlled so that the second suggestion information is notified when the lottery conditions do not match.

  According to the gaming machine A2, as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In such a case, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine A2, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, the second suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification unit regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Therefore, since the use of the unreliable lottery result can be suppressed, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notification control means includes a result of the comparison by the comparison means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means. When the lottery condition indicated by (1) matches, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result shifting to the special game state, the first suggestion information is notified. A game machine A3 for controlling the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In this case, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to a special game state, the notification unit is controlled by the notification control unit so that the first suggestion information is notified. You. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine A3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. In this case, if the credible lottery result indicates the lottery result that shifts to the special game state, the first suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, the notification by the notification means can be performed by using the reliable lottery results among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means. In other words, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those which can be trusted can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, from among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, a determination that the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. A determination result information acquisition unit that performs a comparison between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. A comparison stopping means, wherein the judgment condition information acquired by the judgment result information acquiring means is displayed in ascending order of the reception order. And drawing conditions, the gaming machine is characterized in that to compare the drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and stores the information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, for the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of reception order, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped by the first comparison stop means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match during the comparison, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In the subsequent comparison, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine A4, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison by the comparison unit can be continued. If the results are consistent or unknown, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, from among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, a determination that the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. In the comparison by the judgment result information acquiring means and the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information is associated with the judgment condition information that matches the lottery condition. A second comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means when the determined result information indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special game state; Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order of the reception order, and a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception unit. Gaming machine A5, characterized by comparing

  According to the gaming machine A5, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result information acquisition means obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. Then, with respect to the obtained determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of the reception order, and In the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is changed to the special game state. When the result indicates the lottery result to be shifted, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. According to the gaming machine A5, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit match, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is In the case of indicating the result of the lottery transition to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped even if the determination condition information for comparing the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, the number of comparisons by the comparing means can be suppressed, so that the control load can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the comparing means stores the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means. A gaming machine A6 for comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the determined condition information.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparing means can be increased, so that the opportunity to execute the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be increased.

  When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the solicitation information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are determined based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine B1 and the gaming machines A1 to A6, the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special game state, and performs the lottery determination. The means is configured to suspend the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end, and the main control means, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, A game state determining means for determining whether or not the game is in the special game state, and, if the game state is determined by the game state determining means, to be set by the lottery condition setting means after the special game state is over. And a third lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition to be performed, wherein the lottery result determining means determines that the special game state is established by the gaming state determining means. (3) The lottery condition obtained by the lottery condition obtaining means is used to determine a lottery result when the random number information obtained along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when shifting to the special game state, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition by the lottery condition setting means, and the time from the transition to the special game state to the end is determined. , The determination of the random number information by the lottery determination means is suspended. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special game state is determined by the game state determination means, and when the special game state is determined, the lottery is performed after the special game state ends. The lottery condition set by the condition setting means is obtained by the third lottery condition obtaining means. In addition, if the game state determination means determines that the game state is the special game state, the random number information acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. Is determined by lottery result determination means. During the special game state, the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended, so if the predetermined start condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special game state to the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is determined. This is performed after the end of the special game state. According to the gaming machine B2, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special gaming state to the end, the special gaming condition is not set in the special gaming state but the special lottery condition set in the special gaming state. The lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the end of the state makes it possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined starting condition. Therefore, even if the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special game state to the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means in accordance with the establishment can be accurately determined. The possibility that the result can be determined can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A game machine C1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the solicitation information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine C1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are set based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the lottery determination unit in accordance with random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. The random number information indicating the lottery result to be determined, and the random number information for determining the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is configured to be different for each lottery condition, and the comparing means is configured to determine the determination condition information Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes inconsistent, for each judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information, Comparing the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information; If the lottery condition indicated by the information does not match, it is determined whether the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information that does not match the lottery condition indicates the lottery result that shifts to the special game state. Determination result information determining means to perform the comparison control when the determination result information determining means determines that the result indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, so that the comparing means continues the comparison. Means, and the notification control means, the result of the comparison by the comparing means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the condition information received by the condition information receiving means If the lottery conditions shown match, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the second Gaming machine C2, which suggests information is characterized in that for controlling the informing means so as to broadcast.

  According to the gaming machine C2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination unit in accordance with the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, and shifts to a special gaming state. The random number information for determining the lottery result is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes inconsistent, the judgment condition information is stored for each judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that the lottery condition does not match is used. It is determined by the determination result information determining means whether the result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Here, when it is determined that the result indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the comparison control unit controls the comparison unit to continue the comparison. As a result of the comparison by the comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the judgment is made. If the determination result information associated with the condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so as to notify the first suggestion information. Since the random number information for determining the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is changed to the lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Then, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result does not become a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit shifts to the special game state. If the lottery result is a lottery result, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state. According to the gaming machine C2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is different from the lottery determination means. If the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by The comparison can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, simply by the comparison unit. Compared to the case where the comparison is terminated, the opportunity for performing the comparison by the comparing means can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C2, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means includes: determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means; And the information is stored in association with the order in which the determination information is received, and the comparison unit is configured to store, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information. In the comparison by the determination result information obtaining means and the comparing means, wherein the determination result information is obtained by the lottery determination means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is not matched with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. A first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means, wherein the determination condition information obtained by the determination result information obtaining means is Gaming machine C3 which characterized in that a comparison between sequentially drawing condition indicated by the determination condition information to old signal sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, for the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of reception order, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped by the first comparison stop means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match during the comparison, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In the subsequent comparison, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine C3, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison by the comparison unit can be continued. If the results are consistent or unknown, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means includes: determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means; And the information is stored in association with the order in which the determination information is received, and the comparison unit is configured to store, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information. In the comparison by the determination result information obtaining means for obtaining an undetermined one by the lottery determination means and the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. When the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state, the comparison is performed. A second comparison canceling means for canceling the comparison by the step, and among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in an order from the oldest reception order; A gaming machine C4 for comparing with a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result information acquisition means obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. Then, with respect to the obtained determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of the reception order, and In the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is changed to the special game state. When the result indicates the lottery result to be shifted, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. According to the gaming machine C4, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is In the case of indicating the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped even if the determination condition information for comparing the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, the number of comparisons by the comparing means can be suppressed, so that the control load can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the comparing unit receives the condition received by the condition information receiving unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine C5 characterized by comparing a lottery condition indicated by information with a lottery condition indicated by judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparing means can be increased, so that the opportunity to execute the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be increased.

  When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is high, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery condition set by the above, and the random number information acquired by the acquisition of the lottery condition by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means is the lottery determination means A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result in the case of determination, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination information storage means for storing determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information in association with each other; condition information of the main control means; Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means A comparison unit that compares a condition with the first suggestion information and the second indication information based on a comparison result by the comparison unit when the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the solicitation information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when predetermined starting conditions are satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by. Then, when the notification is performed by the notification unit, the notification control unit controls so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported by the notification unit based on the comparison result of the comparison unit. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine D1, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are determined based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state ends. One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit. And the determination condition information are stored in association with the order in which the determination information is received, and the comparing means corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. Determination result information obtaining means for obtaining an undetermined lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means, and a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information; And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state. And a second comparison canceling means for canceling the comparison by the comparing means, wherein the lottery indicated by the judging condition information in order of the reception order from the oldest reception order among the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. And comparing the condition with a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. The notification control means determines a determination result stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information shifts to the special game state. A gaming machine D2 characterized by controlling the notifying means so as to notify the first suggestion information as long as the result indicates a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result information acquisition means obtains information for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means. Then, with respect to the obtained determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are compared by the comparing unit in ascending order of the reception order, and In the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is changed to the special game state. When the result indicates the lottery result to be shifted, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. It is likely that they match. According to the gaming machine D2, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit match, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is In the case of indicating the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped even if the determination condition information for comparing the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, the number of comparisons by the comparing means can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D2, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparing unit receives the condition information immediately before the informing by the informing unit. A gaming machine D3 for comparing a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the means with a lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparing means can be increased, so that the opportunity to execute the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be increased.

  Random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment when a predetermined starting condition is established; random number information storing means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means; A storage information acquisition unit for acquiring one random number information stored in the unit, and a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions based on the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. Lottery determination means for determining the lottery condition, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and the lottery determination means after the end of the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means And lottery control means for controlling the determination according to the predetermined lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means. Main control means for controlling, and sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, including notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state. In the gaming machine, the main control means includes: first lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; and a first lottery condition. In the lottery condition acquired by the acquisition means, random number information acquired along with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means, a lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result, the lottery result determination means A determination information transmitting device that transmits determination information including determination result information indicating a determined lottery result and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control unit. A second lottery condition acquiring unit for acquiring a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit; and a condition for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit to the sub control unit. Information transmitting means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means, and by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information in association with each other, and storing in the determination information storage means Comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the judged condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means; Notification setting means for setting the notification information to be notified by the notification means based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the reception means; and the notification information by the notification means in accordance with the setting by the notification setting means. A game machine E1 comprising: notification control means for controlling whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means based on a comparison result by the comparison means when is notified.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when predetermined starting conditions are satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquiring means based on the establishment, and is stored in the random number information storage means. When one of the random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, the lottery in one preset lottery condition among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and the state shifts to the special game state according to the result of the lottery. In addition, the suggestion information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high is notified by the notification means, and when the special game state ends, the determination by the subsequent lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under predetermined conditions. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the information is obtained by the lottery result determination means. The lottery result is determined in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. When the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information is stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the judgment condition information. Is done. Further, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is determined by the notification determination means. The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means are compared by the comparing means. Then, based on the comparison result, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is controlled by the notification control means.

  When the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may change there. If the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit before the change of the lottery condition and the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit after the change of the lottery condition do not match. And the lottery results may not match. Therefore, when the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit up to that time may not be trusted and may not be used. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means. Can be done. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, it is possible to notify the suggestion information to the notification unit using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit from being wasted, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control unit may perform the determination as a result of the comparison by the comparing unit. The gaming machine E2, characterized in that when the lottery condition indicated by the condition information coincides with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, control is performed so that the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match as a result of the comparison by the comparing unit, the notification control unit is configured to notify the suggestion information by the notifying unit. Is controlled by If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine E2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. In this case, the suggestion information can be notified to the notification means by using the reliable lottery result. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, reliable ones can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E2, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means sets a result of the comparison by the comparing means The gaming machine E3, wherein when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, control is performed so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notifying unit.

  According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparing unit, the notification control unit is configured to prevent the notification unit from notifying the suggestion information. Is controlled by If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. In this case, the unreliable lottery result is used so that the suggestion information is not reported by the reporting means. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, the use of unreliable ones can be suppressed, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  Any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5 is identified based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means. A display unit for performing a variable effect including dynamic display of information, wherein the notification setting unit, when receiving the determination information by the determination information receiving unit, based on the determination result information of the determination information, a plurality of In the fluctuating effect, a notification judging means for judging whether or not to inform the suggestion information by the notifying means is provided. In each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the notification is performed. The suggestion information is set to be notified by a step, and the notification control means determines that the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparing means. A gaming machine E4, wherein the suggestion information is controlled so as not to be notified by the notification means in each of the fluctuation effects performed by the display means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the judgment information is received by the judgment information receiving means, based on the judgment result information of the judgment information, it is determined by the notification judging means whether to inform the suggestion information by the notifying means in a plurality of fluctuation effects. Is determined. Here, when it is determined that the suggestion information is to be notified, among the determinations performed by the lottery determination unit, based on the lottery result of the determination accompanying the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit. The setting is performed by the notification setting unit so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit in each of the fluctuation effects to be performed. When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the suggestion information is not reported by the reporting means in each of the variable effects performed by the display means. Then, control is performed by the notification control means. In the comparison by the comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determiner. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, there is a transition to a special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, and the lottery condition is set. There is a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unknown whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are also unclear. If the lottery result determined by the result determination means cannot be trusted, then the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E4, in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and thereafter, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being notified by the notification means in each variation effect. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, the use of unreliable ones can be further suppressed, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5 is identified based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means. Display means for performing a variable effect including dynamic display of information, wherein the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information as the determination information The notification setting means, when the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, based on the determination result information of the determination information, the notification setting means, Means for judging whether or not to inform the suggestion information by means, and when it is judged by the information judgment means to inform the suggestion information, the lottery determination The suggestion information is notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means among the determinations made by the means. The comparison means, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, the condition The notification control means compares the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. Is not the same as the notification in each of the subsequent variable effects including the variable effect performed in response to the mismatched determination result information. Gaming machine E5, wherein the suggesting information is used to control so as not to be notified by.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the judgment result information of the judgment information received by the judgment information receiving means and the judgment condition information are stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the order of receiving the judgment information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determination means determines whether or not to notify the suggestion information in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. Here, when it is determined that the suggestion information is to be notified, among the determinations performed by the lottery determination unit, based on the lottery result of the determination accompanying the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit. The setting is performed by the notification setting unit so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit in each of the fluctuation effects to be performed. The lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared in ascending order of reception order among the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the result of the comparison includes a fluctuating effect performed in response to the mismatched judgment result information. Control is performed by the notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each of the fluctuation effects thereafter. In the comparison by the comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determiner. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, there is a transition to a special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, and the lottery condition is set. There is a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unknown whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are also unclear. If the lottery result determined by the result determination means cannot be trusted, then the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E5, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparing means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means cannot be trusted, In each of the subsequent variable effects including the variable effect performed in response to the determination result information that does not match, the suggestion information can be prevented from being notified by the notification unit. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, those that can be trusted can be used, and those that cannot be trusted can be further suppressed from being used. It can be handled favorably.

  In any one of the gaming machine E5, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means may perform the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison means. A gaming machine E6 comprising: first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means when the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison unit, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the first comparison stop unit. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and thereafter, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, The comparison can be aborted. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E6, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means includes: When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state. For example, in a gaming machine E7, the suggestion information is controlled so as not to be informed by the informing means in each variable effect performed after the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match as a result of the comparison by the comparing means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information is changed to the special game. If the lottery result indicates the lottery result to be shifted to the state, control is performed by the notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each variable effect performed after the special game state. When shifting to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, after the special game state ends, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means. Therefore, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unknown whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are also unclear. If the lottery result determined by the determination means cannot be trusted, then the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparing means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information is changed to the special game state. If the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter, the suggestion information can be prevented from being notified by the notification unit in each variable effect. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, the use of unreliable ones can be suppressed, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine E7, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means may perform the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison means. And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result that shifts to the special game state. A gaming machine E8 comprising a second comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means in some cases.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in the comparison by the comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result associated with the judgment condition information that matches the lottery condition When the information indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the comparison by the comparing means is stopped by the second comparison stopping means. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information shifts to the special game state. If the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter, the comparison by the comparison unit can be stopped. Therefore, when the comparison by the comparison means does not make sense, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machine E5, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means may perform the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special game state. A transition determination unit that determines whether there is a game, and when the determination result information is determined to indicate a lottery result that transitions to the special game state, the transition determination unit determines that the special game state has ended. A lottery condition determining means for determining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means; and the condition information when the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means. Gaming machine E9, characterized in that instead of drawing conditions, the comparison means by lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means comprises a first comparator control means for controlling to continue the comparison shown.

  According to the gaming machine E9, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparing means, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition is determined. The shift determining means determines whether the result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Here, if it is determined that the result indicates the lottery result to shift to the special game state, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means after the end of the special game state is determined by the lottery condition determination means, Instead of the lottery condition indicated by the information, the first comparison control means controls the comparison means so that the comparison means continues the comparison based on the lottery condition determined by the lottery condition determination means. When shifting to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, after the special game state ends, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means. . Therefore, after the special game state ends, it is unknown whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine E9, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit after the special gaming state ends is determined by the lottery condition determining unit, and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information is replaced by the lottery condition determining unit. Control is performed such that the comparison means continues the comparison according to the lottery conditions thus set. Therefore, even after the special game state is over, it becomes clear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is determined. You can distinguish whether you can trust or not. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, reliable ones can be increased, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the storage information acquisition unit. Indicating the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means according to the random number information obtained by the random number information, the random number information for determining the lottery result to shift to the special game state is different for each lottery condition The comparison means is configured to determine the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means until the result of comparison between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match. Each time, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information that does not match the lottery condition is the special game state. The determination result information determining means for determining whether or not the result indicates the lottery result, and when the determination result information determining means determines that the result indicates the lottery result to shift to the special game state, A gaming machine E10 comprising: second comparison control means for controlling the comparison means to continue the comparison.

  According to the gaming machine E10, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination unit according to the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, and shifts to a special gaming state. The random number information for determining the lottery result is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes inconsistent, the judgment condition information is stored for each judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. Is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that the lottery condition does not match is used. It is determined by the determination result information determining means whether the result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Here, when it is determined that the result indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the second comparison control unit controls the comparison unit to continue the comparison. Since the random number information for determining the lottery result to be shifted to the special game state is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is determined to be the lottery result to be shifted to the special game state. In that case, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result does not become a lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is changed to the special game state. If the lottery result shifts to, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state. According to the gaming machine E10, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery determination Even if the lottery result determined by the means may be inconsistent with the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, if it can be regarded as a different lottery result from the lottery result shifting to the special game state, The comparison by the comparing means can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison is simply performed regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Compared to the case where the comparison by the means is terminated, the opportunity for the comparison by the comparison means can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the lottery condition setting means shifts to the special gaming state. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set to a predetermined lottery condition, and the lottery determination unit suspends the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end. And the main control means is configured to determine whether or not the game is in the special game state when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. And a third lottery condition obtaining unit that obtains a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit after the special game state ends, wherein the lottery result determination unit includes: If the special game state is determined by the game state determination means, the random number information acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. A gaming machine E11 for determining a lottery result when determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, when shifting to the special game state, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition by the lottery condition setting means, and the time from the transition to the special game state to the end is determined. , The determination of the random number information by the lottery determination means is suspended. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special game state is determined by the game state determination means, and when the special game state is determined, the lottery is performed after the special game state ends. The lottery condition set by the condition setting means is obtained by the third lottery condition obtaining means. In addition, if the game state determination means determines that the game state is the special game state, the random number information acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. Is determined by lottery result determination means. During the special game state, the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended, so if the predetermined start condition is satisfied during the transition from the transition to the special game state to the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is determined. This is done after the end of the special game state. According to the gaming machine E11, if the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special gaming state to the end, the special gaming condition is not set in the special gaming state but the special lottery condition is set. The lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the end of the state can determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined starting condition. Therefore, even if the predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the period from the transition to the special game state to the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means in accordance with the establishment can be accurately determined. The possibility that the result can be determined can be increased. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E11, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison unit is configured to execute the notification immediately before the notification unit performs the notification. Wherein the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. E12.

  According to the gaming machine E12, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. Are compared by comparing means. Therefore, when performing the comparison by the comparing unit, the comparison can be performed immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit without immediately performing the comparison, and thus the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled by the comparison means can be increased, and the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be appropriately handled can be increased.

  The gaming machine F1, wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  The gaming machine F2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine F3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a jackpot lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting opening, and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the result of the lottery on a display screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among this kind of pachinko machines, for example, when a game ball is won at the starting port, one that predicts a lottery result of a jackpot lottery accompanying the prize based on the playing state of the pachinko machine at the time of the prize. is there. In addition, as the gaming state, a low probability state in which the probability of a lottery result of a jackpot lottery associated with a prize being low is a low probability state, and a high probability state in which a probability of a large hit is higher than a low probability state is provided. Then, a lottery result of the jackpot lottery is predicted, and when the prediction result becomes a jackpot, an effect of notifying in advance that there is a high possibility of shifting to a jackpot which is a special game state advantageous to the player (notice ) To raise the expectations of the player.
In such a pachinko machine, when a game ball wins at the starting opening, the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is predicted based on the gaming state at the time of winning, but the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is the It is performed later than the prediction and based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, when a game ball wins at the starting port, a random value is acquired along with the winning, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the winning is a low probability state, a lottery table for the low probability time On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a high probability state, the lottery table for the high probability is referred. Then, the lottery result is predicted based on the referred table and the random number value acquired with the winning.
In addition, when a random value is acquired along with the winning, when a variable effect corresponding to the winning starts, a jackpot lottery based on the random value is performed. In the big hit lottery, unlike the prediction of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the lottery table is referred to based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the lottery is in the low probability state, the low probability probability lottery table is referred to, while if the gaming state at the time of the lottery is the high probability state, the high probability The time lottery table is referred to. Then, the lottery result is determined based on the referenced table and the random number value acquired with the winning. If the lottery result is a big hit, when the big hit ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set according to the big hit type.
However, even when a random value is obtained along with a prize, if a variable effect is being executed or a big hit is being performed, the random number obtained with the win is accumulated in a predetermined storage area, and the big hit lottery is performed. Execution is suspended. When a similar prize is repeatedly generated, the jackpot lottery is suspended up to a maximum of four times, for example. Then, when the variable effect or the jackpot that is being executed is completed, if the held jackpot lottery remains, one of the held jackpot lotteries is executed. Thereafter, similarly, while the jackpot lottery is being held, the held jackpot lottery is executed one by one each time the variable effect or the jackpot that is being executed ends. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-11-333089)
Therefore, when a game ball is newly won to the starting opening, if the jackpot lottery is suspended, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning is predicted, the held jackpot lottery is executed. Then, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning is performed. Therefore, the held jackpot lottery is executed, and if any of the lottery results is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that the jackpot is determined. The game state may change before and after.
If the gaming state changes here, in the changed gaming state, the actual jackpot lottery associated with the new prize is performed, so the lottery table referred to in the prediction of the jackpot lottery result of the new prize, The lottery table to be referred to in the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is changed. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result do not match, and when an effect (notification effect) is performed using the prediction result, the actual jackpot is obtained. There is a high possibility that an effect unrelated to the lottery result will be executed. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may not match, the use of the prediction result has been refrained. As a result, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery were wasted.
This technical idea is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle a jackpot lottery prediction result.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is obtained by a random number information obtaining means for obtaining, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information associated with the establishment, and the random number information obtaining means. Random number information storage means for storing random number information, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and lottery in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions Lottery determination means for determining the result from the random number information obtained by the storage information obtaining means, and setting of the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means when the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is completed. Main control means having lottery condition setting means for performing the main control relating to the game, and first suggestion information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high. And sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, and a notification means for notifying one of the second suggestion information and the second suggestion information. Means for obtaining, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means; and a lottery condition obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means. A lottery result determiner for determining a lottery result when the random number information acquired in accordance with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determiner; and a determination indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner. Determination information transmitting means for transmitting determination information including result information and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control means; and setting by the lottery condition setting means. A second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition, and condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition obtained by the second lottery condition obtaining means to the sub control means; Associating the determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information Determining information storage means for storing, condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by condition information transmitting means of the main control means, a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, A first comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means with the first comparing means; A first notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified based on a comparison result by the comparison unit.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, wherein the first notification control means determines a determination condition stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the first comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit do not match, the notifying unit is controlled so that the second suggestion information is notified. .
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, wherein the first notification control means determines a determination condition stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the first comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information shifts to the special game state. If the result is indicated, the notifying means is controlled so that the first suggestion information is notified.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the determination information storage means includes determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, And storing the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, wherein the first comparing means corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. Determination result information obtaining means for obtaining a determination that the lottery result has not been determined by the lottery determination means, and a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information, And a first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the first comparing means when the lottery condition does not match. The determination condition information obtained by the determination result information obtaining means is provided. Is intended to compare the drawing condition indicated by sequentially the determination condition information from the earliest to the received sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 stores a plurality of random number information obtaining means for obtaining random number information based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a plurality of random number information obtained by the random number information obtaining means. Random number information storage means, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and a lottery result under one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions, A lottery determination unit that determines based on the random number information obtained by the obtaining unit; a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit; and a special game state that shifts according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit. A lottery control unit that controls the subsequent determination by the lottery determination unit to be performed under predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting unit when the process is completed. And a main control unit for performing main control relating to the game, and a notifying unit for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state, and is controlled by an instruction from the main control unit. Sub-control means, wherein the main control means acquires information for judging a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. (1) Lottery condition acquisition means, and a lottery condition in which random number information acquired along with the acquisition of the information is determined by the lottery determination means in the lottery condition determined by the information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means. Lottery result determination means for determining the result, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and a determination condition indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmitting means for transmitting determination information including information to the sub-control means, a second lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, and a second lottery condition obtaining means. Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means receives the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means. Information receiving means, determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, determination condition information; And a lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means, and a lottery condition indicated by the condition information receiving means. A second comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the condition information to be indicated, and a setting so that the suggestion information is notified by the notifying means based on the judgment result information of the judgment information received by the judgment information receiving means. A notification setting unit that performs notification when the suggestion information is reported by the notification unit in accordance with the setting by the notification setting unit; and whether the notification unit reports the suggestion information based on a comparison result by the second comparison unit. And a second notification control means for controlling the operation.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, wherein the second notification control means includes a result of comparison by the second comparing means, a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information, and the condition information. When the lottery condition indicated by the above is coincident, control is performed so that the suggestion information is reported by the reporting means.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 or 6, wherein the second notification control means determines a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information based on a result of the comparison by the second comparing means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match, control is performed so that the notifying information is not notified by the notifying unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information accompanying the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining means and stored in the random number information storage means. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions is determined from the random number information. The determination is made by the determination means, and the game shifts to a special game state according to the result of the lottery. Also, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state ends. In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result is determined by the lottery result determination means. A lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information is associated with the judgment condition information. It is stored in the judgment information storage means. Further, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. Are compared by the first comparing means. Then, when the notification by the notification means is performed, the first notification control means is controlled by the first notification control means so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the comparison result of the comparison means. You. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If the notification is not performed, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification unit, so that the notification by the notification unit is not performed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first lottery condition based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special game state ends. One of the suggestion information and the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when the use of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is refrained, the notification by the notification unit can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. The result of the lottery determined by the means can be prevented from being wasted. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the technical idea 1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the result of the comparison by the first comparing means indicates that the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, The notification means is controlled by the first notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery determined by the lottery result determination unit is different. When the result cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification unit regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Therefore, since the use of the unreliable lottery result can be suppressed, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, as a result of the comparison by the first comparing means, if the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result of shifting to the special gaming state, the notification unit is controlled by the first notification control unit so that the first suggestion information is notified. . If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and the lottery result determination unit determines. When the lottery result can be trusted, if the trustworthy lottery result indicates the lottery result shifting to the special game state, the first suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, notification by the notification means can be performed by using a reliable lottery result among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means. In other words, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be used, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is obtained. That is, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and stores the determination information in the determination information storage means. Of the stored judgment result information, the judgment result information acquisition means obtains information for which the judgment of the lottery result corresponding to the judgment result information has not been judged by the lottery judgment means. Then, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared by the first comparing means in order of the acquired judgment condition information from the oldest reception order. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the first comparison unit, the comparison by the first comparison unit is stopped by the first comparison stop unit. Here, in the determination of the lottery result first performed by the lottery determination unit after the end of the special game state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information reception unit The lottery condition is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information, and while the respective lottery conditions match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determiner is determined by the lottery result determiner. Likely to match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match during the comparison, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In the subsequent comparison, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, while the likelihood of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is high, the comparison by the first comparison means is performed. Can be continued, and when it is unclear whether the respective lottery results match, the comparison can be stopped. Therefore, when the comparison by the first comparing means becomes meaningless, the comparison can be suppressed, and the control load can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquiring means based on the establishment, and stored in the random number information storing means. When one of the random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, the lottery in one preset lottery condition among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and the state shifts to the special game state according to the result of the lottery. In addition, the suggestion information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high is notified by the notification means, and when the special game state ends, the determination by the subsequent lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under predetermined conditions. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the information is obtained by the lottery result determination means. The lottery result is determined in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, the determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. When the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit, condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmission unit. In the sub-control means, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. When the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information is stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the judgment condition information. Is done. Also, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is determined by the notification determination means, where if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, the condition information receiving means, The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means are compared by the second comparing means. Then, based on the comparison result, whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means is controlled by the second notification control means.
When the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may change there. If the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit before the change of the lottery condition and the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit after the change of the lottery condition do not match. And the lottery results may not match. Therefore, when the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit up to that time may not be trusted and may not be used. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit, the suggestion information is provided by the notification unit. Can be informed. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, it is possible to notify the suggestion information to the notification unit using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit from being wasted, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, as a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information Is controlled by the second notification control means so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means when. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination unit And the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit match, and the determination is made by the lottery result determination unit. If the lottery result can be trusted, the notifying means can be notified of the suggestion information using the reliable lottery result. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit, reliable ones can be used, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 or 6, as a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery indicated by the condition information When the condition does not match, control is performed by the second notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit does not match the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result Since there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery determined by the lottery result determination unit is different. If the result cannot be trusted, the unreliable lottery result is used, so that the suggestion information can be prevented from being reported by the reporting means. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to suppress the use of unreliable ones, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more appropriately handled. .

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third symbol display equipment 110 main controller (main controller)
113 audio lamp controller (sub-control hand stage)
114 display control device ( variation display means )
203b Reserved ball storage area (random number information storage means)
223a Prefetch information storage area ( result information storage means)
223c post-big hit game state flag (lottery condition information storage means)
223j game state flag (lottery condition information storage means)
S206 random number information acquiring hand stage S401 stored information acquiring unit S402~S405 lottery determining means
S408, S413 variation type determination means S409~S411, S915, S916 drawing condition setting hand stage S501 ~ S507 lottery result estimation unit S511 ~ S513, S515 estimation information transmission unit
S902, S903 condition information transmission hand stage

Claims (7)

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying the establishment, random number information storing means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and random number information storing means A storage information acquisition unit that acquires one stored random number information, and a lottery that determines a lottery result based on one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. A main unit that has a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit ends, and that performs main control related to the game. Control means, one of first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information. In the gaming machine that includes a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control unit together with a notification means for,
The main control means includes:
A first lottery condition acquisition unit that acquires a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A lottery result determination unit that determines a lottery result when the random number information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit is determined by the lottery determination unit according to the acquisition of the lottery condition;
A determination information transmitting unit that transmits to the sub-control unit, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result;
A second lottery condition obtaining unit for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit,
Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means,
Judgment information receiving means for receiving judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means,
A determination information storage unit that stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with each other;
Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by condition information transmitting means of the main control means,
First comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means;
When the notification by the notification unit is performed, a first notification that controls the notification unit such that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is reported based on a comparison result by the first comparison unit. A gaming machine comprising: a control unit. The first notification control means includes:
When the result of the comparison by the first comparing means shows that the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notifying means is controlled so that the second suggestion information is notified. The first notification control means includes:
As a result of the comparison by the first comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special game state, the control unit controls the notification unit so that the first suggestion information is notified. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein: The determination information storage means,
And storing the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information,
The first comparing means includes:
Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, a determination result information obtaining means for obtaining the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is undetermined by the lottery determination means,
In the comparison by the first comparing unit, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, a first comparison stopping unit that stops the comparison by the first comparing unit. With
For the determination condition information obtained by the determination result information obtaining means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are arranged in order from the oldest reception order. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is for comparison. Random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment when a predetermined starting condition is established; random number information storing means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means; A storage information acquisition unit for acquiring one random number information stored in the unit, and a lottery result in one preset lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions based on the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit. Lottery determination means for determining the lottery condition, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and the lottery determination means after the end of the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means And a lottery control means for controlling the determination according to the predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means. Main control means for controlling, and sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, including notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state. Gaming machine
The main control means includes:
A first lottery condition acquisition unit that acquires information for determining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Lottery result determination for determining a lottery result when random number information acquired along with the acquisition of the information is determined by the lottery determination unit under the lottery condition determined by the information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit. Means,
A determination information transmitting unit that transmits to the sub-control unit, determination result information indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result;
A second lottery condition obtaining unit for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit,
Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means,
Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by condition information transmitting means of the main control means,
Judgment information receiving means for receiving judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means,
A determination information storage unit that stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with each other;
A second comparing unit that compares a lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage unit with a lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit;
Notification setting means for setting the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means,
When the suggestion information is notified by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means, a second control section controls whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means based on a comparison result by the second comparison means. A game machine comprising: a notification control unit. The second notification control means includes:
As a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match, control is performed such that the suggestion information is notified by the notifying means. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein: The second notification control means includes:
When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the second comparing means, control is performed so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notifying means. 7. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein:

Images